Hitachi ink jet printer rx2 s инструкция - Большая энциклопедия инструкций и руководств

HITACHI　 Printer

Instruction Manual

INK JET PRINTER FOR INDUSTRIAL MARKING

Model RX2

Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.This printer employs a noncontact, ink-jet method to print onto a print target.This instruction manual describes the basic operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and other detailed handling procedures of the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.If the printer is improperly handled or maintained, it may not operate smoothly and may become defective or cause an accident. It is therefore essential that you read this manual to gain a complete understanding of the printer and use it correctly.After thoroughly reading the manual, properly store it for future reference.

IF you changed the language of the screen by mistake, see Chapter 7.8 «Selecting Languages».

●Safety Precautions (1)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS● Before using the printer, thoroughly read the following safety precautions for optimum printer

use.● You should observe the precautions set forth below in order to use the product properly and

avoid endangering you or other persons or damaging property. For the purpose of clarifying the severity of injury or damage and likelihood of occurrence, the precautions are classified into two categories, WARNING and CAUTION, which both describe hazardous situations that may arise if you ignore the precautions and perform an incorrect handling or operating procedure. The precautions in these two categories are both important and must therefore be observed without fail.

WARNINGWARNING is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which may cause severe personal injury or death if the warning against performing an incorrect handling procedure is ignored.

CAUTIONCAUTION is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which may cause personal injury or property damage if the warning against performing an incorrect handling procedure is ignored.

● If the warning in the CAUTION category is ignored, serious results may occur depending on the situation.

● After the manual has been read, it must be stored in such a location that all printer operation personnel can refer to it at all times.

● All the instructions set forth in this manual are important and must therefore be observed without fail.

Pictograph Examples

The symbols are used to indicate precautions (including those related to potential warnings) to be observed. Detailed information is furnished by a picture within the symbol outline (a shock hazard is indicated by the example shown at left).

The symbols are used to describe prohibited actions. The details of a prohibited action are given by a picture within or near the symbol outline (the example shown at left dictates that you must keep flames away).

The symbols are used to describe required actions. Detailed instructions are given by a picture within the symbol outline (the example shown at left dictates that a ground connection must be made).

User hereby agrees not to export or re-export this product to any end-user who the user has reason to suspect may utilize the product for the design, development or reproduction of nuclear, chemical or biochemical weapons.

Restrictions on Export

File management and USB management are carried out using eParts made from eSOL.Ethernet is the product name of Xerox Corporation in America.

(2) ●Safety Precautions

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)

WARNING● Ensure that there is no flame- or arc-generating device around the

printer.The ink and makeup are both flammable and may cause fire. Fire can be generated by matches, lighters, cigarettes, heaters, stoves, gas burners, welders, grinders and static electricity. Arcs may be generated from open-type relays, switches, and brush motors. Before handling the ink and makeup, remove static electricity from your body, peripheral equipment, and so on. In the interest of safety, position a dry-chemical fire extinguisher near the printer.

● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, install the printer at an adequately ventilated location.

Never install the printer in an enclosed space.Connect exhaust equipment to the printer in order to prevent it from fillingwith organic solvent vapor.

● Do not insert tweezers, a screwdriver, or any other metal article into the ink ejection hole in the end of the print head.When the printer is ready to print, a high voltage (approximately 6 kV) is applied to the deflection electrode section in the print head. Exercise caution to avoid electric shock, injury, and fire.

● Do not remove the outer covering. A high voltage is applied to some sections of the printer. Exercise caution to avoid electric shock and injury.

● Use an AC voltage of 100 to120 V or 200 to 240 V ±10% only and a power frequency of 50 or 60 Hz only.If the above requirements are not met, the electric parts may overheat and burn, creating a risk of fire or electric shock.

● Never drain the ink or makeup waste solution into a public sewer system.Waste disposal must comply with all appropriate regulations. Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further information.

● Exercise caution to avoid inadvertently disconnecting, forcibly pulling, or bending piping tubes.Since the ink and makeup in some portions of piping tubes are pressurized, they may splash into your eyes or mouth or onto your hands or clothing.If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or cold water and consult a physician.

●Safety Precautions (3)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)

WARNING● While the printer is operating, do not look into the ink ejection hole in the

end of the print head. Ink or makeup may enter your eyes or mouth or soil your hands or clothing. If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or

cold water and consult a physician.

● Before servicing the printer, be sure to stop the ink ejection.Because ink or makeup may splash into your eyes or mouth or onto your hands or clothing. If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or cold water and consult a physician.

● If an earthquake, fire, or other emergency occurs while the printer is engaged in printing or just turned on, press the Main power switch to turn off the power.

● The printer must be managed in compliance with all appropriate regulations.

Read and understand the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheet (SDS) before using any ink or makeup.

● Use Hitachi approved consumables and periodic replacement parts. Using products that are not designated by Hitachi could cause s failure in certain functions.

● Warning for Mercury — THE LAMP IN THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS MERCURY.

RECYCLE OR DISPOSE OF IT ACCORDING TO APPLICABLE

ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS. For Recycling and Disposal information, contact your government agency, the

Electronic Industries Alliance at www.eiae.org, and/or www.lamprecycle.org (in

the US), or the Electronic Product Stewardship Canada at www.epsc.ca (in

Canada). For more information, call 1-800-HITACHI (1-800-448-2244) (in the

US).

(4) ●Safety Precautions

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)

WARNING● When charging a refill of ink or makeup, exchanging ink, or otherwise

handling ink or makeup, take enough care not to spill ink or makeup.If you spill any ink or makeup by mistake, wipe it off neatly and promptly with wiping paper or something similar. Do not close the maintenance cover until you make sure that the portion you have just wiped is completely dry.

You must pay particular attention when you have spilled ink or makeup inside the printer and it is not completely dry. Why? Because vapors of ink or makeup will stay inside the printer and may catch on or cause a fire.

If you find it hard to wipe the printer when it is turned on, stop it with the maintenance cover open. Power it down, and then wipe it off again.

● If you wish to clean the casing of the printer with wiping paper impregnated with makeup, be sure to do so with the power off.

Attempting to clean it when the power is on will cause makeup or vapors of makeup to enter the printer, possibly catching on or causing a fire. When the cleaning is over, open the maintenance cover and make sure that no makeup has entered and no vapors remain inside.

● Should you find a leak of ink or makeup inside the printer while the printer is running or being maintained, wipe it off promptly with wiping paper or something similar. Then, with the maintenance cover open, stop the printer, power it down, and repair the leak.

Continuing operation with a leak of ink or makeup will cause an anomaly, resulting in abnormal printing. Ink and makeup are flammable. They may therefore catch on or cause a fire.

● If you wish to receive ink particles in a beaker, for a printing test for example, use an electrically conductive beaker and connect the beaker securely to the ground.

Do not let the tip of the printing head enter the beaker.

Ink particles used for printing are electrically charged. An ungrounded beaker has a gradually rising charge, possibly catching on or causing a fire.

● Ensure that all electrical wiring, connections and grounding comply with applicable cords. Properly connect the printer to its dedicated ground.

Complete the above procedure to avoid electrical shock hazards.

● When welding, keep enough space between the IJ printer and the welding work area to prevent the arc from starting a fire. Also, be sure to

insulate the printhead and IJ printer frame to keep the welding current from flowing to the control section of the printer, and to make a separate ground connection for the printer.

●Safety Precautions (5)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)

CAUTION● Only persons who have completed an operator training course for

Hitachi IJP can operate and service the printer.If the printer is operated or serviced incorrectly, it may malfunction or break down.

● Do not attempt to make repairs for any purpose other than operation or maintenance.

● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, observe the following handling precautions.

Secure adequate space for the ink/makeup handling area and printer installation site. At least 200 m must be provided per print head. Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided.When handling the ink or makeup, wear protective gloves and safety goggles to avoid direct skin contact. If the ink or makeup comes into contact with skin, wash thoroughly with soap and warm or cold water.When transferring the ink or makeup to or from a bottle, exercise caution to prevent it coming into contact with the printer or surrounding articles. If there is any spillage, immediately wipe it clean using a cloth moistened with makeup.

● Ink and makeup must be stored as flammable liquids. Storage must comply with local regulatory requirements. Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further information.

● If extraneous noise enters the printer, it may malfunction or break down.For maximum noise immunity, observe the following installation and wiring precautions.

Ensure that 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC power cables are not bundled with other power supply cables.Insulate the printer main body and print head so that they do not come into direct contact with the conveyor or other devices.If the employed print target detector is housed in a metal case, use a plastic mounting brace for the purpose of insulating the detector from the conveyor and other devices.Be sure that the print target detector wiring is not bundled together with other power supply cables.

● Please make sure the print status and print content are correct each time when you start operation of IJP.

● Please implement periodical checkup of print status in the process, even including during production.

● A touch panel is employed for data entry to operation screen. When manipulating the Touch panel, use only fingers. If the touch panel is operated with metal and/or sharp objects such as ball point pen, it may malfunction or break down.

(6) ●Safety Precautions

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)

FCC NoticeThis device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

●Contents 1

1. USAGE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11.1 Ink and makeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 IJ printer long-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3 Print head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.4 Shutdown (no-cleaning stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.5 Cautions on operating time when printer is in service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.6 Heating of ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.7 Ink concentration control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.8 Gutter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.9 Protection sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

2. COMPONENT NAMES AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.1 External views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2 Main body internal parts arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.3 Print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

3. BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.1 Start operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1.1 Start operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1.2 When an error occurred at the start of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.1.3 Ready and Standby state switching operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

3.1.4 Specifying the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

3.2 Shut down operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

3.2.1 Automatically stopping by pressing one button (RX2-S only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

3.2.2 Stopping ink ejection by pressing the screen button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

3.2.3 Turning off the main power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

3.3 Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

3.3.1 Operating Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

3.3.2 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

3.3.3 Basic operation to change the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

3.3.4 Operations (OK, Back, Apply) which exit from a screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

CONTENTS

2 ●Contents

4. CREATION AND PRINTING OF MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . .4-14.1 Print description screen (initial screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 Edit messages to be printed (Change message screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.3 Call and print saved messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

4.4 Overwrite messages to be printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

4.5 Edit messages different from the current message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

4.6 Save created messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

4.7 Set the print format (Fixed layout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

4.7.1 Select the print items to be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

4.7.2 Set the number of print lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

4.7.3 Add and delete print items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

4.7.5 Print a bar code (RX2-S only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

4.8 Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4.8.1 Select the print items to be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4.8.2 Set the print items to be edited. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4.8.3 Add and delete print items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

4.8.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

4.8.5 Print a bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.8.6 Cautions for printing overlapped some print items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.9 Print characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

4.9.1 Print fixed characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

4.10 Use the calendar function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

4.10.1 Print calendar characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

4.10.2 Print future date (offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

4.10.3 Print by substituting a different character for the date (substitution rule) . . . . . . . . 4-44

4.11 Print shift code (Optional on RX2-S). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

4.12 Update the print contents at a fixed interval(Time count)

(Optional on RX2-S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

4.13 Use the count function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

4.13.1 Print count characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

4.13.2 Use count multiplication printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

4.13.3 Skip specified character and print (Count skip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

4.14 Set the print specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

4.14.1 Set the character height, character width, and orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

4.14.2 Set repeat printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

4.14.3 Set various printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

4.14.4 Fine adjust the print specifications (Adjust print parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

●Contents 3

5. MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15.1 Confirm the Unit information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5.2 Monitor operational status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.3 Print without any sensor signal (Test print, Start printing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

5.4 Confirm the registered software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.5 Checking the functions that can be performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

6. ENVIRONMENT SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Set the user environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2 Set the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

6.3 Set up the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

6.4 Changing the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

6.5 Setting password for each user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

7. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Manage messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.1.1 Managing stored messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.1.2 Changing the message name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

7.1.3 Deleting stored messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

7.1.4 Changing message number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

7.1.5 Changing the group to which a message belongs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7.2 Manage group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7.2.1 Manage group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7.2.2 Change group name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

7.2.3 Delete a stored group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

7.2.4 Change group number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

7.3 Creating a user pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

7.3.1 Creating and saving user pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

7.3.2 Selecting a user pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-197.3.3 Editing a pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

7.3.4 Creating a user pattern of a free size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

7.3.5 Selecting a bitmap file(BMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

7.4 Touch screen coordinate correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

7.5 Backing up data to USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

7.6 Editing standard pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-337.7 Editing Substitution Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-357.8 Selecting Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

4 ●Contents

8. INK AND MAKEUP REPLENISHMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18.1 Replenishing the ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.2 Replenishing the makeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

9. WHEN WARNING OR FAULT WAS GENERATED. . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1 Display when warning or fault was generated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.2 On-screen message descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9.2.1 Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9.2.2 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

9.2.3 Other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9.3 When checking the warning and fault generation status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

9.4 Remedial action to be taken in the event of a printing failure. . . . . . . . . . 9-11

10. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

11. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

12. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

13. APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

● Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

●Ink and makeup 1-1

Storage temperature Shutdown Period Guideline *1

0 to35 C 3 weeks

35 to 40 C 2 weeks

40 to 45 C 1 week

1.1 Ink and makeup (1) Ink and makeup replenishment

The printer employs an automatic ink/makeup replenishment system. While the printer is operated, the ink reservoir automatically supplies the ink and the makeup reservoir automatically supplies the makeup to the ink main tank at regular intervals. If the ink or makeup replenisher level is too low, an alarm is issued. In this case, replenish the ink or makeup without delay.(For the replenishment procedures, see Section 8.)

(2) Ink periodic replacementFor the replacement procedures, see “Technical Manual Chapter 6”.●While the IJ printer ink circulates for operations, it reacts with the atmospheric air elements and deteriorates with time. Therefore, it needs periodic replacement. The guide for determining the replacement interval conforms to the handling guidance of each ink.

*What is makeup? :The makeup serves as the replenisher that makes up for the constituent loss due to ink evaporation during ink ejection. It is also used as a cleaning solution.

1.2 IJ printer long-term shutdownWhen the IJ printer is shut down for a long time due to production or other circumstances, the ink may accrete inside of the printer and cause such problems as inability to be ejected or to be recovered. When this occurs, the following actions must be taken.

Prevent accretion by operating the printer periodically.Operate (eject ink) the printer for 1 hour or longer at least once during the “Shutdown Period Guideline” shown in the table below.

Perform long-term shutdown storage work.Before storage, drain the ink from inside the printer and fill the printer with makeup.When restarting operation after storage, drain the makeup from inside the printer and fill the printer with ink.Refer to Technical manual “6.15 Long-term Shutdown” for detail.

*1: Maximum period the printer can be continuously shut down without being operated.●The values in the table are for MEK based ink.●Handling of ink other than the above requires special handling in accordance with the handling

guidance of each ink.

1. USAGE PRECAUTIONS

Since “ Perform long-term shutdown storage work” requires special work, it is recommended to contact your local distributor and ask for the work.

CAUTION

1-2 ●Print head cleaning

1.3 Print head cleaningTake the following precautions when cleaning ink from around the nozzle.

(1) Orient the end of the print head downward and pour makeup onto the dirty part and clean while catching the makeup in a beaker.

(2) After cleaning, thoroughly wipe the print head with wiping paper and allow it to dry.●Thoroughly dry the nozzle, charge electrode, deflection electrode, mounting base and fringe of the gutter. Confirm that the parts are sufficiently dry before starting the next operation. If operated while wet, the printer will not start normally.●While the print head is wet, do not orient its end upward.

(3) Never immerse the print head in the makeup.

(4)When printing is frequently performed or the distance between the print material and the print head is short, ink splashes may stain the end of the print head and the print head cover. If this condition is left unresolved, the stained status will be made worse, resulting in a print error or emergency stop. If a print error or emergency stop frequently occurs because of stain due to ink splashes, stop the operation in progress and clean the end of the print head (around the nozzle, charge electrode, deflection electrode, mounting base and gutter) and the print head cover. Do this in addition to the cleaning to be performed at the end of each day’s work.

Air purging of the print head is effective against staining due to ink splashing.See the Technical Manual “3.1 Print head air purge”.

Cleaning range

Do not pour the makeup over this section.Wipe the print head clean with wiping paper dampened with the makeup.

Nozzle

Deflection electrode

Charge electrode

Gutter

●Shutdown 1-3

1.4 Shutdown (no-cleaning stop)When you press the Shutdown on the upper right-hand corner of the screen, the printer stops after completing its automatic nozzle cleaning sequence. If you repeatedly activate the Shutdown to stop an operation, excessive makeup will enter the printer, thereby thinning the ink or producing an unduly high ink main tank solution level. If it is absolutely necessary to repeatedly stop the printer operation, use the following procedure.

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Startup

Com=0

＝＝＝＝＝ Manual Control Menu ＝＝＝＝＝

Start printing

The current message is printed.

No-cleaning stop

Stops ink ejectionwithout cleaning.

Cancel

StandbyNo deflection voltage isapplied. The printerstatus becomes Standby.

＝＝＝＝＝ Shutdown Process Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

Shutdown will stop the ink jet.

Solution To stop the ink jet, press <OK>.

OK Close

Press the Manual . (The Manual is displayed commonly on all the screens.)

Press the No-cleaning stop within the control menu.

Press the OK .

An ink stop confirmation message appears.

*1: Do not use the Shutdown to stop operation more than two successive times.*2: When operation was stopped using No-cleaning stop , if left in that state, the ink will become stuck in the

nozzle and cause ink stream bending, nozzle clogging, and printing disturbance. Apply makeup to the orifice plate to wash it within 30 minutes after a stop to cause the ink to eject once again.

The no-cleaning stop procedure works even while the startup sequence is being executed. (The Shutdown button is inoperative during the startup sequence.)

Shutdown

MManual

Manual

Common to all screens

No-cleaning stop

MManual

Shutdown

1-4 ●Cautions on operating time when printer is in service

1.6 Heating of ink(1) If the ambient temperature is under approximately 20 C, the ink is heated by a heating unit in the print head. The startup processing time relative to when not operating becomes long.

When not operating: Approximately 1.5 minutes When operating: Maximum approximately 10 minutes (Changes depending on the ambient temperature)

*Depending on the type of ink, the heating unit may not be used. Refer to the handling guidance of each ink.

(2) When a heating unit fault occurs, take care of the following items.If a heating unit fault occurs, the messages “Ink Heating Unit too High”, “Ink Heating Unit Temperature Sensor Fault”, or “Ink Heating Unit Over Current” are displayed and the IJ printer fault stops.The IJ printer can be restarted by pressing the Reset or Close . However, the ink will not be heated even if the temperature drops thereafter.

Once “do not perform ink heating” is set, the following message is always displayed whenever the power is turned on thereafter. Cancel the message by pressing the Close and be sure to inform your nearest local distributor.

If the printer is temporally operated in «do not perform ink heating» status, the operation of the printer may become possible by resetting the excitation voltage.

Reset the excitation voltage according to Technical Manual “6.11 Excitation V Adjustment”.

＝＝＝＝＝ Ink Temperature Correction Notice ＝＝＝＝＝

The selected setup does not allow ink temperature corrections to be made.

Solution Contact your local distributor.

1.5 Cautions on operating time when printer is in service

(1) Cautions when printer is repeatedly stopped immediately after the start of operation

If you repeatedly stop the printer immediately after the start of operation, automatic nozzle cleaning at shutdown will cause the ink in the IJ printer to gradually become thinner. For stable operation of the IJ printer, operate the printer for a given amount of time or more once started.( =in Ink eject status) During the operation, the ink viscosity is adjusted automatically and returns to the initial value. The required amount of operation time varies depending on the ambient temperature or ink types used.Refer to the handling guidance of each ink for details.

(2) Caution when daily operating time is relatively longThe IJ printer emits an ink jet when printing, so the outside and inside of the print head cover will become dirty with accumulated ink spillage during operation. To prevent printing defects due to this ink accumulation, periodically check the head cover and clean it as required.

●Ink concentration control 1-5

＝＝＝＝＝ No Ink Concentration Control ＝＝＝＝＝

The current settings have made ink concentration control unavailable.

Solution Contact your local distributor.

1.7 Ink concentration control

(1) The ink is automatically controlled to maintain optimum concentration for printing. *Depending on the type of ink, ink concentration control may not be performed by viscometer. Refer to the handling guidance of each ink.

(2)If an error occurs in the viscometer which is used to control ink concentration, take care of the following points:There are three types of viscometer errors:

“Viscometer Ink Temperature Sensor Fault”, “Viscometer Reading Instability”, and “Viscometer Reading Out of Range”.

When a “Viscometer Ink Temperature Sensor Fault” occurs, the unit will enter the fault stop state.Re-start is possible by pressing the Close , but the setting will be changed to the state in which ink concentration control based on the measured result using the viscometer is not performed thereafter.Once the setting of automatic concentration control is released, every time the power is turned on, the following message will appear. Cancel the message by pressing the Close and be sure to inform your nearest local distributor.

When “Viscosity Reading Instability” or “Viscosity Readings Out of Range” occurs, the unit will not enter the fault stop state and printing can be continued. However, you should contact your nearest local distributor for inspection.

1.8 Gutter cleaning

The IJ printer collects ink not used for printing from the gutter. At the same time, it sucks in atmospheric gas, dust, and other matter from the air. If these substances are mixed with the ink in the gutter, undissolved components in the ink or makeup may stick to the gutter. If the system is run for 24 consecutive hours without automatic cleaning, these components will gradually accumulate in the gutter. This, together with the ink stream coming into contact with it, may cause such errors as “an error stemming from a dirty head”.If any such component sticks to the gutter, immerse it in a solution of about 0.5% household dishwashing detergent and clean it for about 10 minutes with an ultrasonic cleaner. The dirt can then be removed.

1-6 ●Protection sheet

1.9 Protection sheet

A protection sheet is provided to protect the screen display of the IJ printer.This is used to prevent the screen display from becoming dirty, scratched, etc.

(1) Installing the protection sheetClean all dirt, debris, ink, etc., from the panel surface.Use a paper wipe, etc., soaked in water or makeup to wipe the display clean.*Install the protection sheet after the panel surface has dried.Peel off the removable paper from the back of the protection sheet.*Do not touch the double-sided tape on the back of the protection sheet.Affix the protection sheet to the IJ printer screen display as shown in the figure.

Protection sheet parts No.:451902(3pcs/pack)

(The protection sheet can be used for both the RX2-S and RX2-B.)

(2) Usage PrecautionsBe careful not to get ink or makeup on the protection sheet.If ink or makeup does get on the protection sheet, wipe it off immediately.

When ordering the protection sheet, please specify the following parts No.

●External views 2-1

2. COMPONENT NAMES AND FUNCTIONS2.1 External views

(1) External views

Operating status indicator lamps

Displays «Ready», «Fault» and «Warning»

Handle

USB cover

Start / Stop switch(*Standard Model only)

Main power switch

Power lamp

Maintenance coverOpened/closed for inkand makeup replacement and other maintenance purposes.

Print headThis section performs printing.

2-2 ●Main body internal parts arrangement

(2) External views (rear side)

2.2 Main body internal parts arrangement

Air-purge connection port

Makeup reservoir

Ink reservoir

Maintenance cover

Recovery filter

Pressure-reducing valve

Ink filter

Main ink tank

Exhaust duct connection port

●Print head 2-3

2.3 Print head

Print head cover lock thumbscrew

Nozzle orifice

Minus deflection electrode

Gutter

Plus deflection electrode

Charge electrode

3-1 ●Start operation

3.1 Start operation3.1.1 Start operation

●The ink and makeup contains organic solvents. When handling the ink and makeup, wear protective gloves and goggles so

that the ink will not directly contact your skin.●An LCD touch panel is used for the screen. Do not press the buttons with unreasonable force.●If the system shuts down, turn off the power by pressing the Stop switch. To

turn on the power and reuse the system, see “11. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES”.

3. BASIC OPERATION

CAUTION

Turn on the power by pressing the main power switch.

1 Remove the print head cover, and check whether or not the print head cover and the area around the nozzle are soiled by ink.

Since the IJ printer prints by ejecting ink against the print material, the outside and inside of the print head cover are soiled by splashing of the ink from the print material. To prevent printing problems due to soiling, check the soiling state and clean as required.See “1.3 Print head cleaning” for a description of the cleaning method.

When stopped only by Stop switch and the main power switch was not turned off at the previous operation, the main power switch does not have to be pressed.

Loosen the screw.

Print head coverPull out.

Around nozzle

Operating status Indicator lamps

Stop switch Start switch

Main power switch

●Start operation 3-2

Print description 2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Startup

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Ink operating time　　　　　　　１００(hours)

Cumulative op. time　　　　　　１００(hours)

Print count　　　　　　　　　１０００(prints)

Ink pressure　　　　　　　０．０００(MPa；standard value:０．２５０)

Changemessage

Selectmessage

Overwritemessage

Adjust printparameters

Operationmanagement

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

－＋

Current user ID : user2

Inter-laced

Print countreset

●Confirm the print description, count value, and calendar character contents.

Press the Start switch. (Press for about 2 seconds.)(Depending on the model, there may not be a Start switch. When the main power switch of 2 is pressed, the following “Print description” screen appears.)In the case of turning on the power again, ensure that status indicator lamp is off when Start switch is pressed.The “Print description” screen shown below appears.If the “Select login user” screen opened, see “3.1.4 Specifying the user”.

3-3 ●Start operation

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Startup

Com=0

＝＝＝＝＝ Ink Jet Startup Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

The ink jet will be turned ON.

Solution To turn the ink jet ON, press <Ready>.

Ready Cancel

Place a piece of wiping paper, etc., against the ink injection port at the end of the print

head and press the Startup → Ready .

●Ink is ejected from the nozzle inside the print head.●Place a piece of wiping paper, etc., against the ink ejection port in preparation for splashing of the ejected ink.

Startup

Print head

Wiping paper, etc.

Press Start up .

Press Ready .

●Start operation 3-4

● Continuous ejection of ink even though not printing is abnormal. If this occurs, press the Manual . The Manual Control Menu appears. Stop ink ejection by pressing the No-cleaning stop → OK .

MManual

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Shutdown

Com=0

＝＝＝＝＝ Manual Control Menu ＝＝＝＝＝

Start printing

The current message is printed.

No-cleaning stop

Stops ink ejection without cleaning.

Cancel

＝＝＝＝＝ Shutdown Process Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

Shutdown will stop the ink jet.

Solution To stop the ink jet, press <OK>.

OK Close

StandbyNo deflection voltage isapplied. The printerstatus becomes Standby.

● For a description of subsequent operation, see “3.1.2 When an error occurred at the start of operation”.● At ink ejection, ink may momentarily spurt out and soil the paper. However, this is normal.

Wait until the status changes from “Starting” to “Ready”.● When the temperature is low (approximately 20 C or lower), it may take longer than usual for the printer

to enter the “Ready” state.

Input the print target detection signal and check whether or not the print state and print description are correct.●If the print target detection signal is input when the status is “Ready”, the set print description is printed.

Press Manual .

Press No-cleaning stop .

Press OK .

3-5 ●Start operation

3.1.2 When an error occurred at the start of operation

Press the Manual . The Manual Control Menu appears. Stop ink ejection by

pressing the No-cleaning stop → OK .

1 MManual

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Shutdown

Com=0

＝＝＝＝＝ Manual Control Menu ＝＝＝＝＝

Start printing

The current message is printed.

No-cleaning stop

Stops ink ejection without cleaning.

Cancel

＝＝＝＝＝ Shutdown Process Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

Shutdown will stop the ink jet.

Solution To stop the ink jet, press <OK>.

OK Close

StandbyNo deflection voltage isapplied. The printerstatus becomes Standby.

Press Manual .

Press No-cleaning stop .

Press OK .

●Start operation 3-6

* Thoroughly wipe off the makeup on the surface of each part (including the mounting base) and dry each part thoroughly with wiping paper.

Clean the inside of the cleaning section with makeup.Clean the orifice plate, charge electrode, deflection electrode, gutter, and mounting base with makeup. (Also see “1.3 Print head cleaning”.)

Loosen the screw and remove the print head cover.2

Orifice plate

Charge electrode

Deflection electrode

Mounting base

Beaker

Cleaning bottle

Gutter

Area to be cleaned

Loosen the screw.

Print head coverPull out.

Around nozzle

3-7 ●Start operation

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Startup

Com=0

＝＝＝＝＝ Ink Jet Startup Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

The ink jet will be turned ON.

Solution To turn the ink jet ON, press <Ready>.

Ready Cancel

With the print head cover removed, press the Startup → Ready .

● Ink is ejected from the nozzle. (The status changes from “Stop” to “Starting”.● Operate the unit with the end of the print head remaining inside the beaker.

4 Startup

Press Start up .

Press Ready .

●Start operation 3-8

Confirm that the ink stream is at the center of the gutter.● Check the position of the ink stream from the sides and top of the print head as shown in the figure

and confirm that it is in the center of the gutter.

● If the ink stream is not at the center of the gutter, perform step 1 and stop the ink injection. After that, take action in accordance with Technical Manual “6.4 How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging”.

● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask) when checking the position of the ink stream.● If you should get ink or makeup in your eyes or mouth, immediately wash with warm

water or water and see a doctor. ● When ejecting the ink, do it after confirming that there is no one in the ejection direction. (Operate with the end of the print head inserted in a beaker, etc.)

WARNING

Install the print head cover.●Wait until the status changes to “Ready”.●If the “Cover open” error was displayed, press the Close .

Input the print target detection signal and check the printing state.(See “3.1.1 Start operation”.)

Gutter

Ink stream

Side direction

Upper direction

Gutter entrance diameter

The ink stream should be positioned at the center of the gutter inlet.

3-9 ●Start operation

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Startup

Com=0

＝＝＝＝＝ Manual Control Menu ＝＝＝＝＝

Eject inkEjects ink while apply-ing no deflection volt-age.

Cancel

＝＝＝＝＝ Ink Jet Startup Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

The ink jet will be turned ON.

Solution To turn the ink jet ON, press <Ready>.

Ready Cancel

Use this procedure when you want to eject ink from the nozzle for a purpose other than printing.(Use only during maintenance. To print, use the Startup )

Press the Manual . The Manual Control menu appears. Press the Eject ink → Ready .MManual

Ink ejection using the Manual Control Menu

● Operation can be aborted by pressing the Cancel at the “Manual Control Menu” and “Ink Jet Startup Confirmation message”.

● If the print head cover installed, the printer will not enter the Ready state even if this operation is performed. (Enters the Standby state)

Startup

Press Manual .

Press Eject ink .

Press Ready .

●Start operation 3-10

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Startup

Com=0

＝＝＝＝＝ Manual Control Menu ＝＝＝＝＝

Stops ink ejectionwithout cleaning.

Cancel

＝＝＝＝＝ Print Abort Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

Printing will be aborted.

Solution Press <OK> to abort.

OK Cancel

No-cleaning stop

No deflection voltage is applied. The printer status becomes Standby.

Standby

Start printing

The current message is printed.

3.1.3 Ready and Standby state switching operation (1) “Ready” state → “Standby” state switching

● With the conveyor interlock being activated by “Ready” signal, should this “Ready” signal be turned to “Standby”, the conveyor will stop.

Press the Manual . The Manual Control menu appears. Press the

Standby → OK .

1 MManual

Press Manual .

Press Standby .

Press OK .

3-11 ●Start operation

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Shutdown

Com=0

＝＝＝＝＝ Manual Control Menu ＝＝＝＝＝

ReadyThe deflection voltage is applied. The printer status becomes Ready.

No-cleaning stop

Stops ink ejectionwithout cleaning.

Cancel

＝＝＝＝＝ Print confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝　

The current message data will be printed.

Solution Press <OK> to print.

OK Cancel

(2) “Standby” state → “Ready” state switching

Press the Manual . The Manual Control Menu appears.

Press the Ready → OK .

1 MManual

Press OK .

Press Manual .

Press Ready .

●Start operation 3-12

3.1.4 Specifying the user(1) Functions

●Specifies the user to be logged in at power-on.●Selects the user and inputs the password when logging in.●The administrator defines the user name and password and password protection setting in advance. The password protection setting can be changed beforehand for each user. The user name must be within

12 digits.●Sets whether or not to select a user which logs in when the power is turned on.

See the Technical Manual “3.3 Selecting user when power is turned on”.

(2) OperationThe administrator sets the login procedure necessary at power-on beforehand.

Select login user 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Admin User2 User3

User4 User5 User6

User7 User8 User9

Select login user 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Admin User3

User4 User5 User6

User7 User8 User9

← 　Cancel

EntEnter

→

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ 123

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Delete

Change Change

ABC

User2

EntEnter

Turn on the power.The Select login user screen is displayed.

Press user name User2 .A password input window opens.

Input the password for user name “User2” and press Enter .The initial screen is displayed.

The saved user names are displayed.

A password input window opens.

Enter

3-13 ●Shut down operation

3.2 Shut down operation3.2.1 Automatically stopping by pressing one button (RX2-S only)

Press the Stop switch. (Press for about 2 seconds.)All operations up to IJ printer power OFF are performed automatically.Depending on the model, there may not be a Stop switch. Stop the ink with the button on the screen at 1 of par. 3.2.2, and turn off the power in accordance with par. 3.2.3.

The power is turned OFF by Stop switch from the state in which ink is being ejected or being stopped.(The main power switch does not have to be turned off. The power consumption does not change even if the main power switch remains ON.)

Main power switch

Start switchStop switch

●Shut down operation 3-14

3.2.2 Stopping ink ejection by pressing the screen button● Perform ink stop processing using the following procedure.

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Shutdown

Com=0

＝＝＝＝＝ Shutdown Process Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

Shutdown will stop the ink jet.

Solution To stop the ink jet, press <OK>.

OK Close

Press the Shutdown → OK .

A confirmation screen is displayed.

Shutdown1

●Wait for the status to change from “Stopping” to “Stop”.

Press Shutdown .

Press OK .

3-15 ●Shut down operation

Turn off method Method which displays a screen at the next operation

When the main power switch was turned off after being stopped by Stop switch.

Screen is displayed when the startup switch is turned ON after the main power switch was turned ON.

When the main power switch was turned off without using the stop switch

Screen is displayed when the main power switch is turned ON.

3.2.3 Turning off the main power switch

(1) RX2-S●Press Stop switch normally instead of main power switch to turn off the power at the end of operation.●If the IJ printer will not be used for a long time, turn off the main power switch.●Do not turn off the main power switch while ink is being ejected. See “11. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES”.●The state when the power is turned on at the next operation differs depending on the state when the main

power switch was turned off.

(2) RX2-B●Turn off main power switch at the end of operation.●Do not turn off the main power switch while ink is being ejected.

●Shut down operation 3-16

1. To prevent drying of the nozzle orifice and dust from sticking to the plate during unit storage, the unit is shipped with a “nozzle rubber seal” installed. Remove this “nozzle rubber seal” at

installation and test running and adjustment.

2. The “nozzle rubber seal” prevents drying of the orifice plate and dust from sticking to the plate. When the IJ printer will not be used for several days over a holiday, etc., we

recommend that the “nozzle rubber seal” be installed between the orifice plate and charge electrode at shutdown.

Store the “nozzle rubber seal” in a plastic bag, etc., to protect it from dirt and dust.Always install the “nozzle rubber seal” after cleaning it with makeup.When installing the “nozzle rubber seal”, be careful not to deform the chargeelectrode.

123

Usage precautions

Handling the nozzle rubber seal

Charge electrode

Orifice plate

Nozzle rubber seal

3-17 ●Basic operation

3.3 Basic operation3.3.1 Operating Scheme

(1) Overall view

Print description

(Menu 1)

Print description

(Menu 2)

Power ON Power OFF

Operationmanagement

Select message

Over Writemessage

Adjust printparameters

Environment setup menu

Auxiliary functionmenu

Maintenancemenu

: Screen name

* See next page, Change message

Change message

Edit message

Print format

Print specifications

Change message

Adjust printparameters

Edit message

Print format

Print specifications

Adjust printparameters

Change message

Select login user

Create/Edit message

For print target data

For save data

Change message

●Basic operation 3-18

(2) Change message

Change message Edit message

Print format

Print specifications

Various print setup

Count conditions

Calendar conditions

Adjust Inter-character

space Substitution rules

Shift code setup(Op on RX2-S)

(Op on RX2-S)

Time count conditions

* The display can be switched between screens Edit message, Print format, and Print specifications.

: Screen name

3-19 ●Basic operation

(3) Environment setup menu, Auxiliary menu, Maintenance menu

Environment setup menu

Auxiliary functionmenu

Maintenancemenu

User environment setup

Date / timesetup

Communicationenvironment

setup

Touch screensetup

Manage messages / Group

Create user pattern

Calibration touchscreen coordinates

Copy data(IJP → USB)

Copy data(USB → IJP)

Edit standardpattern

Edit substitution rules

Select languages

Unit information

Operationmanagement

Test print

ExcitationV update

(Nozzle test)

View alarmhistory

Circulation control

View software version

Comm. monitor(Optional on RX2-B)

Passwordprotection

Solenoid valve/pump test

(Optional on RX2-B)

●Basic operation 3-20

Print description 2015.07.07 12:45

MManual

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

《》

[Ready　　　]

Shutdown

Com=1

Current user ID : user2

Print description 2015.07.07 12:45

MManual

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

《》

[Stop 　　　] Com=0

Current user ID : user2

Startup

Off lineStop status

3.3.2 Status(1) The printer is in one of the following states.

No. State Description

1 Stop The ink is stopped. No deflection voltage is applied.

2 Standby The ink is ejected. No deflection voltage is applied.

3 ReadyThe ink is ejected. The deflection voltage is applied (printing is permitted by the sensor signal).

4 Starting State in which the printer changes from the inactive state to the standby state.

5 Ink heating Start up in process, with the ink being heated.

6 Stopping State in which the printer changes from the standby state to the stop state.

7 Drop adjust Period during which ink particles are not properly charged in the standby state.

8 Cover open Period during which the nozzle head cover is open in the standby state

9 Service Circulation control process for maintenance task execution.

10 Fault State in which a fault exists.

(2) The current states including the on-line/off-line (communication) state is constantly displayed at the top of the screen.

Ready status On line

3-21 ●Basic operation

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

《》

[Ready　　　]

Shutdown

WarningPrint description

◇◇◇◇◇ Ink Low Warning ◇◇◇◇◇

The ink level in the ink reservoir is low.Cause 1. The ink reservoir is almost empty. 2. The Low Level sensor in the ink reservoir is faulty.Solution 1. Add more ink to the ink reservoir within 60 minutes. 2. Check the Low Level sensor.

Ink Low Warning

Makeup Low Warning

Cancel

Com=0

Current user ID : user2

(3) When there is a “Not reset alarm”, a Warning is displayed. When the Warning is pressed, a warning list is displayed.

Press Warning .

Warning list Press Ink Low Warning .

●Basic operation 3-22

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0

Excitation V-ref.

Ref. ambient temperature

Automatic update

Incremental change

Print trigger source

Print data

Inc.

(0～19)

(℃)20

(1～9)

Excitation V update [Standby　　　]

SensorButton input

Data to be displayedFor test

Incre-ment

7 8 9

Enter

4 5 6 Clear

1 2 3

0 ← → Decre-ment

Cancel

１１－ MManual

HOME

Shutdown

3.3.3 Basic operation to change the settings (1) Overview

●There are 3 types of settings.

No. ClassificationSet value confirmation method

Set value change method

1 Setting of valueThe value is displayed on the numeric buttons.

Display the value window by pressing the numeric button and input the value.

Setting with few selections. (All selection buttons are displayed: mainly a choice between the two)

The pressed button becomes yellow.

Press the applicable button.

Settings with many selections. (When a button is pressed, a selection menu is displayed in a window.)

The set value is displayed on the input button.

Display the selection menu window by pressing the but-ton and select the relevant item.

(2) Operation (Maintenance “Excitation V update” screen is used as an example.)●There are 3 types of settings.

1 “Excitation V-ref.” setting (Value input)Display the numeric window by pressing the numbers button and input the value.

Minimum value is input.

Each time this button is pressed, the set value is increased by 1.

The value window is closed and the input value is reflected on the screen.

Each time this button is pressed, the set value is decreased by 1.

Press the numeric button.

Numeric windows displayed.

Excitation V update 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Standby　　　]

Excitation V-ref.

Ref. ambient temperature

Automatic update

Incremental change

Print trigger source

Print data

Inc.

SensorButton input

Data to be displayedFor test

(0～19)

(1～9)

－＋

(℃)MManual

HOME

Shutdown

3-23 ●Basic operation

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0

Excitation V-ref.

Ref. ambient temperature

Automatic update

Incremental change

Print trigger source

Print data

Inc.

(1～9)

Data to be displayedFor test

SensorButton input

Excitation V update [Standby　　　]

(0～19)－＋

(℃)MManual

HOME

Shutdown

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0

Excitation V-ref.

Ref. ambient temperature

Automatic update

Incremental change

Print trigger source

Print data

(1～9)

Inc.

Data to be displayedFor test

SensorButton input

(0～19)

(℃)

Cancel

DisableDec.Inc.

Excitation V update [Standby　　　]

(0～19)－＋

(℃)MManual

HOME

Shutdown

“Print trigger source” settingPress the applicable button.

3 “Automatic update” settingDisplay the selection menu window by pressing the button and close from within that window.

Press the Button input .

Press the button.

Selection menu window is displayed.

●Basic operation 3-24

Date/time setup 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0

Current time

Calendar time control

Calendar time

Clock system　　 24-hour clock

clock stop

０７２０１５ (year) ０７(month) (day)

１２４５４５(hour) (minute) (second)

０７２０１５ (year) ０７(month) (day)

１２４５４５(hour) (minute) (second)

12-hour clock

● Press OK to apply the date/time setup.

● The current time affects the clock display only

when changes are made.

● Calendar character will be printed based on «calendar time»

Cancel

same as current time

Cancel

[Ready　　　]

MManual

HOME

Shutdown

No. Classification Contents

1Screens with OK and Cancel

● When OK is pressed, the set contents are accepted and the display returns to the previous screen.

● When Cancel is pressed, the set contents are canceled and the display returns to the previous screen.

● Apply is not displayed.

2 Screens with Back

● When Back is pressed, the display returns to the previous screen.● When Apply is pressed, the set contents are accepted.● When Back was pressed in the state in which Apply is not pressed, a confirmation window is displayed

and action is requested.

(2) Screen examples Screen with OK and Cancel

[Example of Date/time setup screen]

Cancel

Apply

Back

3.3.4 Operations (OK, Back, Apply) which exit from a screen (1) Overview

●There are 2 types of setup screens.

● When “Apply” was performed during editing of the current message and at the User environment setup screen, the set contents are reflected in printing.

● For the setup of whether or not to show some buttons as icon, refer to «6.3 setup the touch screen.»

Back

Apply

Cancel

When set withouticons at the Touchscreen setup screen.

3-25 ●Basic operation

Save message 2015.07.07 12:45

Com=0[Ready 　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

０１ＧＲＯＵＰ００１

Simple list

Save message as (name)

Group No.

Free space 20%

ＡＢＣ００１

Cancel

MManual

HOME

Shutdown

Print format 2015.07.07 12:45

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Com=0[Ready 　　　　　]

Select line

　Bold 　　　　　　　　　（times　1- 9）

　Bar code

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　　]

none

Inter-char. space(MAX 27 ) 02

5×7

Linespacing(MAX 2 )Dot matrix

Printspec.

Editmessage

Column 1 Column 1

To OverallAdd Col.Insert C.Delete C.2 lines

…

3 lines

…

1 line

…

2nd line1st line

ManualShutdown

Apply HOME

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Printspec.

Editmessage

－＋Apply

MManual

HOME

Shutdown

BackBack

[Example of Save message screen]

Screen with Back button

[Example of Print format screen]

Cancel

Apply

Back

When set withouticons at the Touchscreen setup screen.

●Basic operation 3-26

Print format 2015.07.07 12:45

文字間調整

Com=0[Ready 　　　　　]

変更段数指定

　横倍角　　　　　　　　　（横倍　1～9）

　バーコード

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　　]

なし

文字間スペース 02

12×16

段間スペース

文字サイズ

印字仕様

文字入力

一括設定

Column 1

登録BackTo OverallAdd Col.Insert C.Delete C.2 lines

…

1 line

…

2nd line1st line

＝＝＝＝＝　　　　Data Entry Confirmation　　　　＝＝＝＝＝

　　The data entered will be used in the print message.

Solution 1. To save the input data and use it for print message, press <OK>.

2. To delete the input data, press <Cancel changes>.

3. To return to the previous screen, press <Cancel>.

O K CancelCancelchanges

Apply

MManual

HOME

Shutdown

[Example of confirmation message when Back was pressed]

Accepts theset contents.

Return from set contents to originalcontents.

Closes the message window with theset contents remaining displayed.

4-1 ●Print description screen

4. CREATION AND PRINTING OF MESSAGES

Print description 2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Startup

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Ink operating time　　　　　　　１００(hours)

Cumulative op. time　　　　　　１００(hours)

Print count　　　　　　　　　１０００(prints)

Ink pressure　　　　　　　０．０００(MPa；standard value:０．２５０)

Changemessage

Selectmessage

Overwritemessage

Adjust printparameters

Operationmanagement

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

《

－

》

＋

MaintenanceAuxiliaryfunction

Environmentsetup menu

2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Shutdown

Com=0

Current user ID : user2

Selectlogin user

Create/Editmessage

Inter-laced

Print countreset

4.1 Print description screen (initial screen)(1) Overview

●The display is shifted to the screens for message edit and Maintenance, Auxiliary function, and Environment setup menu screens by pressing each button.●The print image can be confirmed at the “Print layout” area.

Item Description Reference

Change message ●Edits and corrects current message. 4.2

Select message ●Calls and prints saved messages. 4.3

Overwrite message ●Overwrites the current message. 4.4

Adjust print parameters ●Creates and edits messages different from the current message. 4.14.4

Operation management ●Displays operation status. 5.2

Maintenance ●Displays the maintenance menu. 5

Auxiliary function ●Displays the auxiliary functions menu. 7

Environment setup menu ●Displays the environment setup menu 6

Select login user ●Logs in again as a different user from currently logged in user. 6.4

Create/Edit message ●Creates and edits messages different from the current message. 4.5

Print count reset ●Reset the print count to zero (0). 4.1

The Shutdown is displayed during ink ejection.

The Startup is displayed during stop.

Displays the print layout.

Displays the operation management information.

When the Menu is pressed, the display is switched.

Displays the zoom in or zoom out.

Displays the scroll.

For details regarding the printing method display, refer to «4.14.1 Set the character height, character width, and orientation.»

Print count is reset to 0.If is indicated in off-line state.

●Print description screen 4-2

Print description 2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Startup

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Ink operating time　　　　　　　１００(hours)

Cumulative op. time　　　　　　１００(hours)

Print count　　　　　　　　　１０００(prints)

Ink pressure　　　　　　　０．０００(MPa；standard value:０．２５０)

Changemessage

Selectmessage

Overwritemessage

Adjust printparameters

Operationmanagement

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

－＋

Current user ID : user2

Inter-laced

Print countreset

(3) Current message and saved message●There are 2 types of messages; current messages and saved messages.

Types of messages

Type Features

Current message

●The message currently being printed is called “current message”.●When the power is turned on, the last current message is memorized.●The print layout of the current message is displayed on the Print description

screen.●The contents of the current message can be changed by calling the message

from the saved messages.

Saved message●Messages can be given a message name. Multiple messages can be saved

beforehand.

(2) OperationThe Print description screen is displayed.

Press the Print count reset on the Print description screen.Confirmation message of «Print count reset.» will be displayed.

Press OK on the confirmation message window.Print count will be reset to zero (0).

Print count reset

4-3 ●Edit messages to be printed

ＸＹA B C D E F G

２０１５．１２．３１

A B C D E F G

２０１５．１２．３１

A B C D

２０１５．１２．３１

ＸＹE F G

4.2 Edit messages to be printed (Change message screen)(1) Overview

●Edits the current message (message currently being printed).●There are 2 types of print format.●Style displayed in the Details mode of the message name list display of the Select message screen shows the

type of print format.

Types of Style

Type of Style Meaning Features

(a) Individual Individual setup of fixed layout Multiple character sizes can be mixed.

(b) Overall Overall setup of fixed layoutCharacter size and inter-character space set value are matched at all lines.Only 1 column can be input.

●The background of the current message edit screen is colored.

Edit screen background color

Editing objective Background color

Current message Light green

Saved message Gray

Print items are stacked from the bottom.

Columns (vertical list) with the sameline count, line spacing, and character size list are linked and handled.

Columns of several different formats can be input.

(a) Individual setup

(b) Overall setup

Print items are stacked from the bottom.

Only one column (vertical list) with the same line count, line spacing, and character size list is handled.

An arbitrary position can be set for each print item.

A print item can be lapped over other print items.

●Edit messages to be printed 4-4

●When the Apply is pressed during editing, the input value is applied and reflected in printing. The input value is also applied when returning to the Print description screen by pressing the Back .●When the Back is pressed at the Print format, Print specifications, and Edit message, various print setup

screens, the confirmation message “Data Entry Confirmation” is displayed.

Apply

Back

Functions of confirmation message “Data Entry Confirmation”

Button Contents

OK Applies the message by input value and switches to the Print description screen.

Cancel changes Cancels the input value and returns to the state before the change.

Cancel Returns to the original screen with the input data as it was.

Back

4-5 ●Edit messages to be printed

Print description 2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Startup

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Ink operating time　　　　　　　１００(hours)

Cumulative op. time　　　　　　１００(hours)

Print count　　　　　　　　　１０００(prints)

Ink pressure　　　　　　　０．０００(MPa；standard value:０．２５０)

Changemessage

Selectmessage

Overwritemessage

Adjust printparameters

Operationmanagement

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

－＋

Current user ID : user2

Inter-laced

Print countreset

Change message 2015.07.07 12:45

Save and Back

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

:Multiple print formats can be mixed.

－＋

Printformat

Edit message

Print spec.

Variousprint setup

Individualsetup

Overallsetup

Free layout

:Character size and inter-character space set value are matched at all lines. Only 1 column can be input.

:An arbitrary position can be set for each print item.

Back

StartupMManual

HOME

Change the display contents using the group, search, sort, and select page functions so that the desired message name is displayed.

(2) OperationThe Print description screen is shown below.

Press the Change message on the Print description screen.The Print format screen is displayed.

Press the Back .To save as a registered print data ,press save and back .

4 Back

Press Individual setup , Overall setup or Free layout to modify <Format setup>.

Change message

●Call and print saved messages 4-6

4.3 Call and print saved messages(1) Overview

●Calls and prints saved messages.●The message currently being printed is called “Current message”.●When a message is called during printing, the Print description display changes to the called message and

printing continues to print the previous contents. The printed result changes from the next printing.●The desired message can be efficiently found by changing the display contents of the message name list.

Method of changing the message name list display

Item Contents

Group

●Press the group No. button.●Only the messages belonging to the selected group are displayed.●When “0:All message names” is selected, the message names of all

the groups are displayed.

Previous display, next display ●Switches the message name list display screen.

Select page ●Selects the message name list page.

Sort●The sort order can be switched by pressing the heading part of the

message name list display.

●The first several characters of a message name are input and only the message names beginning with those characters are displayed.

●If the Search conditions are not input, all the message names in that group are displayed.

Display All●Defines Group No. as «00» and the search condition as space, then

displays message name list.

Details● Details displays the update date/time, Style, and group No., as well

as the No. and message name.● Simple list displays the No. and message name.

Free number

● By pressing Free number , all the registered numbers will be displayed.● Nicknames will be sorted and displayed in ascending sequence of Registration numbers.● Search by Group No. or Search condition input or Display all is

NOT available.

●Style displayed in the Details mode shows the type of print format.

Types of Style

Type of style Meaning

Individual Individual setup of fixed layout.

Overall Overall setup of fixed layout

Free Set up of free layout.

4-7 ●Call and print saved messages

Select message 2015.07.07 12:45

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Details

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No. Group name [　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

ＡＢＣ００１ＡＢＣ００２ＡＢＣ００３ＬＭＮ１０ＬＭＮ２０ＡＢＣ００４ＡＢＣ００５Ａ０１ＢＣ

１２３４５１０１１１２１３１４

No△ Message name

ＤＬＭＮ３０ＬＭＮ４０ＬＭＮ５０ＬＭＮ６０Ｅ０１Ｅ０２Ｅ０３Ｅ０４Ｅ０５

１５２１２２２３２４３０３１３２３３３４

No△ Message name

DisplayAll

Cancel

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Select page1/3

StartupMManual

HOME

Free number

Select message 2015.07.07 12:45

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Simple list

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No. Group name [　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

ＡＢＣ００１ＡＢＣ００２ＡＢＣ００３ＬＭＮ１０ＬＭＮ２０ＡＢＣ００４ＡＢＣ００５Ａ０１ＢＣ

１２３４５１０１１１２１３１４

No△ Message name

DisplayAll

Cancel

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Select page1/3

2015.06.01 12:00

2015.06.02 12:00

2015.06.03 12:00

2015.06.04 12:00

2015.06.05 12:00

2015.06.06 12:00

2015.06.07 12:00

2015.06.08 12:00

2015.06.09 12:00

2015.06.10 12:00

OVERALL

INDIV.

FREE

Update Date/Time Style GrNo

StartupMManual

HOME

Free number

Select message 2015.07.07 12:45

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Details

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No. Group name [　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

Cancel

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Select page1/100

StartupMManual

HOME

Free number

ＡＢＣ００１ＡＢＣ００２ＡＢＣ００３ＬＭＮ１０ＬＭＮ２０

ＡＢＣ００４

１２３４５６７８９１０

No Message name

ＡＢＣ００５Ａ０１ＢCD

１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０

No Message name

(2) Operation

Press the Select message on the Print description screen.The Select message screen is displayed.

Example of Details screen

Search conditions input

Group Sort

Previous display , Next display

Select page

Display All

Details , Simple listFree number

By pressing Free number , the screen shown below will be displayed.

●Overwrite messages to be printed 4-8

Print description 2015.07.07 12:45

MManual Startup

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Ink operating time　　　　　　　1００(hours)

Cumulative op. time　　　　　　１００(hours)

Print count　　　　　　　　　１０００(prints)

Ink pressure　　　　　　　０．０００(MPa；standard value:０．２５０)

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　　]

－＋

Changemessage

Selectmessage

Overwritemessage

Adjust printparameters

Operationmanagement

Current user ID : user2

Inter-laced

Print countreset

4.4 Overwrite messages to be printed(1) Overview

●Overwrites the current message by the same name.●If the message is saved using the overwrite message function when updating the count value, the same

print description can be selected later.●Message name cannot be changed.

See “4.6 Save created messages” for message save.

(2) OperationThe Print description screen is displayed.

Press Overwrite message .“Same Print Data Found” message is displayed.

Press Enter .Save is performed.

Overwrite message

Change the display contents using Group, Search, Sort, Select page function, Display All, so that the desired message name is displayed.

Select the message name and press the OK .The selected message is called and the display returns to the Print description screen.

4-9 ●Edit messages different from the current message

4.5 Edit messages different from the current message(1) Overview

●Edits and saves a specific saved message or a new message.●Since a message different from the current message (message currently being printed) is edited, the contents currently being printed are not affected.●When the Back button is pressed at the Edit message screen or other edit screen, the display returns to the

Select message screen. Before pressing the Back button, always save the created and edited message. If returned to the Select message screen without saving the message, the edited message is lost.●The desired message can be efficiently found by changing the display contents of the message name list.

Method of changing the message name list display

Item Contents

Group

●Press the group No. button.●Only the messages belonging to the selected group are displayed.●When “0:All message names” is selected, the message names of all

the groups are displayed.

Previous display, next display ●Switches the message name list display screen.

Select page ●Selects the message name list page.

Sort●The sort order can be switched by pressing the heading part of the

message name list display.

●The first several characters of a message name are input and only the message names beginning with those characters are displayed.

●If the Search conditions are not input, all the message names in that group are displayed.

Display All● Defines Group No. as «00» and the search condition as space, then

displays message name list.

Details● Details displays the update date/time, Style, and group No., as well

as the No. and message name.● Simple list displays the No. and message name.

Free number

NOT available.

●Style displayed in the Details mode shows the type of print format.

Types of Style

Type of style Meaning

Individual Individual setup of fixed layout.

Overall Overall setup of fixed layout

Free Set up of free layout.

●Edit messages different from the current message 4-10

Create/Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Createnew message Details

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No. Group name [　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

ＡＢＣ００１ＡＢＣ００２ＡＢＣ００３ＬＭＮ１０ＬＭＮ２０ＡＢＣ００４ＡＢＣ００５Ａ０１ＢＣ

１２３４５１０１１１２１３１４

No△ Message name

ＤＬＭＮ３０ＬＭＮ４０ＬＭＮ５０ＬＭＮ６０Ｅ０１Ｅ０２Ｅ０３Ｅ０４Ｅ０５

１５２１２２２３２４３０３１３２３３３４

No△ Message name

DisplayAll

Cancel

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Select page1/3

StartupMManual

HOME

Free number

Change the display contents using Group, Search, Sort, Select page function, Display All, so that the desired message name is displayed.

Select the message name and press the OK . To create a new message, press the Create new message .

The change message screen is displayed.

(2) Operation

Press the Create/Edit message on the Print description screen.The Create/Edit message screen is displayed.

Search conditions input

Group No. Sort

Previous display , Next display

Select page

Display All

Details , Simple listFree number

4-11 ●Save created messages

4.6 Save created messages(1) Overview

●Saves created messages.●A save No. is automatically assigned.●The same message name cannot be assigned.●Saving to a selected group is possible.●Free spaces are displayed.

Item Contents

Free space Proportional of save area which is vacant.

● If the number of input characters is small, the capacity necessary to save the message decreases. A lot of small capacity messages can be saved. When there are many large capacity messages, the number of

messages which can be saved decreases.

Maximum message save count

Model type Maximum save count Remarks

RX2-B 24 messages24 messages can be saved without regard to their capacity.

RX2-S

48 messages48 messages can be saved without regard to their capacity.

Option : Up to 2,000 messages

The save count depends on the capacity.

*1) Maximum message save count

Conditions example Message save count

Characters 70 chars 2,000 messages

Characters 20 chars, calendar 1, count 1 Approx. 1,900 messages

Characters 240 chars Approx. 800 messages

Characters 240 chars, calendar 8, count 8 Approx. 300 messages

*1)

●Save created messages 4-12

Change message 2015.07.07 12:45

Save and Back

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

:Multiple print formats can be mixed.

－＋

Printformat

Edit message

Print spec.

Variousprint setup

Individualsetup

Overallsetup

:Character size and inter-character space set value are matched at all lines. Only 1 column can be input.

Back

StartupMManual

HOME

Free layout :An arbitrary position can be set for each print item.

Save message 2015.07.07 12:45

Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

０１ＧＲＯＵＰ００１

Simple list

Save message as (name)

Group No.

Free space 20%

Cancel

ＡＢＣ００１Startup

MManual

HOME

(2) OperationThe Change message screen is displayed.

Press the Save and Back .The Save message screen is displayed.

Save and Back

4-13 ●Save created messages

EntEnterInput the message name and press the Enter .

A keyboard is displayed.

Press Message name.A keyboard is displayed.

Save message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

０１ＧＲＯＵＰ００１

Save message as (name)

Group No.

Free space 20 %

ＡＢＣ００１

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ Insert Over-write

Delete Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ EntEnter

SpaceCancel

← →ＡＢＣ００１

123…Sign

ABC…

Change Change

StartupMManual

HOME

etc. ▽

Press the OK .The message is saved.

Enter

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-14

Prev.col.

Next col.

1st line 2nd line 1st line 2nd line

4.7 Set the print format(Fixed layout)4.7.1 Select the print items to be edited(1) Selecting one print item

●Sets and changes the print format including the character size for the print item to be edited.●There are 3 methods of selecting the print item to be edited.

Print format 2015.07.07 12:45

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Select Line

　Bold　　　　　　　　　　（times　1～9）

　Bar code

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

none

5x7Dot matrix

Print spec.

Edit message

Column 1

To OverallAdd Col.Insert C.Delete C.2 lines

…

1 line

…

Prev.col. Next col.

2nd line1st line

－＋

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Inter-char. space(MAX 27 ) Line

spacing(MAX 2 )

Back3 lines

…

Methods of selecting the print item to be edited

Type Features

Directly touching the print item The touched item becomes the editing objective.

Previous column, next columnThe topmost line of the previous column or the next column becomes the editing objective

Select lineThe print item of the specified line in the editing objective column becomes the editing objective.

The editing objective can be changed by directly touching a print item.

The colored print item is the editing objective.

Previous column

The selected line in the editing objective column becomes the editing objective by Select line button.

Next column

First line Second line First line Second line

Previous column

How to change the print item to be edited

4-15 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout)

Print format 2015.07.07 12:45

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

　Bold　　　　　　　　　　（times　1～9）

　Bar code

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

none

5x7Dot matrix

Print spec.

Edit message

2 lines

…

1 line

…

Prev.col. Next col.

To Overall

－＋

Inter-char. space(MAX 27 ) Line

spacing(MAX 2 )

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Back3 lines

…

To Overall

(2) Selecting all print items●All the print items become the editing objective.●When placed into the Overall mode, first matching to the format information of the 1st line is performed.●Overall mode is cancelled after closing the Change message screen.

To Overall

One print item becomes the editing objective.

All the print items become the editing objective.

Overall

Overall (To cancel)

How to change the print item to be edited

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-16

Print format 2015.07.07 12:45

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Select Line

　Bold　　　　　　　　　　（times　1～9）

　Bar code

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

2nd line

none

5x7Dot matrix

Print spec.

Edit message

Column 1

To OverallAdd Col.Insert C.Delete C.2 lines

…

1 line

…

Prev.col. Next col.

1st line

－＋

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Back

Inter-char. space(MAX 27 ) Line

spacing(MAX 2 )

3 lines

…

2 lines

…

1 line

…

4.7.2 Set the number of print lines(1) Function

●Sets the number of lines of the selected column.●The number of lines which can be set is “1 to 5”.

Maximum line count

Model type Maximum line count

RX2-B 3 lines

RX2-S3 lines(Option : Up to 5 lines)

●When the number of vertical dots exceeds the maximum number of dots, the characters size becomes 5×8(5×7).

The colored print item is the editing objective.

1 line 2 lines

1 line

2 lines

Example for changing the number of lines of the editing objective column

3 lines

4-17 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout)

Print format 2015.07.07 12:45

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Select Line

　Bold　　　　　　　　　　（times　1～9）

　Bar code

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

2nd line

none

5x7Dot matrix

Print spec.

Edit message

Column 2

To OverallAdd Col.Insert C.Delete C.2 lines

…

1 line

…

Prev.col. Next col.

1st line

－＋

Inter-char. space(MAX 27 ) Line

spacing(MAX 2 )

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Back3 lines

…

Add Col.Insert C.Delete C.

4.7.3 Add and delete print items(1) Function

●Deletes, inserts, and adds print items in column units.

Methods of adding and deleting print items

Type Features

Delete column Deletes all the print items of the editing objective column.

Insert column Adds a column directly before the editing objective column.

Add column Adds a column at the end.

The colored column is the editing objective.

Delete Column Insert Column Add Column

Delete column

Insert column

Add column

Example of deleting, inserting, and adding print items in column units

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-18

Print format 2015.07.07 12:45

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Select Line

　Bold　　　　　　　　　　（times　1～9）

　Bar code

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

2nd line

none

5x7Dot matrix

Print spec.

Edit message

Column 1

To OverallAdd Col.Insert C.Delete C.2 lines

…

1 line

…

Prev.col. Next col.

1st line

－＋

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Back

Inter-char. space(MAX 27 ) Line

spacing(MAX 2 )

3 lines

…

4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters(1) Function

●Sets the line spacing, dot matrix, inter-character space, bold font, and bar code.

Bold●Sets the character to bold.●The magnification which can be set is “1 to 9”.

Line spacing●Adjust the spacing with the line above.●Set for each column.●Can be set up to a maximum of 2 dots.

The colored print item is the editing objective.

Bold

Inter-character space

Dot matrix

Line spacing Adjustment char. cond.

4-19 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout)

Dot matrix●Sets the character size.

Settable sizes (horizontal dots × vertical dots)

4×5, 5×5, 5×8(5×7), 9×8(9×7), 7×10,

10×12, 11×11, 12×16, 18×24, 24×32,

5×3 (chimney), 5×5 (chimney), 7×5(chimney) (Optional on RX2-S)

●See “6.1 Set the user environment” for 5×8, 5×7 and 9×8, 9×7 switching. However, for special characters, accent characters, Russian characters, Arabic numbers, and Arabic letters, select character size with

vertical 8 dots since the pattern is designed with vertical 8 dots.

●The kinds of characters which can be input are defined for each character size. A space is entered when there is no corresponding character for the changed character size.

Kinds of characters which can be input by character size

Character kind 4×5 5×55×8

(5×7)9×8

(9×7)7×10 10×12 11×11 12×16 18×24 24×32

Chimney 5×3

Chimney 5×5

Chimney 7×5

Chinese character X X X X X X X X X X

Kana X X X X X X X X

Alphabet letters, numeric, symbols

Space X

User pattern

Punct. character X X X X

Dedicated character X X X X X X X X X X X

Accent character X X X X X X

Greek character X X X X X X

Russian character X X X

Arabic numeric X X X X X

Arabic letter X X X X X X X X

●Communication is unsupported for Russian characters of 5×5, 5×5(chimney) and 7×5(chimney).●Multiple character sizes can be freely combined. However, there is a limit on the total number of vertical

dots.

Total vertical dots limit

RX2-B RX2-S

Total vertical dots 30 dots30 dots

(Option : Up to 32 dots)

Character sizes having 8 or less vertical dots are calculated as 8 dots.

●Chimney characters consist of characters which can be written vertically.

Line direction

Chimney printing example

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-20

Inter-character space●Sets the spacing between character and character.

●For user pattern (user pattern), patterns can be designed at the inter-character space part. ●For special characters also, a pattern can be designed at the inter-character space. Set an inter-character

space the same as the values shown in the table below.

Inter-character space minimum set value

Character kind 5×55×8

(5×7)9×8

(9×7)7×10 10×12 11×11 12×16 18×24 24×32

Chinese character — — — — — 0 4 6 —

Kana — 0 — 0 2 — 4 6 —

Dedicated character — 1 — 1 — — — — —

Arabic numeric 0 2 0 0 0 — 2 2 2

Arabic letter — 2 — — 0 — 2 2 2

English A English B

Vertical 8 dots

Horizontal 5 dots Inter-character space Character size: 5x8Inter-character space: 2 dots

Relationship between character and inter-character space

User pattern (save character) English A

Vertical 8 dots

Horizontal 5 dots Inter-character spaceCharacter size: 5x8Inter-character space: 5 dots

Relationship between user pattern and inter-character space

4-21 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout)

Adjust Inter-character space 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Select line

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

1st line

Select area

Inter-char. space

Adjust Inter-character space

Column 1

Back

← →《》1 10 20

Start End Cancel Set value [　００　]

２０１５／１２／３１・

－＋

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Character size inter-character space

Character size (horizontal × vertical)

Number of horizontal dots of character

Inter-character space which can be input by user pattern creation

Maximum inter-character size which can be set

4×5 4 4 28

5×5 5 3 27

5×8(5×7) 5 3 27

9×8(9×7) 9 7 23

7×10 7 1 25

10×12 10 6 22

11×11 11 5 21

12×16 12 4 20

18×24 18 6 14

24×32 24 8 8

5×3 chimney 5 0 27

5×5 chimney 5 0 27

7×5 chimney 7 0 25

1 2

●Inter-character space can be set in character units using the Adjustment char. cond. .●Select the character column where the inter-character space will be set using Start and End , input the

inter-character space set value, and press the OK .

Chimney is available on RX2-S as option.

Inter-char. space

Start End OK

Back

●When the inter-character space of the print format screen changed, the value set in character units changes to the same value.

●The display value of the inter-character space of the print format screen displays the inter-character space of the first character.

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-22

4.7.5 Print a bar code (RX2-S only)(1) Kinds of bar codes

●Different kinds of bar codes can be set for each print item.

Kinds of bar codes

Bar code Kinds of characters which can be input Remarks

Code 390 to 9 A to Z Space+ — (minus) / . (period) $ %

ITF 0 to 99 Input of two-digit numbers

NW-70 to 9 + — (minus) / . (period) : (colon) $

EAN-13 0 to 9

EAN-13 Add-On 5 0 to 9

EAN-8 0 to 9

UPC-A 0 to 9

UPC-E 0 to 9

Code 128 (code set B)

0 to 9 A to Z a to z SpaceFNC1 Code B Code C Symbols

Input numeric of two-digit numbers

Code 128 (code set C)

0 to 9 FNC1 Code B Code C

Data matrix (DM)

0 to 9 A to Z a to z SpaceFNC1 Symbols

QR code, Micro QR Same as above.

GS1 DataBar 0 to 9Limited, Omnidirectional andStacked

●When a bar code of the same kind was set at adjacent print items, only the continuous series bar code is assumed. However, fixed length bar codes such as EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC-A, UPC-E,

EAN-13 Add-On 5 and GS1 DataBar become independent bar codes.●For multiple settings, provide a print item for which a bar code is not set between the print items with a

bar code set.●Up to a maximum of 4 DM (Data Matrix), code 128, QR code, Micro QR and GS1 DataBar can be set

respectively. QR code and Micro QR can be collectively set up to 4.●Since the number of horizontal dots is uniquely determined for bar codes, an inter-character space cannot

be set.

●A bar code can be set even for print items with a calendar and count set. However, when calendar substitution, zero suppression, or an invalid character is set, for the bar code setting, the relevant character is deleted.●Neither the calendar nor the count set can be set to the country code.●When code set C of code 128 was set when the English alphabet is set for the count upper limit, the relevant character is deleted.●Since start and stop codes are automatically generated, input as print description is unnecessary.●A barcode with the identification numbers can be set in 1 line or 2 lines setting. When in 2 lines setting, the barcode with the identification numbers can only be set to either upper or

lower line. If the barcode is set to the upper line, it cannot be set to the lower line or vice versa.●For GS1 DataBar, neither the calendar nor the count can be set to 1st, 2nd and 3rd digit.

See the Technical Manual “9. APPENDIX” for details.

4-23 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout)

Print format 2015.07.07 12:45

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Select Line

　Bold　　　　　　　　　　（times　1-9）

　Bar code

　EAN readable code

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

EAN-13

18x24Dot matrix

Print spec.

Edit message

Column 1

To OverallAdd Col.Insert C.Delete C.2 lines

…

1 line

…

1st line

－＋

MManual Startup

HOME

Inter-char. space(MAX 0 ) Line

spacing(MAX 0 )

Back

5×5

EAN Prefix 49

Print format 2015.07.07 12:45

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Select Line

　Bold　　　　　　　　　　（times　1-9）

　Bar code

　Max digits numeric: 24 ,alphameric: 12- 23

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

DM(16×16)

12x16Dot matrix

Print spec.

Edit message

Column 1

To OverallAdd Col.Insert C.Delete C.

1st line

－＋

MManual Startup

HOME

Inter-char. space(MAX 4 ) Line

spacing(MAX 0 )

Back

(2) ExamplesExample of EAN-13

Example of Data Matrix

Sets barcode type.

Sets «Disable» or character size of identification code when EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-13 Add-On 5 or GS1 DataBar is selected.(When character size is 12 x 16 or larger.)

Sets an EAN Prefix code when EAN-13, EAN-8 or EAN-13 Add-On 5 is selected (the EAN Prefix code can also be set at the Edit message screen(See «4.14.3 Set various printing».)).

Sets barcode type.

Displays maximum input digits for DM(Data Matrix)

Selectable matrix size depends on the charactersize.

●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 4-24

Com=0

Bold (times　1～9)

Bar code

none

Inter-char. space

(MAX 0)1

12x16Dot matrix

Item 1

Usage range　Hor. 　 60　Vert. 　 16

－

《

＋

》

Back

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

00000 00100

Overallitem move

Individualitem move

Delete item Insert item

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Print format 2015.07.07 12:45[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Print spec.

Edit message

4.8 Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only)4.8.1 Select the print items to be edited

●Set and change the print format including the character size for the print item to be edited.●There are 2 methods of selecting the print item to be edited.

Methods of selecting the print item to be edited

Type Features

Directly touching the print item The touched item becomes the editing objective.

Previous item, next item The previous item or the next item becomes the editing objective.

The editing objective can be changed bydirectly touching a print item.

The colored printItem is the editingobjective.

Previous item

Next item

Display the vertical printing range and horizontal printingrange.

4-25 ●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only)

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0

－

《

＋

》

Back

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

00000 00100

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Print format [Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Item 1

Usage range　Hor. 　 60　Vert. 　 16

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Print spec.

Edit message

Overallitem move

Individualitem move

Delete item Insert item

Bold (times　1～9)

Bar code

none

Inter-char. space

(MAX 0)1

12x16Dot matrix

4.8.2 Set the print items to be edited(1) Function

●Set the «horizontal (X) coordinate» and «vertical (Y) coordinate» of the selected item at the bottom-left.●The total number of vertical dots and limit of the coordinate are as follows;

Total vertical dots and limit of coordinate

Model typeTotal vertical dots Horizontal (X)

coordinateVertical (Y) coordinate

RX2-S30 dots

(Option : Up to 32 dots)0 to 31999

0 to 29(Option : Up to 31)

Horizontal (X) coord. = 0Vertical (Y) coord. = 0

Horizontal (X) coord. = 42Vertical (Y) coord. = 4

Display the upper limit line of the vertical dots.(The line position is changed by the display magnification)

Display the Horizontal (X)coordinate

Display the lower limit line of the vertical dots.(The line position is changed by the display magnification)

●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 4-26

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0

－

《

＋

》

Back

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

00000 00100

Print format [Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Item 1

Usage range　Hor. 　 60　Vert. 　 16

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Print spec.

Edit message

Bold (times　1～9)

Bar code

none

Inter-char. space

(MAX 0)1

12x16Dot matrix

Item position select

Item move with button or touch on screen.

Horizontal (X)

Vertical (Y) 00

00001

← →

↓

↑

Cancel

Overallitem move

Individualitem move

Delete item Insert item

(2) Set the coordinate of one print item● Set and change the «horizontal (X) coordinate» and «vertical (Y) coordinate» of the print item to be

edited, at the bottom-left.● Press Individual item move, and set the coordinate of the print item to be edited.● There are 3 methods of setting the horizontal (X) coordinate and vertical (Y) coordinate.● The horizontal (X) coordinate and vertical (Y) coordinate cannot be set over the range of [ Table of

(1) ].

Methods of setting the horizontal (X) coordinate and vertical (Y) coordinate

Type Features

Directly touching the screenThe print item to be edited can be moved by directly touching the screen within the limit of vertical dots.

Set the value of the coordinateThe print item to be edited can be moved by setting the value of the «horizontal (X) coordinate» and «vertical (Y) coordinate» on the screen.

Set the position by cursor buttonThe print item to be edited can be moved dot by dot one by means of ↑ ↓ ← → buttons.

The editing objective can be moved bydirectly touching the screen.

Cursor button

Press the Cancel if canceling the moving the coord..

Individual item move

Press the OK if the print item has been moved.

The horizontal (X) coordinate and vertical (Y) coordinate of editing objective can be moved by directly touching the screen.

4-27 ●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only)

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0

－

《

＋

》

Back

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

00000 00100

Print format [Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Bold (times　1～9)

Bar code

none

Inter-char. space

(MAX 0)1

12x16Dot matrix

tem position select

Item move with button.

← →

↓

↑

Cancel

Overallitem move

Individualitem move

Delete item Insert item

Item 1

Usage range　Hor. 　 60　Vert. 　 16

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Print spec.

Edit message

(3) Set the coordinate of all print items● All print items can be moved collectively.● Press Overall item move , and move all items.● All print items can be moved dot by dot by means of ↑ ↓ ← → buttons.● The horizontal (X) coordinate and vertical (Y) coordinate cannot be set over the range of Table of

item (1).

Cursor button

Press the Cancel if canceling the moving the coord..

Overall item movePress the OK if the print item has been moved..

●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 4-28

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0

－

《

＋

》

Back

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

00000 00100

Print format [Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Overallitem move

Individualitem move

Delete item Insert item

Item 1

Usage range　Hor. 　 60　Vert. 　 16

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Print spec.

Edit message

Bold (times　1～9)

Bar code

none

Inter-char. space

(MAX 0)1

12x16Dot matrix

Item position select

Touch on screen at insert position.

The touch position is left-bottom coordinate of item.

Cancel

4.8.3 Add and delete print items(1) Function

● Add or delete print items one by one.

Methods of adding and deleting print items

Type Features

Insert item Add the print item at the selected position.

Delete item Delete the print item to be edited

A print item can be created by directly touching the print layout screen.

● Press Insert item and touch the print layout screen, then the print item (character size is 5×7 or 5×8) will be created.

When the print item is created, if the horizontal (X) coordinate or vertical (Y) coordinate is over the limit of range of the coordinate, the horizontal (X) coordinate or vertical (Y) coordinate will be adjusted automatically.

● When there is only one print item, if Delete item is pressed and the print item is deleted, a print item (character size is 5×7 or 5×8) will be created at the horizontal (X) coordinate = 0,

vertical (Y) coordinate =0.

Insert item

4-29 ●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only)

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0

－

《

＋

》

Back

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

00000 00100

Print format [Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Bold (times　1～9)

Bar code

none

Inter-char. space

(MAX 0)1

12x16Dot matrix

Item position select

Item move with button or touch on screen.

Horizontal (X)

Vertical (Y) 01

00144

← →

↓

↑

Cancel

Overallitem move

Individualitem move

Delete item Insert item

Item 1

Usage range　Hor. 　 60　Vert. 　 16

Adjustmentchar. cond.

Print spec.

Edit message

A print item (character size is 5×7 or 5×8) will be created.

The method of setting the horizontal (X) coordinate and vertical (Y) coordinate is as same as «Individual item move».

●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 4-30

4.8.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters● Set the dot matrix, inter-character space, bold font, and bar code.● The methods of setting is the same as fixed layout. See “4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space,

and other parameters” for details.● The bottom-left coordinate of the selected print item is first fixed and adjust as follows:. When changing the dot matrix, inter-character space, etc…, the top-right coordinate of the print

item can be over the limit of coordinate. Should the top-right of the print item go beyond the limit of horizontal (X) coordinate, it will be

automatically adjusted to horizontal (X) coordinate =31999. Should the top-right of the print item go beyond limit of vertical (Y) coordinate, it will be automatically adjusted to vertical (Y) coordinate = 29 (3 lines upgrade) or 31 (4 lines or 5 lines

upgrade).

Char. size : 12x16Bold font : x 1

Char. size : 12x16Bold font : x 2

Horizontal (X) coordinate = 31961 Horizontal (X) coordinate = 31922Horizontal (X) coordinate = 31999

Char. size : 12×16 Char. size :

18×24

Vertical (Y) coordinate=31

Vertical (Y) coordinate=8Vertical (Y) coordinate=16

4-31 ●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only)

4.8.5 Print a bar code● Set bar code for free layout.● Basic method of the setting bar code is the same as the method for the fixed layout. See the “4.7.5

Print a bar code” for details.● There are some restrictions for setting the bar code for free layout. The restrictions are described as

follows;The restrictions of the setting bar code for free layout

Bar code Restriction

Data Matrix (DM) Up to maximum of 1 DM, per one message.

QR code and Micro QRQR code and Micro QR can be collectively set up to 1, per one message.

GS1 DataBar Up to maximum of 1 GS1 DataBar, per one message.

Code 128 Up to maximum of 1 Code 128, per one message.

In case that a bar code of the same kind was Set at adjacent print items

Two of the bar code are not handled a series of barcode.Each bar code is handled as an independent bar codes.

Char. size : 12x16Bar code : none

● When changing the bar code, the top-right coordinate of the print item can go over the limit of coordinate.

Should the top-right of the print item go beyond the limit of horizontal (X) coordinate, it will be automatically adjusted to horizontal (X) coordinate=31999.

Char. size : 12x16Bar code : Code39

Horizontal (X) coordinate = 31961 Horizontal (X) coordinate = 31920

horizontal (X) coordinate = 31999

4.8.6 Cautions for printing overlapped some print items● If multiple numbers of print items are overlapped, the printing may be aborted depending on the

number of print items or characters because it requires time to create the print data while printing is in process.

In this case, the alarm “Free Layout Printing Disabled” occurs.● Please first conduct print test at the free layout setting, and if the alarm “Free Layout Printing Disabled” occurs, delete some print items which are overlapped, or decrease the value of ink drop

use setting.

●Print characters 4-32

4.9 Print characters

Ex. Dedicated character (Simple Chinese)

Lines and Message length (Characters)

Model type 1 line 2 lines 3 lines

RX2-B 60 char. × 1 line 30 char. × 2 lines 20 char. × 3 lines

RX2-S 120 char. × 1 line 60 char. × 2 lines 40 char. × 3 lines

*) RX2-S OP : Up to 5 lines OP : Up to 1,000 characters

4.9.1 Print fixed characters(1) Function●Inputs the characters to be printed.●The kinds of characters which can be input are defined for each character size. Moreover, there is an

appropriate inter-character space depending on the kind of character. (See “4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters”.)

●There is an “Insert” mode and an “Overwrite” mode when inputting.●“Duplicate” by selecting the start and end of the character string and “Paste” at an arbitrary position are

possible.

●The characters which can be set as dedicated characters are shown below. For dedicated characters, single words are handled collectively at input and deletion.

● Inputting an Arabic character will move the cursor to the left.● Use the Insert mode to input Arabic characters.

●There are no limits on the number of digits which can be input at one print item.

4-33 ●Print characters

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Print spec.

Pint format

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count6 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

Over-write

1 10 20

ＡＢＣ・ →

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

ABC…

－＋

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Cal.cond.

Countcond. Back

Apply

(2) OperationThe Edit message screen is displayed. (See “3.3.1 Operating Scheme”.)

Touch the print item which is to be the objective of message editing. Prev. Item and Next Item may also be pressed.

The print description of the selected print item is displayed at the print description edit area.

Touch the position at which input in the print description edit area is to begin and move the cursor.The cursor button may also be pressed.

The cursor is displayed at the selected position.

Press the input mode button.The kind of keyboard is changed.

Input the characters and press the Apply .The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed at the print layout.

Print contents edit area

Print layout

Previous item

Cursor

Scroll in the print description edit area

Input mode button group

Numeric, Symbols Alphabet letters Logo (Fixed, Free size) Punct. character,Accent character, etc.

Print item No.

Apply

Next item

●Use the calendar function 4-34

4.10 Use the calendar function4.10.1 Print calendar characters(1) Calendar characters●When set as calendar characters, the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second are matched to the current

date/time and printed each time the calendar time is changed.●When “clock stop” is selected for calendar time control at the Date/time setup screen, the inputted calendar time is referenced and printed.

Kinds of calendar characters

ItemDisplays in «Print layout area»

Number of digits which can be input

Substitution rules Reference

Year Y 4 Yes

Month M 3 Yes

Day D 3 Yes

Hour h 2 Yes

Minute m 2 Yes

Second s 2 —

Total number of days T 3 — 4.10.1(2)

Week No. W 3 Yes 4.10.1(4)

Day of week 7 3 Yes 4.10.1(5)

Shift code (*1) E 10 — 4.11

Time count (*1) F 3 — 4.12

JAN, FEB, —-(Month 3 digits)

— 3 — 4.10.1(3)

●A group of calendar characters is called “Calendar block”.

(*1) Optional on RX2-S

Maximum Calendar block count

Model type Maximum Calendar count

RX2-B 2

RX2-S2

(Option : Up to

●Calendar conditions are set for each calendar block.●Calendar characters cannot be input at the same calendar block as shift code characters and time count

characters.

(Maximum digit : 20 digits/Calendar block)

4-35 ●Use the calendar function

(2) Total number of days●Use when setting up to print the total number of days from the first of January.●When set as total date character, it is linked to the calendar time and the print description is changed to

match the current total number of days.●Leap year and ordinary year are shown in the table below.●There is no zero-suppression function.

Total number of days

1/1 1/2 —- 2/28 2/29 3/1 —- 12/31

Ordinary year 1 2 —- 59 — 60 —- 365

Leap year 1 2 —- 59 60 61 —- 366

(3) Alphabet month 3 digits (JAN, FEB, —-)●Use when printing the month in alphabet 3 digits representation.●For printing in other than English, it is defined by the month 3 digits “Substitution rules” screen.●When month 3 digits are corresponded to new substitution rules, the English representations shown below

are set beforehand.

English representation

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN

JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Print spec.

Print format

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count12 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

YY．MM．DDh・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Cal.cond.

Countcond. Back

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Calendar block Calendar block

Calendar block is displayed in a red frame.

●Use the calendar function 4-36

(4) Week number●Use week number when printing the week of the year.●One week begins on Monday and ends on Sunday.●The week including January 4 of that year shall be week one. Making the week including the first Thursday

of the year week one is also another way of saying it.●The beginning of a year not included in week one becomes the last week of the previous year.

Example of counting week number of end and beginning of year

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Week No.

December21 22 23 24 25 26 27 52

28 29 30 31 53

January

1 2 3 53

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 2

(5) Day of the week●Use when representing and printing the day of the week using a 1 digit character.●One week begins on Monday and ends on Sunday.●When the calendar characters “Day of week” are input, the numbers 1 to 7 are printed. When printing other

representations, set the appropriate substitution rules.

Calendar “Day of the week” printing example

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday

Standard 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Substitution rule set by inputting 1 digit.

A B C D E F G

Substitution rule set by inputting 3 digits

MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN

4-37 ●Use the calendar function

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count3 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count3 / 1000←《》

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

・

Year Month Day Hour Minu-te

Seco-nd

Totaldays

Weeknum-ber

Dayof

weekShiftcode

Timecount

Count

Back spaceetc. ▽123‥

Sign★◎　‥

LogoABC…

Delete

Insert

＋－ × ／

（） . ： ,

Over-write

Calendar/ count

－＋← →・

CancelOK

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

BackSpace

(6) OperationThe Edit message screen is displayed.

Press the Calendar/count .The display changes to the calendar/count keyboard and the calendar/count edit window is displayed.

Calendar/count

Calendar/count edit window

Calendar/count keyboard

●Use the calendar function 4-38

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

←《》1 10 20

→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

・

← →

CancelOK

ＹＹ．ＭＭ．ＤＤ・

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count3 / 1000

Year Month Day Hour Minu-te

Seco-nd

Totaldays

Weeknum-ber

Dayof

weekShiftcode

Timecount

Count

Back spaceetc. ▽123‥

Sign★◎　‥

LogoABC…

Delete

Insert

＋－ × ／

（） . ： ,

Over-write

Calendar/ count

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

BackSpace

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count3 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

YY．MM．DD・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Input the calendar characters.The calendar characters are displayed on the calendar/count edit window.

Press OK .The calendar characters are displayed at the print description edit area.

3 OK

Print item to input

Calendar block is displayed in a red frame.

4-39 ●Use the calendar function

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count11 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

YY．MM．DD・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

←《》1 10 20

→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

ＹＹ．ＭＭ．ＤＤ・

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count11 / 1000

Year Month Day Hour Minu-te

Seco-nd

Totaldays

Weeknum-ber

Dayof

weekShiftcode

Timecount

Count

Back spaceetc. ▽123‥

Sign★◎　‥

LogoABC…

Delete

Insert

＋－ × ／

（） . ： ,

Over-write

Calendar/ count

－＋← →・

CancelOK

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

BackSpace

Touch the print item to input.The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed at the print layout.

To input another calendar, move the cursor to the input position and press Calendar/count .

The display changes to the calendar/count keyboard and the calendar/count edit window is displayed.

●Use the calendar function 4-40

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

←《》1 10 20

→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

ＹＹ．ＭＭ．ＤＤ・

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count3 / 1000

Year Month Day Hour Minu-te

Seco-nd

Totaldays

Weeknum-ber

Dayof

weekShiftcode

Timecount

Count

Back spaceetc. ▽123‥

Sign★◎　‥

LogoABC…

Delete

Insert

＋－ × ／

（） . ： ,

Over-write

Calendar/ count

－＋← →

CancelOK

ｈ・

Space

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Back

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count12 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

YY．MM．DDh・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Apply

Input the calendar characters.The calendar characters are displayed in the calendar/count edit window.

Press OK .The calendar characters are displayed at the print description edit area.

Press Apply .The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed at the print layout.

Apply

Calendar block is displayed in a red frame.

Calendar character is deleted per calendar block unit.

4-41 ●Use the calendar function

4.10.2 Print future date (offset)(1) Offset function●Sets the date/time by adding the offset value and the date/time of the internal clock.●The offset values which can be set are shown in the table below.

Offset value setting range

Year 0 to 99

Month 0 to 99

Day 0 to 1999

Hour -23 to 99

Minute -59 to 99

Calendar timeOffset from yesterday From today

Offset value Offset value1 month 1 month + 1 day 1 month 1 month + 1 day

2015.01.28 2015.02.27 2015.02.28 2015.02.28 2015.03.012015.01.29 2015.02.28 2015.02.28 2015.02.28 2015.03.012015.01.30 2015.02.28 2015.02.28 2015.02.28 2015.03.012015.01.31 2015.02.28 2015.02.28 2015.02.28 2015.03.012015.02.01 2015.02.28 2015.03.01 2015.03.01 2015.03.022015.02.02 2015.03.01 2015.03.02 2015.03.02 2015.03.03

2015.02.27 2015.03.26 2015.03.27 2015.03.27 2015.03.282015.02.28 2015.03.27 2015.03.28 2015.03.28 2015.03.292015.03.01 2015.03.31 2015.04.01 2015.04.01 2015.04.02

2016.01.28 2016.02.27 2016.02.28 2016.02.28 2016.02.292016.01.29 2016.02.28 2016.02.29 2016.02.29 2016.03.012016.01.30 2016.02.29 2016.02.29 2016.02.29 2016.03.012016.01.31 2016.02.29 2016.02.29 2016.02.29 2016.03.012016.02.01 2016.02.29 2016.03.01 2016.03.01 2016.03.022016.02.02 2016.03.01 2016.03.02 2016.03.02 2016.03.03

2016.02.27 2016.03.26 2016.03.27 2016.03.27 2016.03.282016.02.28 2016.03.27 2016.03.28 2016.03.28 2016.03.292016.02.29 2016.03.28 2016.03.29 2016.03.29 2016.03.302016.03.01 2016.03.31 2016.04.01 2016.04.01 2016.04.02

Calendar timeOffset from yesterday From today

Offset value Offset value1 year 4 years 1 year 4 years

2016.02.29 2017.02.28 2020.02.28 2017.02.28 2020.02.29

●There are two offset methods for future date calculations that use Month and/or Year variables, “Offset from yesterday” and “From today”.　（See “4.14.3 Set various printing” for “Offset from yesterday” and “From today” setting switching.）

●Use the calendar function 4-42

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count12 / 1000

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Back space

＋－ × ／！ Dupli-cate Paste

” ＃＄％＆￥

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Insert

YY．MM．DDh・

ABC…

（） . ： ,

’ ■ [ ]

＝？＜＞；＊＿

Over-write

123‥Sign

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Calendar conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Substitutionrules

Column 1 Item 1

Back

《》1 10 20

Prev. Next

YY．MM．DDh・

< Offset > < Substitution rules > < Zero-suppression >

Year

Month

Day

Hour

Minute

Disable

1st screen 2nd screen Substitution rules No. 01

Disable Enable

００００

Calendar blocks:1/2

－＋

MManual Startup

HOME

Disable

(2) OperationSet offset of 1 month at the “YY.MM.DD” calendar block.The Edit message screen is displayed.

Press Cal. Cond. .The Calendar conditions screen is displayed.

Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.2

Cursor

Calendar conditions

Calendar block No.

Changes the objective calendar block.

Objective calendar block is colored.

Offset setting

4-43 ●Use the calendar function

Calendar conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Substitutionrules

Column 1 Item 1

Back

《》1 10 20

Prev. Next

YY．MM．DDh・

1st screen 2nd screen Substitution rules No. 01

Calendar blocks:1/2

< Offset > < Substitution rules > < Zero-suppression >

Year

Month

Day

Hour

Minute

Disable Enable

００００

０００１

００００

－＋

Disable

MManual Startup

HOME

Input “1” at offset “Month”.The character string of the print description edit area is displayed at the print layout.

Offset 1 month

●Use the calendar function 4-44

4.10.3 Print by substituting a different character for the date (substitution rule)(1) Substitution rule function●Prints the date and time by replacing it with the selected characters.●One substitution rule No. is selected for one calendar block.●The substitution rule No. can be used in common for multiple calendar blocks.

Example of zero-suppression (time 2009.01.02 03:04)

Set contentsPrint result

Zero-suppression disabledEnabled (space)

Enabled (character justification)

YY.MM.DD 09.01.02 9. 1. 2 9.1.2

HH.MM 03:04 3: 4 3:4

( =space)

Maximum Substitution rule count

Model type Maximum Substitution rule count

RX2-B 48

RX2-S48

(Option : Up to 99)

●Kana, alphanumeric, and user pattern can be set as substitution characters.●The substitution character for year is 25 years from the year of the calendar time.

[Note] The substitution character for year omits the substitution character of the previous year each time one year elapses.At this time, the substitution character after 25 years becomes a space.

Moreover, when the current time “Year” is returned to the past, the substitution character for that year becomes a space.

(2) Zero-suppression function●Prints by substituting a space for “0” in the high-order digit of the calendar characters. Also deletes the “0” and prints left-justified.

4-45 ●Use the calendar function

Calendar conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Substitutionrules

Column 1 Item 1

Back

《》1 10 20

Prev. Next

YY．MM．DDh・

1st screen 2nd screen Substitution rules No. 01

Calendar blocks:1/2

< Offset > < Substitution rules > < Zero-suppression >

Year

Month

Day

Hour

Minute

Disable

００００

Disable Enable

－＋

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Substitution rules 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

N0.[０１] Subst. rule name[　　　　　　　　　　　　]

00[A] 01[B] 02[C] 03[D] 04[E] 05[F]06[G] 07[H] 08[ I ] 09[J] 10[K] 11[L]12[M] 13[N] 14[O] 15[P] 16[Q] 17[R]18[S] 19[T] 20[U] 21[V] 22[W] 23[X]

← →

↑

↓

Back spaceDelete

Insert

Duplicate

Back

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

Change Change

Over-write

ABC…

Hour

etc. ▽

MManual Startup

Apply

(3) OperationSet the substitution rule for the “Hour” calendar character.The Edit message screen is displayed.

Press Cal. Cond. .The Calendar conditions screen is displayed.

Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.2

Set “Hour” substitution rule to “Enable”.3

Press Substitution rules .The Substitution rules screen is displayed.

Input Hour the substitution rule for “Hour”.5

Calendar block No.

Changes the objective calendar block.

Substitution rules

Objective calendar block is colored.

Substitution rules enabled

«Hour» substitution rules

●Print shift code 4-46

4.11 Print shift code (Optional on RX2-S)(1) Overview●Divides one day into multiple work shifts and prints a different code for each work shift.

(Example) Example of one day divided into 3 work shifts

No. Range Print result1 0:30 to 8:14 A12 8:15 to 16:44 A23 16:45 to 0:29 A3

(See “(2) Operation” for the shift code setup procedure of this example.)

●Shift code character can be set at only one place in one message. Up to a maximum of 10 digits can be input.

●Shift code rules are set at the Shift code setup screen.●For work shift, the start time is specified in hour/minute units. Up to a maximum of 48 shifts can be specified.●One shift code rule is held for each message. To input the same shift code at another message, use the

“Duplicate” and “Paste” function. Input the shift code rules, memorize them by pressing Duplicate , and press Paste at the Shift code setup screen of the other message.

●Shift code characters cannot be input at the same calendar block as another calendar.

4-47 ●Print shift code

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count6 / 1000

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Back space

＋－ × ／（） . ： , ！ Dupli-cate Paste

” ＃＄％＆￥

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Insert

ＡＢＣ・

Over-write

ABC…123‥Sign

’ ■ ［］

＝？＜＞；＊＿

－＋

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Print spec.

Print format

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

←《》1 10 20

→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

ＡＢＣ・

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count6 / 1000

Year Month Day Hour Minu-te

Seco-nd

Totaldays

Weeknum-ber

Dayof

weekShiftcode

Timecount

Count

Back spaceetc. ▽123‥

Sign★◎　‥

LogoABC…

Delete

Insert

＋－ × ／

（） . ： ,

Over-write

Calendar/ count

－＋← →

CancelOK

ＥＥ・

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

BackSpace

(2) OperationThe Edit message screen is displayed.

Press Calendar/count .The display changes to the calendar/count keyboard and the calendar/count edit window is displayed.

Press Shift code .“EE” meaning shift code is displayed at the calendar/count edit window.

Calendar/count

Calendar/count edit window

Shift code

●Print shift code 4-48

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count7 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

ＥＥＢＣ・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Calendar conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Shift code

Column 1 Item 1

Back

《》1 10 20

ＥＥＢＣ・

1st screen 2nd screen

Calendar blocks:1/1

< Offset > < Substitution rules > < Zero-suppression >

Year

Month

Day

Hour

Minute

００００

－＋

MManual Startup

HOME

Press OK .The calendar characters are displayed in the print contents edit area.

Touch the print item to input.The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed in the print layout.

Press Cal. Cond. .The Calendar conditions screen is displayed.

Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.6

Print layout

Print item to input

Calendar block is displayed in a red frame.

Shift code

Calendar block No.

4-49 ●Print shift code

When the work shifts exceeded 12 classes, switch using Prev. Dsp. or Next Dsp. .Insertion or deletion can be performed in line units.

Shift code setup 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Input time in ascending order.

００

Insert line

Delete line

Duplicate

００００

1 ：～２３：５９

～２３：５９：

Back

MManual Startup

HOME

Shift code setup 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Input time in ascending order.

Ａ１

Ａ２

Ａ３

Insert line

Delete line

Duplicate

００３０

０８１５

1 ：～０８：１４

～１６：４４：

3 １６４５～００：２９：

4 ００００～００：００：

Back

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Back

Press Shift code .The Shift code setup screen is displayed.The last line is for addition.

Input the start time and print contents for each shift.When start time is input, the finish time which is 1 line above changes.

Press Back .Returns to the Calendar conditions screen.

Start timePrint contents

Start time

Back

●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count) 4-50

4.12 Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count) (Optional RX2-S)

(1) Overview●The print contents are updated at a preset update internal (minutes) timing.●When the time that becomes the standard is set one time a day, the print contents are updated to a preset

value when that time arrives.●The time count characters can be set at only one place in one message. Up to a maximum of 3 digits can be

set.●The time count conditions are set at the Time count conditions screen.●Range, reset value, reset time, and renewal period can be set as conditions.●Updating of the print contents is always increment + 1.●One time count condition is held for each message. To input the same time count condition at another message, use the “Duplicate” and “Paste” functions. Input the time count conditions, memorize them by

pressing Duplicate , and press Paste at the Time count conditions screen of the other message. ●The time count characters cannot be input at the same count block as another count.

Time Value00:00 FD00:30 FE01:00 FF01:30 FG02:00 GA02:30 GB03:00 GC03:30 GD

(Example) Range AA to GG, renewal period 30 minutes, reset time 05:00, reset value “AA”Time and count value

Time Value04:00 GE04:30 GF05:00 AA05:30 AB06:00 AC06:30 AD07:00 AE07:30 AF

Time Value08:00 AG08:30 BA09:00 BB09:30 BC10:00 BD10:30 BE11:00 BF11:30 BG

Time Value12:00 CA12:30 CB13:00 CC13:30 CD14:00 CE14:30 CF15:00 CG15:30 DA

Time Value16:00 DB16:30 DC17:00 DD17:30 DE18:00 DF18:30 DG19:00 EA19:30 EB

Time Value20:00 EC20:30 ED21:00 EE21:30 EF22:00 EG22:30 FA23:00 FB23:30 FC

(See “(2) Operation” for the time count conditions setup procedure of this example.)

4-51 ●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count)

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count6 / 1000

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Back space

＋－ × ／（） . ： , ！ Dupli-cate Paste

” ＃＄％＆￥

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Insert

ＡＢＣ・

Over-write

ABC…123‥Sign

’ ■ ［］

＝？＜＞；＊＿

－＋

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Print spec.

Print format

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

←《》1 10 20

→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

ＡＢＣ・

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count6 / 1000

Year Month Day Hour Minu-te

Seco-nd

Totaldays

Weeknum-ber

Dayof

weekShiftcode

Timecount

Count

Back spaceetc. ▽123‥

Sign★◎　‥

LogoABC…

Delete

Insert

＋－ × ／

（） . ： ,

Over-write

Calendar/ count

－＋← →

CancelOK

ＦＦ・

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

BackSpace

(2) OperationThe Edit message screen is displayed.

Press Calendar/count .The display changes to the calendar/count keyboard and the calendar/count edit window are displayed.

Press Time count .“FF” meaning time count is displayed at the calendar/count edit window.

Calendar/count

Calendar/count edit window

Time count

●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count) 4-52

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 1

Char. count7 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

ＦＦＢＣ・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Calendar conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Time count

Column 1 Item 1

Back

《》1 10 20

ＦＦＢＣ・

1st screen 2nd screen

Calendar blocks:1/1

< Offset > < Substitution rules > < Zero-suppression >

Year

Month

Day

Hour

Minute

００００

－＋

MManual Startup

HOME

Press OK .The calendar characters are displayed at the print contents edit area.

Touch the print item to input.The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed at the print layout.

Press Cal. Cond. .The Calendar conditions screen is displayed.

Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.6

Print layout

Print item to input

Calendar block is displayed in a red frame.

Time count

Calendar block No.

4-53 ●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count)

Time count conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Duplicate

Back

《》1 10 20

ＦＦＢＣ・

Range

Reset

Reset time hour ００ minute

Renewal period

００

９９

００

15 minutes

－＋

MManual Startup

HOME

Press Time count .The Time count conditions screen is displayed.

Input the range, reset value, reset time, and renewal period.8

Press Back .Returns to the Calendar conditions screen.

9 Back

Back

Time countconditions

●Use the count function 4-54

4.13 Use the count function4.13.1 Print count characters(1) Count characters●Prints by changing the count value in the specified increments at each printing.

Count conditions screen setup items

Setup item Contents

Value Count value to be printed next.

Range (minimum, maximum) Range of count value. Set for each digit.

Update (In progress) Number of printings after the last count update.

Update (Units)Count update printing cycle. Count is updated each printing the number of update units.

Increment Change value of count value at count update.

Direction Selects whether counted up or counted down at count update.

Jump (Jump from, Jump to)

After the count value matches the “Jump from:”, the next count value is made the “Jump to:”.

ResetWhen Count reset of the Print description screen is pressed, the count value is changed to the specified value.

Count skipSet capital alphabetical characters, small alphabetical characters or user patterns to skip in count block.

Zero-suppressionSelects whether or not leading 0 except the rightmost end is to be replaced by a space.

MultiplierThe value input here is multiplied by the count value and the result is made the print contents.

●A series of count characters is called a “Count block”.

Maximum Count block count

Model type Maximum Count block count

RX2-B 2

RX2-S2

(Option : Up to

●The count conditions are set for each count block.●When there are multiple count blocks, the count conditions are set for each count block and each is

updated independently. There is no carry from another count block.

(Maximum digit : 20 digits/count block)

4-55 ●Use the count function

Count conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Back

《》1 10 20

Prev. Next

Value

Range

Update (in progress)

(unit)

1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen

Count blocks:1/2

ＣＣＣ　ＣＣ・

０００

０００００

００００１

－＋

MManual Startup

HOME

●A range button is not displayed at the Count conditions screen corresponding to a print item with bar code set.

●When a jump digit was set at the right side of a count digit and jump occurred, the count of the digit at the left of the jump digit is updated.

Count block

Count block is displayed in a blue frame.

●Use the count function 4-56

Value

Range

Update (in progress)

(unit)

０００

９９９

０００００

００００１

Increment

Jump from:

to:

Reset

Count skip

・・・

01 downupDirection

Zero-suppression

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

EnableDisable

Value

Range

００１

９９９

・・・・・

(2) Count conditions setting examplesNumber by +1 from “000” to “999”.1

Count result

000 001 002 998 999

(Note) Range is set for each digit.When range is set to «001» to «999», since it means setting with «0»excluded at the 1 position, the count result becomes as follows :

Count result

001 002 003 008 009

011 012 013 018 019

021

4-57 ●Use the count function

Value

Range

Update (in progress)

(unit)

Ａ０１

Ａ００

Ｚ９９

０００００

００００１

Increment

Jump from:

to:

Reset

Count skip

・９９

・０１

・・・

01 downupDirection

Zero-suppression

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

EnableDisable

・・・・・

Number by +1 from “A01” to “Z99”.2

Count resultA01 A02 A03 A98 A99

B01 B02 B03 B98 B99

Z01 Z02 Z03 Z98 Z99

(Note) Since the count value skips in increments when an increment is input, always choose a count value for jump setting which is not skipped.

●Use the count function 4-58

Value

Range

Update (in progress)

(unit)

００

０７

０００００

００００１

Increment

Jump from:

to:

Reset

Count skip

　・　

01 downupDirection

Zero-suppression

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

EnableDisable

・・・・・

Set user pattern as count value3

[Example] User pattern is defined as follows:

User pattern code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07Definition pattern 31 2 4 4 3 2 1

When printing one way 4 times and backwards 4 times by both ways printing, the same column can be printed by the same numbers ( to ).The count result becomes as shown below.

1 4

●The user pattern which can be used in count are 48 kinds up to code 47. Always use from top 00.●Numeric and save characters can be combined.[Example] Range [0 0 0 0 ] [9 9 0909 ]

4-59 ●Use the count function

Value

Range

Update (in progress)

(unit)

００１

０００

９９９

０００００

００００１

Increment

Jump from:

to:

Reset

Count skip

９９９

００１

01 downupDirection

Zero-suppression

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

EnableDisable

Print description 2015.07.07 12:45

Com=0[Ready 　　　　　]

Ink operating time　　　　　　　１００(hours)

Cumulative op. time　　　　　　１００(hours)

Print count　　　　　　　　　１０００(prints)

Ink pressure　　　　　　　０．２５０(MPa；standard value:０．２５０)

Changemessage

Selectmessage

Overwritemessage

Adjust printparameters

Operationmanagement

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

－＋

Count reset

MManual Shutdown

Inter-laced

・・・・・

Print countreset

Reset the count value to a preset value.4

Reset value «001» is set beforehand.

When Count reset is pressed, the count value is reset to the preset «001».

Count reset

●Use the count function 4-60

Value

Range

Update (in progress)

(unit)

００００

９９９９

０００００

００００１

Increment

Jump from:

to:

Reset

Count skip

・・・・

01 downupDirection

Zero-suppression

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

Disable Enable

・・・・・

Print by replacing 0 of the count value with a space.5

●”0” at the leading digit of the count character is replaced by a space and printed using the zero-suppression function.

Count value “12” print comparison

Count conditions Print resultZero-suppression disabled 0012Zero-suppression enabled 12

Zero-suppression «Enable» is set.

4-61 ●Use the count function

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1Item 2

Char. count3 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

←《》1 10 20

→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

・

Column 1 Item 2

Char. count3 / 1000

Year Month Day Hour Minu-te

Seco-nd

Totaldays

Weeknum-ber

Dayof

weekShiftcode

Timecount

Count

Back spaceetc. ▽123‥

Sign★◎　‥

LogoABC…

Delete

Insert

＋－ × ／

（） . ： ,

Over-write

Calendar/ count

－＋← →

CancelOK

・

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

HOME

BackSpace

(3) OperationThe Edit message screen is displayed.

Press Calendar/count .The display changes to the calendar/count keyboard and the calendar/count edit window are displayed.

Calendar/count

Calendar/count edit window

Calendar/count keyboard

Count character

●Use the count function 4-62

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

←《》1 10 20

→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

・

Column 1 Item 2

Char. count6 / 1000

Year Month Day Hour Minu-te

Seco-nd

Totaldays

Weeknum-ber

Dayof

weekShiftcode

Timecount

Count

Back spaceetc. ▽123‥

Sign★◎　‥

LogoABC…

Delete

Insert

＋－ × ／

（） . ： ,

Over-write

Calendar/ count

－＋← →

CancelOK

ＣＣＣ・

Space

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

HOME

Back

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Char. count3 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

ＣＣＣ・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Input Count C (count character).The count character is displayed on the calendar/count edit screen.

Press OK .The count character is displayed at the print contents edit area.

3 OK

Count block is displayed in a blue frame.

4-63 ●Use the count function

ApplyPress Apply .The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed in the print layout.The count character input is applied.

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Char. count6 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

ＣＣＣ・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Press Count cond. .The Count conditions screen is displayed.

Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.6

Press 1st screen , 2nd screen or 3rd screen and switch the count conditions screen.

Count conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Back

《》1 10 20

Prev. Next

Value

Range

Update (in progress)

(unit)

1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen

Count blocks:1/1

ＣＣＣ・

０００

９９９

０００００

００００１

－＋

MManual Startup

HOME

Count conditions

Objective count block is colored.

Count conditions screen switching

Count block No.

Changes the objectivecount block.

●Use the count function 4-64

Count conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Back

《》1 10 20

2nd screen1st screen 3rd screen

Count blocks:1/1

ＣＣＣ・

Increment

Jump from:

to:

Reset

・・・

01 downupDirection

－＋

Prev. Next

MManual Startup

HOME

(2nd screen)

Count conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Back

《》1 10 20

3rd screen1st screen 2nd screen

Count blocks:1/1

ＣＣＣ・

Zero-suppression

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

EnableDisable

－＋

Prev. Next

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

(3rd screen)

Press Back .8 Back

Count conditions screen switching

Back

4-65 ●Use the count function

4.13.2 Use count multiplication printing(1) Function●Prints by changing the count value in the specified increments at each printing.

●Multiplies the count value by a predetermined value and prints the result.

●Prints left-justified.●Matches the decimal part of the product to the number of count digits by rounding off.●Enables zero-suppression setting for the last 0 after the decimal point. (Example: 1.230 → 1.23)●When the number of digits of the integer part of the product exceeds the number of digits of the input

count character, a “Count Overflow” error is generated.●When an integer value is set for the count multiplier, the zero-suppression setting is not reflected.

●Use the count function 4-66

Count conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Back

《》1 10 20

3rd screen1st screen 2nd screen

Count blocks:1/1

ＣＣＣ・

Zero-suppression

Multiplier ０．３０４８・・・・

EnableDisable

Prev. Next

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Char. count6 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

ＣＣＣ・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

(2) OperationShows the operation sequence when 0.3048 is set for the count multiplier and feet → meter converter (1 foot → 0.3048 m) is performed and the result is printed.

Input Count C .1

Press Count cond. .The Count conditions screen is displayed.

Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.3

Press 3rd screen and switch the count conditions screen.4

Display the 3rd screen of the count condition screens and input 0.3048 at the count multiplier.

Count conditions

Count conditions screen switching

Back

Multiplier

4-67 ●Use the count function

The count value is multiplied by the input count multiplier and the result is printed.

A printing example is shown in the table.(When both Disable and Enable are set at zero-suppression)

●When you want to return to normal count, input an invalid character at the count multiplier to make the multiplier invalid.●When a bar code is set for a count print item, a mask is applied to the count multiplier

input area and count multiplier cannot be input.●Integer values can be input at the count multiplier.●Alphabet, symbols, and saved characters cannot be input at the count multiplier.

Precautions when using count multiplication printing

Printing example of count multiplication printing (zero-suppression disabled)Input characters C C C C C CCount multiplier 0 . 3 0 4 8Zero-suppression Disabled

Initial value Product Printed result Remarks0 0 0 0 0 1 0. 3 0 4 8 0. 3 0 4 8 -0 0 0 0 0 2 0 . 6 0 9 6 0 . 6 0 9 6 —

… … … -0 0 0 0 1 0 3. 0 4 8 0 3. 0 4 8 0 -0 0 0 0 1 1 3 . 3 5 2 8 3 . 3 5 2 8 —

… … … -3 2 8 0 8 2 9 9 9 9 9 . 3 9 3 6 9 9 9 9 9 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.3 2 8 0 8 3 9 9 9 9 9 . 6 9 8 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.

… … … …9 9 9 9 9 8 3 0 4 7 9 9 . 3 9 0 4 3 0 4 7 9 9 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.9 9 9 9 9 9 3 0 4 7 9 9 . 6 9 5 2 3 0 4 8 0 0 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.

Printing example of count multiplication printing (zero-suppression enabled)Input characters C C C C C CCount multiplier 0 . 3 0 4 8Zero-suppression Enabled

Initial value Product Printed result Remarks0 0 0 0 0 1 0. 3 0 4 8 0. 3 0 4 8 -0 0 0 0 0 2 0 . 6 0 9 6 0 . 6 0 9 6 —

… … … -0 0 0 0 1 0 3. 0 4 8 0 3. 0 4 8 Last decimal digit is zero-suppressed.0 0 0 0 1 1 3 . 3 5 2 8 3 . 3 5 2 8 —

… … … -3 2 8 0 8 2 9 9 9 9 9 . 3 9 3 6 9 9 9 9 9 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.3 2 8 0 8 3 9 9 9 9 9 . 6 9 8 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.

*Count characters are represented by C and spaces are represented by .

●Use the count function 4-68

Value

Range

Update (in progress)

(unit)

０００

ＺＺＺ

０００００

００００１

Increment

Jump from:

to:

Reset

Count skip

・・・

01 downupDirection

Zero-suppression

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

EnableDisable

Ⅰ ・・・・

０００　００１００２　‥‥ 　００Ｈ　００Ｊ

００Ｋ　００Ｌ００Ｍ　‥‥ 　０ＨＺ　０Ｊ０

０Ｊ１　０Ｊ２０Ｊ３　‥‥ 　ＨＺＺ　Ｊ００

Ｊ０１　Ｊ０２Ｊ０３　‥‥ 　ＺＺＹ　ＺＺＺ

4.13.3 Skip specified character and print (Count skip)(1) Function●Skip the character which was set and move to the next count value to print.●»Count skip» characters is either one kind of capital alphabetical character, small alphabetical character or

user pattern.●Up to 5 characters can be input as «Count skip» characters.●The range of each digit to which count character is input may vary, however, the «Count skip» character

may not exceed the range of each digit.

(2) «Count skip» setting examplesSkip the alphabet «I» and count up by an increment of 1 from «000» to «ZZZ».

4-69 ●Use the count function

Count conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Back

《》1 10 20

Count blocks:1/1

ＣＣＣ

ー＋

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Value

Range

Update (in progress)

(unit)

ＡＡＡ

ＺＺＺ

００００００

０００００１

1st screen 3rd screen2nd screen

(3) OperationThe procedures to skip the alphabets «I» and «Q» ,which are inputted to «Count skip» are shown below.

Input Count C .1

Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Char. count6 / 1000

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

Back space

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ Dupli-cate Paste

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽Calendar/count

←

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

《》

Delete

1 10 20→

Prev.item

abcdefghijklmno

Next item

abcdefghijklmno

Change Change

Insert

ＣＣＣ・

Over-write

ABC…

－＋

Print spec.

Print format

MManual Startup

HOME

Back

Cal.cond.

Countcond.

Press Count cond. .The Count conditions screen is displayed.

Press Previous or Next and change the objective conut block.3

Set Range using numeric, capital alphabetical character, small alphabetical character or user pattern. Numeric cannot be set to Range (maximum) when count skip is used.Open the 1st screen of Count conditions screen and input Value and Range.

Count conditions

Count conditions screen switching

Range (maximum)

●Use the count function 4-70

Count conditions 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name[　　　　　　　　　　　]

Column 1 Item 2

Back

《》1 10 20

1st screen 3rd screen2nd screen

Count blocks:1/1

ＣＣＣ

ー＋

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

Increment

Jump from:

to:

Reset

Count skip

・・・

01 downupDirection

Ⅰ Ｑ・・・

ＡＡＡ　ＡＡＢＡＡＣ　‥‥ 　ＡＡＨ　ＡＡＪ

ＡＡＫ　ＡＡＬＡＡＭ　‥‥ 　ＡＡＰ　ＡＡＲ

ＡＡＳ　ＡＡＴＡＡＵ　‥‥ 　ＡＨＺ　ＡＪＡ

ＡＪＢ　ＡＪＣＡＪＤ　‥‥ 　ＨＺＺ　ＪＡＡ

ＪＡＢ　ＪＡＣＪＡＤ　‥‥ 　ＺＺＹ　ＺＺＺ

Press 2nd screen and switch Count conditions screen.Input «I» and «Q» at «Count skip» on the 2nd screen of Count conditions.

Count conditions screen switching

Count skip

Skip the characters inputted to «Count skip», then print the next count value.See the figure below for print example.

● When the «Count character» is added, overwritten or deleted, the confirmation message «Changed skip condition» shows up on the screen and «Count skip» character becomes invalid.● As to Range (maximum), input either one kind of capital alphabetical character, small

alphabetical character or user pattern. In addition, all «Count skip» characters must be included in the smallest range.● Characters which were set as Value, Range, Jump or Reset cannot be input to «Count

skip».● When the «Count skip» is set, the incremental value is 1=fixed.

Precautions when using count skip printing

4-71 ●Set the print specifications

Print specifications 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Change unit

Printformat

Editmessage

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Ink drop use

Character width

（1/1～1/16）

（0～3999）

Character height （0～99）８５

０３

００００

Characterorientation

Printing method　１（１：Single scan　２：Interlaced　３：Mixed）　

Print start delay

Arrow : Prin-

ting direction

００００Print start delay

（0～9999）SC

Sensor Print start

0:ＡＢＣ→

1:ＡＢＣ← ←

　→

ＡＢＣ

MManual Startup

HOME

Back

1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen

4.14 Set the print specifications4.14.1 Set the character height, character width, and orientation(1) Function●Sets the character height, character width, character orientation, and print start.

Character height●The character height can be specified.

Ink drop use percentage setting Character width setting1/1 0021/2 001

1/3 to 1/16 000

●For rotary encoder wiring and setup, see the Technical Manual “4.3.2-1 Rotary encoder specifications, wiring and switch setting”.

Ink drop use percentage●Sets the ratio of drops used in printing. For example, ink drop use 1/3 prints at a ratio of 1 in 3 ink

drops. The 2 ink drops are recovered from the gutter.

Setting range of ink drop use percentage

Model type 1 line 2 lines 3 lines NotesRX2-B 1/3 to 1/16 1/4 to 1/16 1/4 to 1/16 -RX2-S 1/2 to 1/16 1/2 to 1/16 1/2 to 1/16 Option : Up to 1/1

●When ink drop use is 1/1, high speed printing is possible. For ink drop use 1/16, low speed printing is performed and the print quality improves.

●When Format setup is Free layout on the Change message screen, setting range of ink drop use percentage is 1/2 to 1/16.

Character width●The character width can be specified.●The character width setting range is from 0 to 3999.●When the product speed matching feature is incorporated (when the rotary encoder is connected),

set the character width as indicated below.

Changes the print start delay input units.

Screen switching

●Set the print specifications 4-72

Display of Printing methodIcon Ink Drop Charge Rule Classification Printing method

Standard (Single scan)When there are multiple printing lines, multiple lines are printed in turn.

Standard (Interlaced),Dot mixed interlaced

Multiple lines are printed at the same time.

Mixed single scan and interlacedPrinting is done while switching between single scan and interlaced for each column.

Setting Direction of transport Printing results

0 : A B C a← A B C 1 2 3

→ →b

1 : A B C a←

← →b A B C 1 2 3

2 : a←

← →b

3 : a←

→ →b

A B C 1 2 3

A B C 1 2 3ＡＢＣ123

Character orientation●Printing direction of characters can be set.●Settings and print results are as shown below.

A B C 1 2 3

A B C

A B C 1 2 3

Direction of transport

Example of setting «0:ABC→»and Direction of transport «a».

Printing method●Two printing methods are selectable: «single scan», «interlaced» and «mixed».●A printing method will be automatically selected in accordance with the print format setup and

the ink drop charge rule.

●When making interlaced prints, perform the following setup.(i) Ensure that the same print format is employed for all items.(ii) Ensure that the same line count setting is employed for all columns.(iii) The ink drop use percentage is 1/1 to 1/4.

Perform overall column setup. The format for the first item is then applied to all the other items so as to provide interlaced setup. When making a 1-line print, the single scan predominates even if you perform steps (i) through (iii) .

●In the case of free layout, printting method is single scan fixed.

SinglescanSinglescan

Inter-laced

Mixed

4-73 ●Set the print specifications

When the nozzle is positioned before the sensor When the nozzle is positioned after the sensor

Print start delay=a-b (mm) Print start delay=a+b (mm)

Print start delay●The printing start position can be specified.●After setting in character units or mm units, fine adjust in scan units.●When you want to input in mm units, input “Line speed”.●The positional relationship between the sensor and nozzle is as indicated below.

●Specify the print start delay (printing start position) as suggested below. (i) Measure the length of the print start delay. (ii) Measure the inter-character distance (C).(iii) Divide the value obtained in (i) by the value obtained in (ii). Enter the resulting value.

a+bc

: Setting value

●When a product speed matching function is not provided, if the ink drop use percentage, character width, character size or number of lines is changed, the set value of the print start delay can be adjusted so that the time until printing starts will not change.

●When a product speed matching function is provided, if the pulse rate division actor is changed, the set value of the print start delay can be adjusted so that the time until printing starts will not change.

Sensor

c Direction of transport

Print targetb

Nozzle center

a0 0 2 3

Sensor

c Direction of transport

Print targetb

Nozzle center

a0 0 2 3

Print specifications 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Change unit

Printformat

Editmessage

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Product speed matching

Line speed 　　　　　　　[m/min.] Input ‘0’ if unknown

Pulse rate div. Factor　　　　　（1/1～1/999　Enter denominator.）　

Speed compensation

Speed compensation fine control (-50～+50)SC

Distance between print head and work　　 [mm]

Repeat print

０００００

Repeat count 　　　　　 (0: none, 1～9998, 9999: Continuous)

Repeat intervals 　　　　　　　（0～99999）SC

００００

０００００

００１

００

MManual Startup

HOME

Back

2nd screen1st screen 3rd screen

Disable Enable

００００

None Encoder Auto

2nd screen of “Print specifications” screen

Changes the repeat intervals input units.

Screen switching

●Set the print specifications 4-74

Product speed matching●When printing is conducted with this feature activated, the character width is maintained irrespective of the print target transport speed changes.●The Printing by «Auto» method is performed according to the change of speed without a rotary

encoder.●Enter «Print Target width» and «Actual Print width» in mm for «Auto».●»Repeat count» and «Target sensor filter: Until end of printing» on «Print specifications» can not

be used when setting «Auto». Refer to «4.3.5 Product speed matching function without a rotary encoder» of the Technical Manual for «Auto» method.

Difference between product speed matching setting

None Encoder Auto (RX2-S only)Prints per individual scan for an interval of a definite period of time.

Printing is performed scan by scan at each encoder pulse.

Printing is performed according to the change of speed.

Refer to “4. Electric signal connection” of the Technical Manual for details.

Line speed●Inputs the line speed.●When the line speed was input, the print start delay and repeat intervals set values can be input in mm

units by pressing change unit.●The selectable setting ranges from 0 to 999.9 m/minutes.●This feature cannot be activated if the product speed matching feature is enable.

Pulse rate division factor●Specifies the pulse rate division Factor that determines the intervals at which the encoder signal is to be

recognized.●The selectable setting ranges from 1/1 to 1/999.●When a setting of 1/1 is selected, no pulse rate division Factor is effected.●This feature cannot be activated if the product speed matching feature is disabled.

Speed compensation (RX2-S)●Set to prevent changes in the print position.●Cannot be set when a Product speed matching feature is not specified.●Adjusts print start delay according to the set value of “Distance between print head and work”.●Cannot be used when Repeat print is specified.●Note that a Print Overlap Fault may be generated when the printing interval is extremely short when the

Speed compensation setting is changed from “Disable” to “Enable”.●Fine adjusts the print start delay from the setting value of the Speed compensation fine control. However, the following condition must be satisfied. 0 [Print start delay]+[Speed compensation fine control]●Set values for “Speed compensation” and “Speed compensation fine control” are not memorized per

print date but held as a common value.

Distance between print head and work.●Inputs the distance between the print head and the print target.●When product speed matching is “encoder” and “Speed compensation” was set to “Enable”, the print

start delay is adjusted by considering the distance between the print head and the print target. When “Speed compensation” is set to “Disable”, the distance between the print head and the print target

is not referenced, even if set.

4-75 ●Set the print specifications

Print specifications 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Printformat

Editmessage

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Target sensor timer　　　　　（1/10sec 0: none 1～999）

Target sensor filter　

Setup value (ms 0～9999)

Ink Drop Charge Rule

Standard(single : It prints by the Single scan or Interlaced.

scan/interlaced)

００５０

０００

MManual Startup

HOME

Back

3rd screen1st screen 2nd screen

Until end of print.Time setup

Standard(single scan/interlaced)

Screen switching

Print specifications 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Product speed matching

Print Target width 　　　　　　(mm 0～9999)

Actual Print width 　　　　　　(mm 0～9999)　

Speed compensation

MManual Startup

HOME

2nd screen1st screen 3rd screen

Disable Enable

００６０

None AutoEncoder

００３０

12 Print Target width●Enter «Print Target width» in mm for «Auto». Input the length of the place over which the print target is detected.●The Print Target width setting range is from 0 to 9999.●If «Print Target width» is not entered, the print is made with the same interval as when the Speed match-

ing function is not used.

Actual Print width●Enter «Actual Print width» in mm for «Auto».●The Actual Print width setting range is from 0 to 9999.●The value for «Actual Print width» must be smaller than «Print Target width».●If «Actual Print width» is not entered, the print is made with the same interval as when the Speed

matching function is not used.

3rd screen of “Print specifications” screen

Print Target width

ABC

Actual Print width

The place over which the print target is detected.

●Set the print specifications 4-76

●The term «chattering» refers to a state where signal voltage instability occurs when the sensor signal starts or ends.

Target sensor timer●You can specify the time for displaying a fault message when the sensor is continuously ON.●When the sensor on time exceeds a set value, the message «Target Sensor Fault» is displayed.●If the «Target sensor timer» feature is not needed, select a setting of 0.●The selectable setting is from 0.0 to 99.9 seconds.

Target sensor filter●Perform this setup when you intend to maintain operation normality even in the event of chattering.●The time for ignoring chattering is set for when a sensor signal chatters when printed matter shields the

sensor from light.●When a fault occurs due to chattering, the message «Print Overlap Fault» is displayed.●If the target sensor filter feature is not needed, select a setting of 0.●The selectable setting ranges from 0 to 9999 milliseconds.●»Target sensor filter: Until end of printing» can not be used when setting «Auto» on «Product speed

matching».

16 Ink drop charge rule (RX2-S only)●There are three rules of Standard, Mixed single scan and interlaced, and Dot mixed interlaced in the Ink

Drop Charge Rule.●With this function, print quality will be better than the case that dot mixture data is printed by the single scan especially when ink drop use is from 1/1 to 1/4.

Differences of each rule of the Ink drop charge rule

Method Print sample

Standard (Single scan)

Standard (Interlaced)

Mixed single scan and interlaced

Dot mixed interlaced

All the columns are printed by single scan.

(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3) (Column 4) (Column 5)5×8

5x85x8 12×16 12×16 7×10 5×8

All the columns are printed by interlaced.

(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3) (Column 4) (Column 5) 5×8 5×8 5×8 5×8 5x85x8 5×8 5×8 5×8 5×8

Rules are changed by column.

(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3) (Column 4) (Column 5)5×8 5x85x8 7×10 5x55x8 7×10 12×16 5×5 5×5

Interlaced Single scan Single scan Interlaced Single scan

All the columns are printed by interlaced.

(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3) (Column 4) (Column 5)5x85x8 5×8 7×10

12×16 5×8 5×8 18×24 7×10

4-77 ●Set the print specifications

●When the conditions in the following table are met during mixed single/interlaced control, printing that mixes single scan and interlaced is possible.

Conditions for interlaced printing at Mixed single scan and interlaced

No. Conditions Example of print data

1 Barcodes are not set.

2When number of line is two or more, all fonts of items in each column are the same.

3Ink drop use is from 1/1 to 1/4.(The high speed print is not applicable.)

(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3)5×8

7×10 5x818x24 7×10 5×8

Single scan Interlaced

●When the conditions in the following table are met during dot mixed interlaced, interlaced printing with mixed dots is possible.

Conditions for interlaced printing at Dot mixed interlaced

No. Conditions Print example

1 All fonts of items in each column are the same.

2 Barcodes are not set.

Following (1) or (2) is satisfied in all columns.(Interlaced printing is also possible when all columns are configured only with the condition (2).) (1) When number of line is two or more All fonts of items in each column are the same. (2) When number of line is one The font of items is 12×16 or 18×24.

4Ink drop use is from 1/1 to 1/4. (The High-speed print mode is not applicable.)

(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3)

5x87x10 5×8

18×24 7×10 5x8Interlaced

●1-line columns with 12×16 or 18 x24 font at Dot mixed interlaced will be split into 2-line (or 3-line) in the IJP and printed. As a result of a sprit 1-line of 12×16 or 18×24, borders of characters might look being pushed down, and set the Line spacing only for the case.

But, uneven printing happens when product speed matching is used at low speed .●The number of print formats that can be set with dot mixture is up to eight at all ink drop charge rules.

And the ink drop use can not be mixed.

●Ink Drop Charge Rule PrecautionsPrecautions

No. Precautions Conditions

1The higher the speed the bigger misalignment of lines at high speed without product speed matching.

Dot mixed interlaced only

2Uneven printing happens at divided positions when product speed matching is used for 1-line printing at low speed.

Dot mixed interlaced only

●Set the print specifications 4-78

4.14.2 Set repeat printing(1)Overview●This is set to print the same print description continuously.●Set the «Repeat intervals» and «Repeat count» for repeat printing.●Repeat printing can not be used when setting «Auto» on «Product speed matching».

Repeat intervals●The print target size can be specified.●This setup is to be performed when the print target is transported while it is in close contact.●After setting in character units or mm units, fine adjust in scan units.●When you want to input in mm units, input “Line speed”.●Perform the following calculations for repeat intervals setup purposes. (i) On an individual scan basis (1-digit character width × number of digits — trailing character correction value) × (print target size/all-digit print width) (ii) On an individual character basis Number of digits × (print target size/all-digit print width)

●1-digit character width = (horizontal character size + inter-character space) x character width increase setting

●Trailing character correction value = inter-character space x character width increase setting + 1

(Example) Print target size: 64 mm; all-digit print width: 25 mm; number of digits: 6; character size: 5 × 7 dots; inter-character space: 2 dots ●On an individual scan basis ((5+2)×1×6-(2×1+1))×(64/25)=99.84→100 ●On an individual character basis 6×(64/25)=15.36→15

●Round off the calculation results to the nearest whole number.

Repeat count●You can preset the number of repeats.●If repeat printing is not needed, set the number to «0». ●Printing is performed in accordance with the repeat printing mode setup.●The relationship between the repeat printing mode and the count is as stated below.

ModeSetting

2 to 9998 9999

Signal ON period

Printing is repeated a preselected number of times at predefined intervals while the print target is detected.

Repeat printing is performed while the print target is detected.

OFF — ONtransition

Printing is repeated a preselected number of times at predefined intervals once the print target is detected.

Once the print target is detected, repeat printing is performed until it is aborted.

Print target Print target

Repeat intervals

4-79 ●Set the print specifications

4.14.3 Set various printing(1) Function

“Various print setup” screen

Calendar offset●Sets whether to make it today or yesterday when finding whether the calendar month or year offset is set.

DIN print (Optional on RX2-S)●Rotated 180° and printed at each printing so that characters can also be read by viewing from the top or

bottom.●At repeat print setup, printing is rotated 180°at the end of one printing.

●Following shows conditions to execute DIN print.

Conditions for DIN printNo. Condition1 All print items are a 1 line setting..2 The character size of all the print items is the same.3 No barcode item.4 No Calendar item.5 Format setup is not free layout.

Line direction

A B C A B C

A B C

[Printing 1] [Printing 2] [Printing 3] Work

DIN printing example

Various print setup 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Calendar offset

DIN print

EAN Prefix

Barcode printing

QR Error correction level

Offset from yesterday From today

Disable Enable

Print formatEdit message

Back

MManual Startup

HOMENormal Reverse

M (15%) Q (25%)

●Set the print specifications 4-80

Error correction level Data restoration percentageM Approx. 15%Q Approx. 25%

EAN Prefix (RX2-S only)●Whether to set bar code EAN-13, EAN-8 country code by character input or print format is selected.

Number of digits of bar codeCountry code Data Check digit Total number of digits

EAN-13 2 10 1 13EAN-8 2 5 1 8

EAN PrefixSet value

Character input Print format

Handling of country codeCountry code is input at the head of the data.

Set by print format without including country code in the data.

Print format screen Country code is not displayed. Set the country code.

Edit message screen

For EAN-13, input 12 digits and for EAN-8, input 7 digits, all including the country code.However, check digit is excluded.

For EAN-13 input 10 digits and for EAN-8, input 5 digits, with-out including the country code.However, the check digit is excluded.

NormalThe barcode dot data will be printed as is.(With yellow ink, a yellow bar is created.)

ReverseThe barcode dot data will be reversed and printed.(The work color will become the color of the bar. The ink color will be that of background.)

●When the country code is changed at the Print format screen, the country code for all the bar code items in that message is changed to the same value.

●For UPC-A, input 11 digits including the prefix code at the edit message screen.

Barcode print (RX2-S only)●Set the barcode print system.

●The white areas (quiet zone) are necessary at both ends of barcode for the barcode to be recognized. Input one or two characters with all dots marked out (provided on numeric keyboard screen) to the previous column and next column items.●For DM codes and QR codes, printing will be performed in normal mode even if reverse is selected. For DM codes and QR codes, process data to reverse mode at reader side before reading.●When adding Human Readable code, the barcode dot data is printed as is, even if set «Reverse».

Normal

Reverse

Quiet zone

QR Error correction level (Optional on RX2-S)●Choose an error correction level from “M” or “Q”.

See the Technical Manual “9. APPENDIX” for details.

4-81 ●Set the print specifications

Adjust print parameters 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Character height　　　　　　　　　　　　　（0～99）

Character width　　　　　　　　　　　　　　（0～3999）

Print start delay　　　　　　　　　　　（0～9999）SC

Pulse rate div. Factor　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

－＋

Change unit

SaveBack

－＋８５

－＋０００２

－＋００００

－＋００１(1/1～1/999 Enter denominator.)

MManual Startup

HOME

4.14.4 Fine adjust the print specifications (Adjust print parameters)(1) Function●Starts from the Print description screen.●Current message print specifications “character height”, “character width”, “print start delay” and “Pulse rate

div. Factor” settings are easily set.●Since changes to the set value are immediately reflected in the printing, the changes be easily confirmed while

printing.●After setting in character units or mm units, fine adjust in scan units.●When you want to input in mm units, input “Line speed” in the print specifications screen.

“Adjust print parameters” screen

(Note) If various settings are changed when the printing is performed frequently, the faults such as «Print Overlap fault», «Print Data Changeover In

Progress V» or «Invalid Print Start Timing» may occur.

5. MAINTENANCE

(1) Functions

●Maintenance 5-1

Maintenance menu 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Ready　　　]

Unit informationOperation

management Test print

Excitation V update

(Nozzle test)View alarm

historyCirculation control

View software version Comm. monitor

Password protection

MManual

HOME

Shutdown

Solenoid valve/

pump test

Item Description Reference

Unit information ●Displays the unit TYPE-FORM, serial number, etc. 5.1

Operation management ●Displays the operational status. 5.2

Test print ●Prints without any start print signal input. 5.3

Excitation V update (Nozzle test)

●Finds the optimum excitation V-ref. value to maintain good print quality.

Technical Manual 6.11

View alarm history●Displays the generation status of error and alarm messages.

9.3

Circulation control ●Controls the ink and makeup circulation system. Technical Manual 6

View software version ●Displays the name of the registered software. 5.4

Comm. monitor●Displays the description of the serial communications between an external device and the IJ printer.

Technical Manual 5.6

Password protection ●Displays the functions that can be executed. 5.5

Solenoid valve / pump test

●Checks the operation of the solenoid valve and pump.

Technical Manual 6.14

(2) Operation

Press Maintenance in the Print description screen.The maintenance menu screen is displayed.

5-2 ●Confirm the Unit information

Unit information 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Ready　　　]

TYPE-FORM

Serial number

Ink type

RX2-SD160W

99999999

JP-K69

MManual

HOME

Shutdown

Upgrade

5.1 Confirm the Unit information (1) Functions

●Displays the unit TYPE-FORM, serial number, login information, and ink type.

Item Description

TYPE-FORM ●Displays the TYPE-FORM of the unit.

Serial number ●Displays the serial number of the unit.

Ink type ●Displays the type of ink used.

Upgrade (RX2-S only) ●The Upgrade condition can be confirmed by pressing Upgrade .

(2) OperationPress Unit information in the Maintenance menu.

5.2 Monitor operational status(1) Functions

●Confirm the Unit information 5-3

Item Description

Ink operating time (variable value)

●Displays the operating time from the last ink replacement.●At ink replacement, set to “0”. Displays up to 9,999 hours.●When the Ink alarm time is exceeded, displays an ink replacement alarm message.

Ink alarm time●Displays the time which becomes the ink replacement standard.●Always displays the standard value.

Cumulative op. time●Displays the cumulative operating time. The value cannot be changed.●Displays up to 999,999 hours.

Print count (variable value)

●Displays the number of printings.●A value of 0 to 999,999,999 can be set.

Ink name ●Displays the type of ink used.

Makeup name ●Displays the type of makeup used.

Ink viscosity●Displays the ink viscosity●Standard value is 100.

Ink pressure●Displays the ink pressure.●The standard value is always displayed.

Ambient temperature ●Displays the ambient temperature and allowable ambient temperature.

Deflection voltage ●Displays the deflection voltage in the Ready state.

Excitation V-ref. ●Displays the set excitation V-ref. value.

Excitation frequency ●Displays the nozzle excitation frequency.

Operation management 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Ready　　　]

Ink operating time

Ink alarm time

Cumulative op. time

Print count

Ink, makeup JP-K69, TH-TYPE A

Ink viscosity 100 (standard value:100)

Ink pressure 0．250 (MPa; standard value: 0．250)

Ambient temperature 20 (℃; range: 0～45)

Deflection voltage 5. 7 (kV)

Excitation V-ref. 11 (0～19)

Excitation frequency 68. 9 (kHz)

００００

１２００

０００００００００

００００００

(hours)

(hours; standard value: 1200)

(hours)

(prints)

MManual

HOME

Shutdown

● Displays the operational status of the IJ printer.● Saves the Ink operating time and Print count once an hour (1 minute each hour). When there was a power failure, returns to the previously saved state.● The following items are also displayed in the Print description screen (initial menu). (Items displayed in Print description screen: Ink operating time, Cumulative op. time, Print count, Ink pressure.)

(2) Operation

Press Operation management in the Maintenance menu.1

5-4 ●Print without any sensor signal. (Test print, Start printing)

Test print 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Ready　　　]

Start printing

Printing starts at the press of [Start printing].

5.3 Print without any sensor signal (Test print, Start printing) (1) Functions

●This function prints by button operation without a print start signal being input.●Print can also be performed by pressing Start printing from the manual control menu when in print ready

status.

(2) Operation

Verify that the printer is in “Standby” state.Press Test print in the Maintenance menu.

Press Start printing .

Printing starts.

(Note) Prints repeatedly when the Repeat sensor mode of the User environment setup screen is “OFF-ON transition” and repeat print is set. To stop during repeat printing, press the Stop .

Start printing

5.4 Confirm the registered software (1) Functions

●Confirm the registered software 5-5

View software version 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Ready　　　]

Basic software

Controller software

Print controller software M

Print controller software S

English

０１．０００１．０００１．０００１．０００１．００

Software name Version MManual

HOME

Shutdown

●Displays the name and version of the registered software.

(2) Operation

Press View software version in the Maintenance menu.1

5-6 ●Checking the functions which can be performed

5.5 Checking the functions that can be performed (1) Functions

●Checks if each function is accessible or protected.●When protected, the administrator sets protection using the login function beforehand.●For protected functions, the corresponding operation buttons are not displayed or the corresponding screens cannot be entered.●If executable functions are restricted, the names of the corresponding screens will be shaded.

Protected functionsItem Protected function name

Edit message

●Edit message●Calendar conditions●Substitution rules setting●Count conditions

Select message ●Select message

Save message ●Save message

Print specifications●Print specifications●Various print setup●Adjust print parameters

Print format●Print format●Adjust inter-character space

Maintenance

[Auxiliary functions]●Manage messages/group ●Create user pattern●Calibrate touch screen coordinates●Copy data (IJP→USB)●Copy data (USB→IJP)●Edit standard pattern●Edit substitution rules●Select languages

[Environment setup]●User environment setup●Date/time setup●Communication environment setup●Touch screen setup

[Maintenance work]●Operation management●Excitation V update●Circulation control●Solenoid valve/pump test

Password setup ●Password setup

●Checking the functions which can be performed 5-7

Password protection 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Edit message

Select message

Save message

Print specifications

Print format

Maintenance

Password setup

Back

access protect

MManual Startup

HOME

(2) Operation

Press Password protection in the maintenance menu.

The Password protection screen is displayed.

The yellow items are the setting contents.

6-1 ●Environment setup

Environment setup menu 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Stop 　　　]

User environmentsetup

Date/time setupCommunication

environment setup

Touch screen

setupLogin management

MManual Startup

HOME

6. ENVIRONMENT SETUP

Item Contents Reference

User environment setup ●Sets the print values. 6.1

Date/time setup●Sets the current time, calendar time and other time information.

6.2

Communication environment setup

●Sets the serial communication values between external device and IJ printer.

Technical Manual5.2

Touch screen setup ●Sets the touch screen values. 6.3

6.4, 6.5

(2) Operation

Press Environment setup menu in the Print description screen.The Environment setup menu screen is displayed

(1) Functions

6.1 Set the user environment(1) Functions

●Set the user environment 6-2

Character orientation by “Change Character Orientation” and “Change mode” combination

Change Character Orientation

Change modeCharacter orientation

Reciprocative printing signal : OFF

Reciprocative printing signal : ON

Reverse direction printing

OFF = forward0:ABC(→) 1:ABC(←)

3: (→) 2: (←)

OFF = reverse1:ABC(←) 0:ABC(→)

2: (←) 3: (→)

Normal or inverted

OFF=normal0:ABC(→) 2: (←)

3: (→) 1:ABC(←)

OFF=Inverted2: (←) 0:ABC(→)

1:ABC(←) 3: (→)

Character orientation0 or 3

OFF=normal and forward

0:ABC(→) 3: (→)

1:ABC(←) 2: (←)

OFF=inverted and reverse

3: (→) 0:ABC(→)

2: (←) 1:ABC(←)

ABCABC

ABC ABC

ABC

●Sets the user environment values.

signal ON While print target detect sensor signal is ON.OFF-ON transition When print target detect sensor signal is turned ON once

Repeat print sensor mode●Sets the conditions that print the specified number of times at the specified interval.

●Disabled when Repeat count is “0”.

Change Character orientation (switching signal mode) (Optional on RX2-B) ●Sets the forward and reverse character orientation method when performing reverse direction printing.●The “Change mode” selection menu is different depending on the “Change Character Orientation” set value.

(Example) Assume that the Change Character Orientation is “Reverse direction printing”.●If Change mode is “OFF = forward ”

When the reciprocative printing signal is OFF, prints in the forward direction and when the signal is ON, prints in the reverse direction.

●If Change mode is “OFF = reverse”When the reciprocative printing signal is OFF, prints in the reverse direction and when the signal is ON, prints in the forward direction.

For more detail, see “(3)change character orientation (change mode) supplement”.

●When the Various print setup item “DIN print” is set to “Enable”, reciprocative print signal is not received.

6-3 ●Set the user environment

(Example) Results when print contents of

[1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0] [ABC]

are printed in character orientation 1.

print.complete Output for a fixed time after printing is complete.print.-in-progress Output while the IJ printer is printing.

right-justified1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A BC

left-justified1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

ABC

●Columns with items with double width size 5 to 9 set are always printed right-justified.●This setting functions the same as reciprocating printing reverse direction printing●Format setup is free layout, it is printed as set the print items.

Print signal type (Optional on RX2-B)●Sets whether the IJ printer print output signal is made print.complete or print.-in-progress.

Print Data Changeover In Progress error●Sets whether to issue an error or not at print timing while Print data changeover is in progress.●Error is not issued when set value is «Disabled», setup of Print data recall or Character input are modified and overlaps print timing.●If the print target sensor data is input before the print data changeover in communication is complete,

and error is not issued and the data prints before the changeover.

right-justifiedAligns the print position along the right margin when printing line 2 and subsequent lines. (The print position is different for character orientation settings 0 and 2.)

left-justifiedAligns the print position along the left margin when printing line 2 and subsequent lines (The print position is the same for character orientation settings 0 and 2.)

3 Reverse print●Set for the print position at character orientation 1 and 3 setting.

Specification of Print Data Changeover In Progress error

FunctionSet value of Print Data Changeover In Progress

Disabled EnabledPrint format, Character input(*1), Calendar condition, Print specification(*2), Print data recall

No error and changeoverFault” Print Data

Changeover In Progress”

Count condition, Character input (Character data in count block)

Fault” Invalid Count Data Change Timing”

Adjust print parameters, Save message, Count reset, Operation management, Date/time setup(Current time)

No error and changeover

User environment setup, Date/time setup (except current time), Communication environment setup, Excitation V update, Print specification(Speed compensation, Speed compensation fine control)

Fault ”Invalid Data Change Timing”

●When in Ready status, user pattern can not be saved to existing pattern number.●When in Ready status, the edit standard pattern function can not be run.

(*1) Except character data in count block.(*2) Except Speed compensation and Speed compensation fine control.

●Set the user environment 6-4

Excitation V-ref. warning●When the current ambient temperature and the standard ambient temperature (ambient temperature

when Excitation V-ref. value was updated) exceeds a certain level, the alarm “Excitation V-ref. Review” occurs.

This setting enables/disables that function.●Setup of enable/disable differs depending on the ink type.

Print characters one by one●Prints only 1 character for each print target detection input.●Prints one character at a time from the head of the print contents and returns to the head when the end is

reached.(Printing example) Print contents [ABCDEFGH], Character orientation 0 Print target detection ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ Print A B C G H A B●Shows the conditions which enable the 1 character print function. When the conditions are not satisfied, all the set print contents are printed by print material sensor input.

1 character print conditions (All the conditions must be satisfied.)

No. Condition1 The setting item “Print characters one by one” shall be set to “Enable”.2 All print items are 1 line setting.3 The character size of all the print items is the same.4 No count item.5 No bar code item.6 Bold 1 to 4 is set.7 Format setup is not free layout.

●When printing midway through the print contents, when any of the following occurred, printing is repeated from the first character of the print contents.

Conditions which return the character to be printed to the start character

No. Condition1 When the state changed (Standby→Ready, Ready→Fault, etc.)2 When message was selected3 When the message was changed and Apply was pressed

4When print data was updated by external communications, external signal, reciprocative printing signal, etc.

●The calendar is not updated between printing of the first to last characters of the print contents. Printing is done with the date and time of the printing of the first character.

Char. Size menu●Sets the size of the characters used.●The following can be set:

Char. Size menu 1 5×8, 5x7Char. Size menu 2 9×8, 9×7

6-5 ●Set the user environment

User environment setup 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Stop 　　　]

Repeat print sensor mode

Change Character orientation

Change mode

Reverse print

Print signal type

Print data changeover error

Char. Size menu 1

Char. Size menu 2

Excitation V-ref. warning

Reverse direction printing

OFF-ON transitionsignal ON

left-justifiedright-justified

5×75×8

9×79×8

print. -in-progressprint. complete

OFF=forward (ABC)

MManual Startup

HOME

EnableDisable

Disable Enable

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

User environment setup 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Stop 　　　]

Print characters one by oneMManual Startup

HOME

EnableDisable

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

(2nd screen)

(2) Operation

Press User environment setup in the environment setup menu.1

Change modeCharacter orientation

Reciprocative printing signal

OFF ON

OFF = forward

0:ABC(→)

1:ABC(←)

2: (←)

3: (→)

OFF=reverse

0:ABC(→)

1:ABC(←)

2: (←)

3: (→)

(3) Change character orientation (Change mode) supplement●The character orientation at reciprocative printing signal input is different depending on the “Change

Character orientation” and “Change mode” set values. See the table below.

ABC

Reciprocative printing signal and character orientation (When “Change Character orientation” = “Reverse direction printing”)

Order of printing

●Set the user environment 6-6

Change modeCharacter orientation

Reciprocative printing signal

OFF ON

OFF=normal and forward

0:ABC(→)

3: (→)

2: (←)

1:ABC(←)

OFF=inverted and reverse

0:ABC(→)

3: (→)

2: (←)

1:ABC(←)

Change modeCharacter orientation

Reciprocative printing signal

OFF ON

OFF=normal

0:ABC(→)

2: (←)

1:ABC(←)

3: (→)

OFF=inverted

0:ABC(→)

2: (←)

1:ABC(←)

3: (→)

ABC

Reciprocative printing signal and Character orientation(When “Change Character Orientation” = “Normal and inverted“)

Reciprocative printing signal and Character orientation(When “Change Character Orientation” = “Character orientation 0 or 3“)

Order of printing

6-7 ●Set the user environment

Change Character Orientation : “Character orientation 0 or 3”Change mode : “OFF = normal and forward”

(Example) Examples of printing “ABC” onto trapezoidal print material

Change Character Orientation : “Reverse direction printing”Change mode : “OFF = forward”

Change Character Orientation : “Normal or inverted”Change mode : “OFF = normal”

●Operation examples

A B C

order of printing

Direction of transport

Reciprocativeprinting signal : OFF

Reciprocativeprinting signal : ON

Reciprocativeprinting signal : OFF

order of printing

A B C

Direction of transport

Reciprocativeprinting signal : OFF

Reciprocativeprinting signal : ON

Reciprocativeprinting signal : OFF

A B C

order of printingorder of printing order of printing

Reciprocativeprinting signal : OFF

Reciprocativeprinting signal : ON

Reciprocativeprinting signal : OFF

Direction of transport

Reciprocativeprinting signal : OFF

Reciprocativeprinting signal : ON

Reciprocativeprinting signal : OFF

●Sets the date and time 6-8

6.2 Set the date and time (1) Functions

●Sets the date and time values.

Setting item Contents Default

Current time ●Changes the current time (clock function). —

Calendar time control

●Sets whether the calendar time is the same as the current time or is stopped.

same as current time

Calendar time

●Sets the calendar time●Calendar character will be printed based on “calendar time”.●This can be set only when Calendar time control is “clock stop”.

—

Clock system

●Sets 24-hour clock or 12-hour clock.

24-hour clock

same as current time

●Makes the time of “Clock” displayed at the upper right-hand corner of the screen the calendar time.

clock stop

●Makes an arbitrarily set time the calendar time.●The “Clock” (current time) at the upper right-hand corner of the screen is not stopped.●A time ahead of the current time cannot be set.

24-hour clock 00:00 to 23:59.

12-hour clockA.M. 00:00 to 11:59P.M. 00:00 to 11:59

(Note) When setting the substitution rules to year, select “clock stop” and do not set the past year instead of the current year. When set, a space is substituted for year.

6-9 ●Sets the date and time

Date/time setup 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　]

Current time

Calendar time control

Calendar time

Clock system

clock stop

24-hour clock

０７

same as current time

２０１５

２０１５(year)　０７(month)　０７(day)

　　１２(hour)　４５(minute)　４５(second)

(year)

０７(month) (day)

１２４５４５(hour) (minute) (second)

12-hour clock

●Press OK to apply the date/time setup.

●The current time affects the clock display only

when changes are made.

●Calendar character will be printed based on «calendar time».

Cancel

MManual Startup

Apply HOME

(2) Operation

Press Date/time setup in the environment setup menu.1

6.3 Set up the touch screen (1) Functions

●Sets the touch screen environment values.

●Set up the touch screen 6-10

Setting item Contents Default

Display

●Specifies the time the touch screen is turned on.

[Note] When turn on in 30 minutes and continuous on were set, the brightness will decrease as the on time accumulates.

OFF in 3 min.

Keyboard layout

●Changes the keyboard layout.

ABC

Icon display ●For some buttons, icon display or icon hide is set. Enable

Clock display format

●Selects the date format of the clock (current time) displayed at the upper right-hand corner of the screen.●This can be set only when Calendar time control is “clock stop”.

YYYY. MM. DD

Confirmation window for Manual Control Menu

●When the Startup and Shutdown button or a button in the Manual Control menu was pressed, confirmation message display or nondisplay is set. However, a confirmation message is never displayed even

if the Start Printing button in the Manual Control menu is pressed.

Display

Arabic input method●Sets the direction of cursor movement when in Arabic

input mode.To the left

Startup Shutdown

MManual

OFF in 3 min.Touch screen is turned off if there is no panel input within 3 minutes.

OFF in 30 min.Touch screen is turned off if there is no panel input within 30 minutes.

Always on Always on

ABC ABC layoutQWERTY Layout generally used with PC, etc.

YYYY. MM. DD Display in year.month.day orderDD. MM. YYYY Display in day.month.year orderMM. DD. YYYY Display in month.day.year order

Display Displays a confirmation window.

Non displayDoes not display a confirmation window.

A B C D E F G H I J

K L M N O P Q R S T

U V W X Y Z

ABC layout

Q W E R T Y U I O P

A S D F G H J K L

Z X C V B N M

QWERTY layout

6-11 ●Set up the touch screen

Touch screen setup 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　]

Display

Keyboard layout

ICON Display

Clock display format

Confirmation window for Manual Control Menu

Arabic input method

OFF in 3 min.

ABC QWERTY

YYYY.MM.DD

Non displayDisplay

Back

Disable Enable

to the rightto the left

(2) Operation

Press Touch screen setup in the environment setup menu.1

●Changing the user 6-12

Back

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

MManual Startup

HOME

User conditionssetup

Create new User ID

Using environmentsetup

Select login user 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Admin User2 User3

User4 User5 User6

User7 User8 User9

Current user ID : User9

6.4 Changing the user(1) Functions

●Logs in again as a different user from currently logged in user.●When logging in, selects the user and inputs the password.●The administrator defines the user name and password and password protection setting in advance. The password protection setting can be changed for each user beforehand. See the Technical Manual.●When the administrator sets the login procedure necessary at power-on, the login user is selected at power-on.●The login history for the last 30 times is displayed on the login history screen.

(2) Operation

Press Login management in the environment setup menu.

The Login management menu is displayed.

Press Select login user .

The Select login user screen is displayed.

Displays the history of logged in users.

Select login user

Sets the password.However, it is not displayed when authorization is not given from the administrator.

The user ID currently logged in is displayed.

The saved user name is displayed.

Conditions setup

New user ID create Environment setup

6-13 ●Changing the user

Select login user 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Admin User3

User4 User5 User6

User7 User8 User9

← 　Cancel

EntEnter

→

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ 123

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Delete

Change Change

ABC

User2

Current user ID : User9

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

No2019181716

2015/07/07 12:402015/07/07 08:152015/07/06 09:102015/07/05 10:052015/07/04 08:15

User2User9User2AdminUser9

29219

User nameDate / time

Back

：： Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

MManual Startup

HOME

EntEnter

Press user name User2 .

A password input window opens.

Enter the password of user name “User2”, and press Enter .

Logs in again using user name “User2” and the touch screen returns to the Login management menu.

Press Login history in the Login management menu.

A history of logged in users is displayed.

Inputs the password of user name «User2».

Enter

ID No. User name

Can be sorted in ascending or descending order.

●Setting password for each user 6-14

Password setup 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Old password

New password

New password reentry

Cancel

MManual Startup

HOME

6.5 Setting password for each user(1) Functions

●User sets their own password.●However, when the user was defined by the administrator, and the password setting is protected, the password

change screen is not displayed.●A password must be entered when logging in.●Make the password 12 characters or less.

(2) Operation

Back

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

MManual Startup

HOME

User conditionssetup

Create new User ID

Using environmentsetup

Press Login management in the environment setup menu.

The Login management menu is displayed.

Press Password setup .

The Password setup screen is displayed.

Enter “Old password”, “New password”, and “New password reentry”.3

Press OK .4

Displays the history of logged in users.

Select login user

Sets the password.However, it is not displayed when authorization is not given from the administrator.

Input the old password.Not displayed when the password is not set.

Input the new password.

7-1 ●Auxiliary functions

Aux. function menu 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Manage messages /

Group

Create user

pattern

Calibrate touch

screen coordinates

Copy data

（ＩＪＰ　→　ＵＳＢ）

Copy data

（ＵＳＢ　→　ＩＪＰ）

Edit Standard

pattern

Edit substitution

ruleSelect Languages

MManual Startup

HOME

7 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

Item Contents Reference

Manage messages●Performs message name change, deletion, save number

change, and group change of saved messages.7.1

Manage group ●Performs group name change, group deletion and group

number change of group which classifies and manages mes-sages.

7.2

Create user pattern ●Creates and edits user patterns (saved characters). 7.3

Calibrate touch screen coordinates

●Corrects touch screen and screen coordinate position offset. 7.4

Copy data (IJP→USB) ●Backs up message and user pattern to USB. 7.5

Copy data (USB→IJP) ●Copies backed up data to IJ printer. 7.5

Edit standard pattern ●Edits standard patterns. 7.6

Edit substitution rules ●Edits calendar substitution rules. 7.7

Selecting languages ●Changes the display language. 7.8

(2) Operation

Press Auxiliary function in the Print description screen.The Auxiliary function menu screen is displayed

(1) Functions

●Manage messages 7-2

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Change mes-sage name

Delete Sto-red message

Change mes-sage number

Change group Manage group

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No.　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

No△ Message name No△ Message name

Select page1/1

Dis-playAll

De-tails

Back

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

MManual Startup

HOME

7.1 Manage messages7.1.1 Managing stored messages(1) Functions

(2) Operation

Press Manage messages / Group in the auxiliary functions menu.The Manage messages screen is displayed.

2 Switch the selection method of the objective message.

3 After selecting the message name of the objective message, press

Change message name , Delete Stored message , Change message number , or

Change group .

The screen of each function is displayed.

Group Sort Switches the message selection method.

Search conditions Select page

Display All

Details , Simple list

Manage groupMessage management functions

input

Message management functionsItem Contents Reference

Change message name ●Changes the message name of stored messages. 7.1.2

Delete Stored message ●Deletes stored messages. 7.1.3

Change message number ●Changes the stored number of stored messages. 7.1.4

Change group ●Changes the group of stored messages. 7.1.5

Message selection methodsItem Contents

Normal ●One message can be selected.

Multiple ●Multiple messages can be selected.

Area●Two items in the message name list can be specified and the messages

within that area can be selected.

●For “Multiple” and “Area”, the Change message name and Change message number functions cannot be started.

●Do not turn off the printer during the Message management procedure.

7-3 ●Manage messages

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Delete Sto-red message

Change group Manage group

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No.　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

No△ Message name No△ Message name

Select page1/1

De-tails

Back

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４

Nor-mal AreaMulti

ple

MManual Startup

HOME

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No.　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

No△ Message name No△ Message name

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４

Nor-mal

Multiple Area

Delete Sto-red message

Change group Manage group

Select page1/1

De-tails

Back

MManual Startup

HOME

Normal See the previous item for a screen example.

Multiple

Area

(3) Message selection method

Multiple

The message of an arbitrary position can be selected.

The Delete Stored message and Change group functions can be started.

Area

The beginning and end can be specified and the messages in that area can be selected.

●Manage messages 7-4

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No. 　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

No△ Message name No△ Message name

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

Change mes-sage name

Delete Sto-red message

Change mes-sage number

Change group Manage group

Select page1/1

Dis-playAll

De-tails

Back

MManual Startup

HOME

Change message name 2015.07.07 12:45

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Current message name

New message name

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１

Cancel

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１

MManual Startup

HOME

EntEnter

7.1.2 Changing the message name(1) Functions

●Changes the message name of a saved message.

(2) OperationThe Manage messages screen is displayed.

1 Set Normal selection mode and select the message.

2 Press Change message name .The Change message name screen is displayed.

3 Press New message name .A keyboard is displayed.

4 Input the new message name and press Enter .

5 Press OK .The message name is changed.

Normal

Change message name

New message name

7-5 ●Manage messages

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No. 　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

No△ Message name No△ Message name

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

Change mes-sage name

Delete Sto-red message

Change mes-sage number

Change group Manage group

Select page1/1

Dis-playALL

De-tails

Back

MManual Startup

HOME

＝＝＝＝＝ Delete Stored Message Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

Print data «ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１　　　 » will be deleted.

OK Cancel

7.1.3 Deleting stored messages(1) Functions

●Deletes stored messages.

(2) OperationThe Manage messages screen is displayed.

1 Select the message.

2 Press Delete Stored message .A Delete Saved Message Confirmation message is displayed.

3 Press OK .The message is deleted.

Switches the message selection method.

Delete Stored message

●Manage messages 7-6

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No. 　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

No△ Message name No△ Message name

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

Change mes-sage name

Delete Sto-red message

Change mes-sage number

Change group Manage group

Select page1/1

Dis-playAll

De-tails

Back

MManual Startup

HOME

7.1.4 Changing message number(1) Functions

●Changes the stored number of a stored message.●Specifies two messages and exchanges stored numbers.● Group number is assigned to a message name.

(2) OperationThe Manage messages screen is displayed.

1 Set Normal selection mode and select the message name.

Normal

Change message number

Selects the messagewhose saved number is to be changed.

7-7 ●Manage messages

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No.　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

[　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Select the move destination

Search condition

No△ Message name No△ Message name

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４

Nor-mal

Select page1/1

Freenumber

De-tails

MManual Startup

HOME

Change mes-sage number

Cancel

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Change mes-sage number

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No. 　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Select the move destination.

Search condition

No Message name No Message name

Select page1/100

Freenumber

De-tails

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４５６７８９１０

１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０

Nor-mal

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

Select the first message and press Change message number .The screen that selects the 2nd message is displayed.At this time, all the messages are displayed.

To select a number without a message saved, press Free number .All the numbers are displayed.

Free number

1st message

Selects the 2nd message.

●Manage messages 7-8

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No.　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

[　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Tow message number will be swapped.

Search condition

No△ Message name No△ Message name

Select page1/1

Freenumber

De-tails

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４

Nor-mal

Change mes-sage number

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No. 　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

No△ Message name No△ Message name

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

Change mes-sage name

Delete Sto-red message

Change mes-sage number

Change group Manage group

Select page1/1

Dis-playAll

De-tails

Back

MManual Startup

HOME

Select the 2nd message.

4 Press OK .The message stored number is changed.

1st message

2nd message

7-9 ●Manage messages

Manage messages 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

Group No. 　　　　　　Group name　[　　　　　　　　　　　　　]

　　　　　　　　　　 [　　　　　　　　　　　　]　　　　　　　

Search condition

No△ Message name No△ Message name

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４

１２３４

Change mes-sage name

Delete Sto-red message

Change mes-sage number

Change group Manage group

Select page1/1

Dis-playAll

De-tails

Back

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

MManual Startup

HOME

Group Group name

undefinedＧＲＯＵＰ００１ＧＲＯＵＰ００２ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ＧＲＯＵＰ００４ＧＲＯＵＰ００５ＧＲＯＵＰ００６ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ＧＲＯＵＰ００８ＧＲＯＵＰ００９

０１２３４５６７８９

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Cancel

7.1.5 Changing the group to which a message belongs(1) Functions

●Changes the group to which a stored message belongs.

(2) OperationThe Manage messages screen is displayed.

1 Select the message.

2 Press Change group .A group list window opens.

3 Specify the group.The specified group is displayed in yellow.

4 Press OK .The group is changed.

Switches the message selection method.

Change group

Group after change

Group before changeOK

●Manage group 7-10

Manage group 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Change/create

group nameDelete group

Changegroup number

Managemessages

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

No Group name No Group name

Select page1/5

Back

ＧＲＯＵＰ００１ＧＲＯＵＰ００２ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ＧＲＯＵＰ００４ＧＲＯＵＰ００５ＧＲＯＵＰ００６ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ＧＲＯＵＰ００８ＧＲＯＵＰ００９ＧＲＯＵＰ０１０

１２３４５６７８９１０

ＧＲＯＵＰ０１１ＧＲＯＵＰ０１２ＧＲＯＵＰ０１３ＧＲＯＵＰ０１４ＧＲＯＵＰ０１５ＧＲＯＵＰ０１６ＧＲＯＵＰ０１７ＧＲＯＵＰ０１８ＧＲＯＵＰ０１９ＧＲＯＵＰ０２０

１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

MManual Startup

HOME

(2) Operation1

7.2 Manage group7.2.1 Manage group(1) Functions

Message management functionsItem Contents Reference

Change/create group name●Changes a group name.●Inputs a new group name.

7.2.2

Delete group ●Deletes a group and the messages belonging to that group. 7.2.3

Change group number●Changes the group number.●At messages belonging to that group, the group number is changed and the group name is not changed

7.2.4

Group selection methodsItem Contents

Normal ●One group can be selected.

Multiple ●Multiple groups can be selected.

Area●Two items of the group list can be specified and the groups within that area

can be selected.

● For “Multiple” and “Area”, the Change/create group name and Change group number functions cannot be started.

1 Press Manage group in the Manage messages screen.The Manage group screen is displayed.

2 Switch the selection method of the objective group.

3 After selecting the objective group, press Change/create group name ,

Delete group , or Change group number .

The screen of each function is displayed.

Switches the message selection method.

Select page

Manage messagesEach function of group management

7-11 ●Manage group

Manage group 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

No Group name No Group name

１２３４５６７８９１０

１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

Change/create

group nameDelete group

Changegroup number

Managemessages

Select page1/5

Back

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

MManual Startup

HOME

Manage group 2015.07.07 12:45

Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Current group name

New group name

ＧＲＯＵＰ００１

ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１

Cancel

ＧＲＯＵＰ００１

MManual Startup

HOME

EntEnter

7.2.2 Change group name(1) Functions

●Changes a group name.●Inputs a new group name.

(2) OperationThe Manage group screen is displayed.

1 Set the Normal selection mode and select the group.

2 Press Change/create group name .Change group name screen is displayed.

3 Press New group name .A keyboard is displayed.

4 Input the new group name and press Enter .A keyboard is displayed.

5 Press OK .The group name is changed.

Normal

Change/create group name

New group name

●Manage group 7-12

Manage group 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

No Group name No Group name

１２３４５６７８９１０

１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０

Change/create

group nameDelete group

Changegroup number

Managemessages

Select page1/5

Back

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

MManual Startup

HOME

＝＝＝＝＝　　 Delete Stored Group Confirmation 　＝＝＝＝＝

Group «ＧＲＯＵＰ００１　　　 » will be deleted. Also, all messages that belong to the group will be deleted.

O K Cancel

7.2.3 Delete a stored group(1) Functions

●Deletes a group and the messages belonging to that group.

(2) OperationThe Manage group screen is displayed.

1 Select a group.

2 Press Delete group .A Delete Stored Group Confirmation message is displayed.

3 Press OK .The group and the messages belonging to that group are deleted.

Switches the message selection method.

Delete group

7-13 ●Manage group

Manage group 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

No Group name No Group name

１２３４５６７８９１０

１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

Change/create

group nameDelete group

Changegroup number

Managemessages

Select page1/5

Back

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

MManual Startup

HOME

Manage group 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

No Group name No Group name

Select page1/5

１２３４５６７８９１０

１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０

Nor-mal

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Select the move destination.

Changegroup number

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

7.2.4 Change group number(1) Functions

●Changes a group number.●Specifies 2 groups and exchanges the group numbers.●At the messages belonging to that group, the group number is changed and the group name is not changed.

(2) OperationThe Manage group screen is displayed.

1 Set Normal selection mode and select a group.

2 Select the 1st group and press Change group number .The screen that selects the 2nd group is displayed.

Normal

Change group number

Selects the group whose saved number is to be changed.

1st group

Selects the 2nd group.

●Manage group 7-14

Manage group 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

No Group name No Group name

Select page1/5

１２３４５６７８９１０

１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０

Nor-mal

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Two group numbers will be swapped.

OKChangegroup number

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

Manage group 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

No Group name No Group name

ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ＧＲＯＵＰ００２ＧＲＯＵＰ００１ＧＲＯＵＰ００４ＧＲＯＵＰ００５ＧＲＯＵＰ００６ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ＧＲＯＵＰ００８ＧＲＯＵＰ００９ＧＲＯＵＰ０１０

１２３４５６７８９１０

１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０

Change/create

group nameDelete group

Changegroup number

Managemessages

Select page1/5

Back

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Multiple AreaNor-

mal

MManual Startup

HOME

Select the 2nd group.

4 Press OK .The saved number of the group is changed.

1st group

2nd group.

7-15 ●Creating a user pattern

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Horizontal dot

Dot matrix

Inter-char. space

Fixed Free

5×8

Create/Edit

Back

Select Save

MManual Startup

HOME

(2) Operation

7.3 Creating a user pattern7.3.1 Creating and saving user pattern(1) Functions●Creates a user pattern.●Fixed size decides the horizontal dots and vertical dots according to the dot matrix.●Free size allows creation of an arbitrarily sized pattern within horizontal 320 dots x vertical 32 dots.●Shows the number of characters which can be created.

RX2-B RX2-S

Fixed size 50 messages (each dot matrix) 200 messages (each dot matrix)

Free size — 50 messages

1 Press Create user pattern in the auxiliary functions menu.The Create user pattern screen is displayed.

The 2 red frames display the same area.

Dot pattern creation area

Dot matrix

Inter-char. space

●Creating a user pattern 7-16

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Horizontal dot

Dot matrix

Inter-char. space

Fixed Free

12×16

Create/Edit

Back

Select Save

MManual Startup

HOME

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Pattern size

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Cursorposition

　Hor. ［ 1］

　Vert.［ 1］

Zoom

×1

Clear

Back

Select Save

Dupli-cate

Paste MoveCleararea Invert

Rec-tangle

Rec-tanglefill

〈《》〉

▲

△

▼

▽

MManual Startup

HOME

Set the dot matrix and inter-character space.

3 Press Create/Edit .The Create/Edit screen is displayed.

Create/Edit

Changes the display magnification (X1, X2, X4).

7-17 ●Creating a user pattern

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[ 　 ]

Pattern size

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Cursorposition

　Hor. ［ 1］

　Vert.［ 1］

Zoom

×2

Clear

Back

Select Save

Dupli-cate

Paste MoveCleararea Invert

Rec-tangle

Rec-tanglefill

〈《》〉

▲

△

▼

▽

MManual Startup

HOME

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[ ]

Pattern size

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Cursorposition

　Hor. ［ 8］

　Vert.［ 3］

Zoom

×2

Clear

Back

Select Save

Dupli-cate

Paste MoveCleararea Invert

Rec-tangle

Rec-tanglefill

〈《》〉

▲

△

▼

▽

MManual Startup

HOME

Set Zoom and change the display magnification of the dot pattern creation area.The display magnification of the dot pattern creation area changes.

5 Create a pattern at the dot pattern creation area. When touched directly, the dot shading is reversed.

Scroll up8 dots1 dot

Scroll down1 dot8 dots

Clears the pattern dots

Save

When a dot was reversed by touching it directly, make the display magnification quadruple.

Scroll rigth> 1 dot>> 8 dots

Draws a graphic. (See 7.3.3.)

Scroll left<< 8 dots < 1 dot

Dot shading of touched position is reversed.

●Creating a user pattern 7-18

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[ 　 ]

Dot matrix 　　　12×16

Stored destinationpattern [000]

OKChange Change

Logo★◎　‥

Page count1 / 6

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

－

Press Save .The save screen is displayed.

7 Press OK .The pattern is saved.

When the save destination is specified the saved destination code and pattern are displayed.

Touch the position on the keyboard to be saved.

Press to display the next screen.

7-19 ●Creating a user pattern

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Pattern size

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Cursorposition

　Hor. ［ 1］

　Vert.［ 1］

Zoom

×1

〈《》〉

▲

△

▼

▽

Clear

Back

Select Save

Dupli-cate

Paste MoveCleararea Invert

Rec-tangle

Rec-tanglefill

MManual Startup

HOME

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Dot matrix 　　　12×16

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

Change Change

ABC…

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

7.3.2 Selecting a user pattern(1) Functions

●Selects a saved user pattern at the “Create user pattern” screen.

(2) OperationThe Create user pattern screen or Create/edit screen is displayed.

1 Press Select .The select screen is displayed.

2 Select the character from user pattern, letters, numbers, and symbols, and press OK .

The pattern is selected.

Select

Selects the character to be selected.

Selects the kind of character.

●Creating a user pattern 7-20

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]　

Pattern size

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Cursorposition

　Hor. ［ 1］

　Vert.［ 1］

Zoom

×2

〈《》〉

▲

△

▼

▽

Decide the position and press [Start].

Dupli-cate

Paste MoveCleararea Invert

Rec-tangle

Rec-tanglefill

Start

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

7.3.3 Editing a pattern(1) Functions

Name Function

Duplicate, Paste ●Duplicates the pattern of the selected range and pastes it to an arbitrary position.

Move ●Moves the pattern of the selected range.

Clear area ●Clears the pattern of the selected area.

Invert ●Inverts the pattern of the selected area.

Rectangle ●Draws a rectangle at the selected position.

Rectangle fill ●Draws a rectangle at the selected positions and fills its interior.

Paste pattern(When editing free size)

●Duplicates the user pattern, pattern of alphabetic, numeric or symbol and pastes it to an arbitrary position.

(2) OperationThe Create/Edit screen is displayed.

1 Press Rectangle .The screen that selects the start point is displayed.

2 Touch the point from which drawing of the rectangle is to start.The X mark moves to the touched position.

3 Press Start .The start position is indicated by a red X.The screen that specifies the end point is displayed.

Rectangle Start

7-21 ●Creating a user pattern

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Pattern size

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Cursorposition

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Zoom

×2

〈《》〉

▲

△

▼

▽

After completing the check, press [Apply].

Dupli-cate

Paste MoveCleararea Invert

Rec-tangle

Rec-tanglefill

Apply

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Pattern size

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Cursorposition

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Zoom

×2

〈《》〉

▲

△

▼

▽

Decide the position and press [End].

Dupli-cate

Paste MoveCleararea Invert

Rec-tangle

Rec-tanglefill

End

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

Touch the point at which drawing of the rectangle is to end.The X mark moves to the touched position.

5 Press End .The Area of the rectangle with the start position and end position at opposing corners is displayed in red.The screen that selects the end point is displayed.

End position

Start position

End

Apply

●Creating a user pattern 7-22

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Pattern size

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Cursorposition

　Hor. ［ 16］

　Vert.［ 16］

Zoom

×2

〈《》〉

▲

△

▼

▽

Clear

Back

Select Save

Dupli-cate

Paste MoveCleararea Invert

Rec-tangle

Rec-tanglefill

MManual Startup

HOME

Press Apply .A rectangle pattern is drawn.

7-23 ●Creating a user pattern

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Horizontal dot

Vertical size 　　　　（1～32）

Horizontal size 　　　　（1～320）

FreeFixed

001

〈《》〉Create/Edit

Back

Select Save

MManual Startup

HOME

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Horizontal dot

Vertical size　　　　（1～32）

Horizontal size 　　　　（1～320）

FreeFixed

032

Create/Edit

Back

Select Save

〈《》〉

MManual Startup

HOME

7.3.4 Creating a user pattern of a free size(1) Functions

●Creates a user pattern of an arbitrary size.●The maximum size is horizontal 320 dots x vertical 32 dots.

(2) OperationThe Create user pattern screen is displayed.

1 Select Horizontal dot “Free”.A free size Create user pattern screen is displayed.

2 Input the vertical dot size and horizontal dot size.

3 Press Create/Edit .The Create/Edit screen is displayed.

The 2 red frames display the same area.

Vertical size

Horizontal size

Create/Edit

●Creating a user pattern 7-24

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Pattern size

　Hor. ［ 32］

　Vert.［ 16］

Cursorposition

　Hor. ［ 9］

　Vert.［ 12］

Zoom

×1

〈《》〉

▲

△

▼

▽

Clear

Back

Select Save

Dupli-cate

Paste MoveCleararea Invert

Rec-tangle

Rec-tanglefill

MManual Startup

HOME

Pat-ternpaste

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Dot matrix　Free

Stored destinationpattern [002]

OKChange Change

EBLogo

★◎　‥

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

－

Create a pattern at the dot pattern creation area. When touched directly, the dot is inverted.

5 Press Save .The save screen is displayed.

6 Press OK .The pattern is saved.

Scroll up8 dots1 dot

Scroll down1 dot8 dots

Clears the dots of the pattern.

Save

When a dot was reversed by touching it directly, make the display magnification quadruple.

Scroll rigth> 1 dot>> 8 dots

Draws a graphic. (See 7.3.3.)

Scroll left<< 8 dots < 1 dot

Inverts the dot of the touched position.

When the save destination is specified, the save destination code and pattern are displayed.

Touch the position on the keyboard to be saved.

Press to display the next screen.

7-25 ●Creating a user pattern

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Dot matrix 　　　5×8

Selectbitmap data

Q W E R T Y U I O P

A S D F G H J K L

Z X C V B N

Space

etc. ▽123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

Change Change

ABC…

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

7.3.5 Selecting a bitmap file(BMP)(1) Functions

●The bitmap file stored in the USB memory is called up as a user pattern.●This can be called up by the select bitmap data screen and pattern paste screen of the free size pattern being edited.●Use the following conditions to create the bitmap file.

●1 pixel in the bitmap corresponds to 1 dot in the user pattern.

(2) Operation

Conditions of bit map fileItem Essential conditionsSize Width 1-320 pixels x Height 1-32 pixels

Color Monochrome (Monochrome bitmap)File name ********.bmp (********must be within 8 digit alphanumeric or less)

1 Create a «BITMAP» folder directory under USB memory, then copy the bitmap file created earlier.

2 Insert the USB memory in the IJP.

3 Press Create user pattern and Select next in the auxiliary function menu.The select screen is displayed.

Select bitmap data

●Creating a user pattern 7-26

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0

MManual Startup

HOME

No File name１

２

３

４

５

６

７

８

９

１０

１１

１２

１３

１４

１５

B_FILE1

B_FILE2

B_FILE3

B_FILE4

B_FILE5

B_FILE6

B_FILE7

B_FILE8

B_FILE9

B_FILE10

B_FILE11

B_FILE12

B_FILE13

B_FILE14

B_FILE15

No File name１６

１７

１８

１９

２０

２１

２２

２３

２４

２５

２６

２７

２８

２９

３０

B_FILE16

B_FILE17

B_FILE18

B_FILE19

B_FILE20

Select bitmap data [Stop 　　　　　]

Cancel

Create user pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop 　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Dot matrix 　　　5×8

Selectbitmap data

Q W E R T Y U I O P

A S D F G H J K L

Z X C V B N

Space

etc. ▽123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

Change Change

ABC…

MManual Startup

HOME

Cancel

Press Select bitmap data .

Select a file from the list of bitmap file

5 Select any file name from the list of bitmap file on the screen. Press OK (Maximum of 30 file names is displayed).

The display returns to the Create user pattern screen.

6 Press OK on the select screen.The pattern is selected.

Bitmap image which has been selected as a pattern is displayed

7-27 ●Touch screen coordinate correction

Touch screen coord. 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Carefully touch the intersection of the crosshairs.

Cancel

＝＝＝＝＝ Touch Screen Coordinate Correction ＝＝＝＝＝　

Touch screen coordinate correction will be applied. To return to the previous setting, press [Cancel].

OK Cancel

7.4 Touch screen coordinate correction(1) Functions●Corrects touch screen and screen coordinate position offset.

(2) Operation

1 Press Calibrate touch screen coordinates in the auxiliary functions menu.The Touch screen coord. screen is displayed.

2 Press the + at the top left and bottom right of the screen until the Touch Screen Coordinate Correction message is displayed.

The Touch Screen Coordinate Correction message is displayed.

3 Press OK .The coordinates are corrected and the touch screen returns to the auxiliary functions menu.

●Backing up data to USB memory 7-28

Aux. function menu 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Manage messages /

Group

Create user

pattern

Calibrate touch

screen coordinates

Copy data

（ＩＪＰ　→　ＵＳＢ）

Copy data

（ＵＳＢ　→　ＩＪＰ）

Edit Standard

pattern

Edit substitution

ruleSelect Languages

MManual Startup

HOME

●One USB memory can backup the data of multiple IJ printers.●The same folder is created as the serial number in the USB memory.●When copying backed up data from the USB memory to the IJ printer, select the folder to be copied.●One USB memory can store the data for up to 100 IJ printers. However, the data size cannot exceed the capacity of the USB memory.●Use the auxiliary function menu to remove and insert the USB memory.●Do not often repeatedly remove and insert the USB memory.●When data copying standard patterns, start the copy data function in the stopped state.

7.5 Backing up data to USB memory(1) Functions●Backs up print data and user patterns to USB memory.●Backed up data can be copied to an IJ printer.●When copying to an IJ printer, the type of data can be selected.

Data type Contents

Print data●Includes the print description, print format, and print specifications set contents.●Saved print data is the backup target. Print target data is not a target.●When backing up print target data, save the data and back it up as saved print data.

Standard characters

●Includes all dot matrix standard character patterns.

User pattern ●Includes all dot matrix saved characters.

1 Insert the USB memory.

(2) Backup operationThe auxiliary function menu is displayed.

● Use a USB Memory with interface 2.0/1.1 and FAT16 or FAT32 file system.● When performing Backup operation (IJP→USB) and Data copy operation (USB→IJP), if «USB memory error»occurs or USB cannot be recognized, format the USB on a PC.

7-29 ●Backing up data to USB memory

Copy data ＩＪＰ→ＵＳＢ 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Data type

　Print data ０／　２０

　Standard pattern ０／　　１

　User pattern ０／　　１

　　　　　　　　　　　Proc. Status ０／　２２

Copying in progress.

Serial number　９９９９９９９９

Accessing to USB memory. Don’t remove USB memory.Abort

HOME

Press Copy data (IJP→USB) .The Backup screen is displayed and the data is written to USB memory.

After backup is complete, the screen returns to the auxiliary function menu.

3 Remove the USB memory.

Aux. function menu 2015.07.07 12:45

Back

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Manage messages /

Group

Create user

pattern

Calibrate touch

screen coordinates

Copy data

（ＩＪＰ　→　ＵＳＢ）

Copy data

（ＵＳＢ　→　ＩＪＰ）

Edit Standard

pattern

Edit substitution

ruleSelect Languages

MManual Startup

HOME

1 Insert the USB memory.

(3) Data copy operationThe auxiliary function menu is displayed.

Shows backup progress.

●Backing up data to USB memory 7-30

Copy data ＵＳＢ→ＩＪＰ 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Data type　　　　　　　　　 Copy data

　Print data

　Standard pattern

　User pattern

Select the copy target and then press <Start copy>.

Serial number　９９９９９９９９

Folder to be copied ９９９９９９９９

Enable

Disable

Start copy

Cancel

HOME

Proc. Status

Copy data ＵＳＢ→ＩＪＰ 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Copying in progress.

Serial number　９９９９９９９９

Folder to be copied ９９９９９９９９

Data type　　　　　　　　　 Copy data

　Print data ０／　２０

　Standard pattern ０／　１５

　User pattern ０／　　４

　　　　　　　　　　　Proc. Status ０／　３９

Enable

Disable

Disable HOME

Accessing to USB memory. Don’t remove USB memory.

Press Copy data (USB→IJP) .The copy data screen is displayed.

3 Select the folder (serial number) to be copied.

4 Select the type of data to be copied.

5 Press OK .A copying in progress screen is displayed.

6 Remove the USB memory.

After data copying is complete, the screen returns to the auxiliary function menu.

Selects the type of data to be copied.

Selects the folder to be copied.

Start copy

Shows the data copying progress.

7-31 ●Backing up data to USB memory

(4) Data copy operation from other models●Data created on KX, PX, PB, PXR or RX can be copied to RX2.

Following operations 1 through 3 must be conducted prior to using other model’s data on RX to store the backup data of other models in the USB memory via a PC.

Prior operation1. Create a «RXDAT» folder if it does not already exist in USB memory.2. Create a new folder with the name of the printer’s model name (KX, PX, PB or

PXR) under the «RXDAT» folder created in 1. above.3. KX Create a new folder and change its name to [8-digits serial number] under

«KX» folder created in 2. above.Create a «IJPDATA» folder under the folder saved as the [8-digits serial number] and copy every backup data file to «IJP DATA» folder.

PB Copy the backup serial number folder which is created on PB and rename it as [8-digits number] under the «PB» folder created in 2.

PX,PXR

Copy the backup serial number folder which is created on PX or PXR under the «PX» or «PXR» folder created in 2.

USB memory

RXDAT

00000000

IJPDATA

USB memory

RXDAT

00000001

USB memory

RXDAT

00000002

00000003

PXR

●Backing up data to USB memory 7-32

●Refer to «(3) Data copy operation» to copy data after data is stored in USB.

●The button is displayed in different colors by models when folder to be copied is selected.

Data to be copied Display color of the serial number

KX Blue

PX Light green

PB Magenta

PXR Orange

RX/RX2 Black

7-33 ●Editing standard pattern

Edit standard pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Pattern　　[　　]

Dot matrix 5×8

Back

Select

HOME

Edit standard pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Pattern　　[ E ]

Dot matrix 　　　5×8

Cancel

ＡＢＣＤＦＧＨＩＪ

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

Space

etc. ▽123‥Sign

Change Change

ABC…

Ｅ

HOME

7.6 Editing standard pattern(1) Functions●Edits the print pattern in dot units.●Punct. symbols are edited as patterns separate from full-width symbols.●Pattern editing operation is the same as the user pattern creation function.●Pattern-edited characters are displayed in blue on the keyboard.●Create patterns while printing with the user pattern creation function. After applying the pattern design, use

the edit standard character pattern function.●The original pattern before the change can be recovered.

(2) Operation

1 Press Edit standard pattern in the auxiliary function menu.The Edit standard pattern screen is displayed.

2 Press Select .The select screen is displayed.

3 Select characters to call.

Dot pattern creation area

Dot matrix Select

The 2 red frames display the same area.

Selects the type of character.

Selects the character to be selected.

●Editing standard pattern 7-34

Edit standard pattern 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Pattern　　[ E ]

Dot matrix 5×8

Back

Restore

Edit

Select Save

HOME

Press OK .The pattern is selected.

5 Create a pattern at the dot pattern creation area.When directly touched, the shading of the dot is reversed.When a dot was reversed by touching it directly, make the display magnification quadruple.

6 Press Save .The save message screen is displayed.

Restores the pattern before the change.

Save

Edit

7-35 ●Editing Substitution Rules

Edit substitution rule 2015.07.07 12:45

Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Changerule name

Message name [　　　　　　　　　　　]

ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００１ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００２ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００３ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００４ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００５ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００６ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００７ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００８ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００９ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１０ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１１ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１２

１２３４５６７８９１０１１１２

No△ Subst. rule name

ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１３ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１４ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１５ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１６ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１７ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１８ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１９ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０２０ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０２１ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０２２ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０２３ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０２４

１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０２１２２２３２４

No△ Subst. rule name

Cancel

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Select page1/5

MManual Startup

HOME

Edit substitution rule 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

No. [０１]　Subst. rule name [ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００１　　]　　 Digit

15[　　] 16[　　] 17[　　] 18[　　] 19[　　] 20[　　]21[　　] 22[　　] 23[　　] 24[　　] 25[　　] 26[　　]27[　　] 28[　　] 29[　　] 30[　　] 31[　　] 32[　　]33[　　] 34[　　] 35[　　] 36[　　] 37[　　] 38[　　]39[　　]

← →

↑

↓

Back spaceDelete

Duplicate

Back

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ

ＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴ

ＵＶＷＸＹＺ

123‥Sign

★◎　‥Logo

Change Change

ABC…

HourDayMonthDay ofweek

WeeknumberMinuteYear

Insert Over-write

Space

MManual Startup

etc. ▽

7.7 Editing Substitution Rules(1) Functions●Selects the substitution rule [Year], [Month], [Day], [Hour], [Minute], [Week number], and [Day of week]

and inputs and edits the selected substitution rule.●Inputs and changes the name of the selected substitution rules. See “4.10.3 Print by substituting a different character for the date (substitution rule)”.

(2) Operation

1 Press Edit substitution rule in the auxiliary function menu.The Edit substitution rule screen is displayed.

2 Select the substitution rule to be edited and press OK .The Edit substitution rule screen is displayed.

3 Select the kind [Year], [Month], [Day], [Hour], [Minute], [Week number], [Day of week] of substitution rule, and input and edit.

4 Press Back .The display returns to the substitution rule selection screen.

Sort

Prev.Dsp. ,

Next Dsp.

Select page

Selects the substitution rule to be edited.

Changes the substitution rule name.

Input digit

Duplicates the previous item.

number

Substitution rule No.

Selects the substitution rule [Year], [Month], [Day], [Hour], [Minute], [Week number], and [Day of week].

●Selecting Languages 7-36

Select language 2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　　　]

Current language English ０１．００

Registered language

Language1

Language2

Input mode

Back

German

English

Local LanguageDefault

０１．００

ＯＫ

7.8 Selecting Languages(1) Functions● You can change the screen language from English to another language.

(2) OperationThe Auxiliary function menu screen is displayed.

Input modeSet value Contents

Default ●You can input Accent marks, Greek, Russian and Arabic characters.

Local Language●You can input Chinese characters. (Language1 : English, Thai, Vietnamese only)

1 Press Select languages in the auxiliary functions menu.The Select language screen is displayed.

2 Select German ,and press OK .The display language is changed.

German

8-1 ●Ink and makeup replenishment

● When replenishing the ink and makeup, changing the ink, or performing other work in which the ink and makeup are handled, be sure not to spill the ink and makeup.

If the ink and makeup is accidentally spilled, quickly wipe it off with wiping paper, etc. Do not close the maintenance cover until you verify that the wiped parts are

completely dry. Since the ink and makeup vapor will collect inside the printer especially in the state in

which the ink and makeup was spilled inside the printer and was not wiped off completely, it will cause ignition and fire. When wiping is difficult in the energized state, perform shutdown processing with the

maintenance cover remaining open and turn off the power, then perform wiping again.

● If leaking of the ink and makeup inside the printer was detected during printer operation or maintenance, quickly wipe it with wiping paper, etc. and perform shutdown processing with the maintenance cover remaining open and turn off the

power, then repair the leak. If operation is continued when the ink and makeup is leaking, it will cause trouble and prevent normal printing will become. In addition, since the ink and makeup are combustible, they may cause a fire.● When the ink particles are caught in a beaker during test printing, etc., use a conductive beaker and securely connect the beaker to a ground. In addition, be sure that the print head is not inserted into the beaker. Since the ink particles used in printing are electrically charged, if the beaker is not

connected to a ground, the charge load will gradually increase and cause a fire.

8. INK AND MAKEUP REPLENISHMENT

● Never pour the ink and makeup waste into a sewer, etc. Have the ink and makeup drainage processed by an industrial waste processor as

special control industrial waste and the empty container as industrial waste.● Do not remove, apply unreasonable force to, or bend the piping tubes unnecessarily. Since high pressure is applied to parts of the ink and solvent inside the piping tube,

the ink and solvent may spurt out and get into your eyes and mouth or soil your hands and clothing.

If the ink or solvent gets into your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse it out with warm water and see a doctor.

WARNING

● Pay careful attention to the following items regarding handling of the ink and makeup:Wear gloves and goggles so that the ink and makeup will not directly contact your skin.If the ink or makeup gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and warm water.When taking the ink or makeup in and out of the bottle, be sure that the ink or makeup does not get on the equipment and surroundings. If the ink or makeup gets on the equipment or surroundings, immediately wipe it off with makeup.Since the vapor pressure of the makeup is generally high, if the ambient temperature is high such as in the summer, etc., the internal pressure will rise and makeup could spurt out when the outside cover is removed. Therefore, when unplugging,●do not hold the bottle near your face●place the can on a level surface●open while covering the opening with a rag, etc.

CAUTION

●Replenishing the ink 8-2

8.1 Replenishing the ink(1) Overview

●Replenish the ink in the ink reservoir within 60 minutes after an Ink Low warning is generated. If the ink is not replenished, the printer will stop.

●The ink can be replenished without regard to whether the IJ printer power is ON or OFF or the printer’s operating state.

●When the ink is replenished, the warning is automatically reset.

(2) Operation

Open the maintenance cover, pull the ink reservoir forward, and remove the cap of the ink reservoir.

Remove the cap from the ink bottle and replenish the ink by pouring it into the ink reservoir.●Adjust the amount replenishment in accordance with the ink consumption. Exercise care to avoid excessive replenishment.

Close the ink reservoir cap. ●Tighten the cap securely. The solvent component may evaporate.

Return the reservoir to its original position. 4

Close the maintenance cover. 5

Pull out.

Ink reservoir

Maintenance cover

Cap

Ink reservoir

Ink bottle

If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up promptly with wiping paper or something similar. In addition, do not close the maintenance cover until you are sure that the wiped portion has completely dried.

CAUTION

●When moving the reservoir, move it gently.

●Hold the reservoir and pull it forward.

8-3 ●Replenishing the makeup

8.2 Replenishing the makeup(1) Overview

●Replenish the makeup in the makeup reservoir within 60 minutes after a makeup Low warning was generated. If replenishment is not performed, the printer will stop.●The makeup can be replenished without regard as to whether the IJ printer power is ON or OFF or the

printer’s operating state.●When the makeup is replenished, the warning is automatically reset.

(2) Operation

Open the maintenance cover, pull the makeup reservoir forward, and remove the cap of the makeup reservoir.

Remove the cap from the makeup bottle and replenish the ink by pouring it into the makeup reservoir.

Close the makeup reservoir cap.●Tighten the cap securely. The solvent component may evaporate.

Return the reservoir base to its original position. 4

Close the maintenance cover. 5

Makeup reservoir

Maintenance cover

Cap

Makeup bottle

Makeupreservoir

●Gradually add the makeup to avoid spilling. Also, exercise care to avoid excessive replenishment.●If the mesh filter inside the cap is soiled, take it out and clean it

If makeup is accidentally spilt, wipe it up promptly with wiping paper or some-thing similar. In addition, do not close the maintenance cover until you are sure that the wiped portion has completely dried.

CAUTION

Pull out.

Cap

●When moving the reservoir, move it gently.

●Hold the reservoir and pull it forward.

●Display when warning or fault was generated 9-1

◆◆◆◆◆　　　　　Target Sensor Fault　　　　　◆◆◆◆◆052

The print target detection signal was ON longer than the timeout setting of Target Sensor Timer.Cause 1. The print target detection signal ON time is too long. 2. The Target Sensor Timer setting is incorrect.Solution 1. If the target is stopped in front of the sensor, move the target. 2. Change the Target Sensor Timer setting.

CloseReset

9. WHEN WARNING OR FAULT WAS GENERATED

●When an operation mistake is made and processing judgment is prompted, a confirmation message is displayed.

●When a “Fault state” which hinders printing was generated while the liquid crystal screen backlighting was off or when a “Warning state” which does not hinder printing but requires maintenance was generated, a fault message or warning message is displayed in a window.

(1) When a fault was generated

9.1 Display when warning or fault was generated●When a warning or fault was generated, a warning or fault lamp lights.

●When Clear is pressed after removing the cause, the fault state is cleared and the message is also closed.

●When Close is pressed, the fault window is closed, but the fault state is not cleared. When Fault in state area, the fault message is displayed again.

●However, when the fault state is already cleared, it is cleared by Close .

Operational status display lamp

Message No.The name of the fault message is displayed.

The description, cause, and solution are displayed.

9-2 ●Display when warning or fault was generated

◇◇◇◇◇　　　　　Ink Low Warning　　　　　◇◇◇◇◇081

=====　　　　 Ink Jet Startup Confirmation 　　　=====186

The ink jet will be turned ON.

Solution To turn the ink jet ON, press <Ready>.

CloseReady

●When Close is pressed, the warning window is closed, but the warning state is not cleared. The warning name is displayed in the warning display area (see the figure above).●If the warning state is cleared, the warning display is automatically closed.

(2) When warning was generated

(3) When a mistake was generated or when processing judgment is prompted

●The contents of the confirmation message are described at the place of each operation.

Message No.The name of the warning message is displayed.

The description, cause, and solution are displayed.

Message No.The name of the confirmation message is displayed.

The description, cause, and solution are displayed.

●On-screen message descriptions 9-3

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy

1 Ink Low Fault

The ink reservoir is almost empty and printing will stop. (If the ink is not added or replaced within 60 minutes after warning output, the printer comes to a stop with the warning condition replaced by a fault condition.)

● Add ink to the ink reservoir. ( 8.1).

2Main Ink Tank Too Full

The ink level in the main ink tank is too high.

● Drain proper amount of ink in the main ink tank.

( Technical manual 6.3, 6.13).

3Deflection Voltage Fault

The high-voltage power supply output voltage is too low or too high.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

4Ink replenishment Time-out

The automatic ink refill process exceeded the time limit.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

5Ink Drop Charge Too Low

The ink drops are poorly charged.

● Clean the gutter, deflection electrode, and its

surroundings.● Adjust the excitation setting

to make sure that the ink drops are well made.

( Technical manual 6.11).● Adjust ink pressure. ( Technical manual 6.10).

6System operation error C

Unexpected error occurred.● Turn the power OFF and then

back ON after 10 seconds.

7System operation error M

Unexpected error occurred.● Turn the power OFF and then

back ON after 10 seconds.

8System operation error S

Unexpected error occurred.● Turn the power OFF and then

back ON after 10 seconds.

9Deflection Voltage Leakage

The deflection electrode voltage is too low.● Clean and dry the deflection

electrode and nearby parts.

10Makeup replenishment Time-out

The automatic makeup refill process exceeded the time limit.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

11 Makeup Low Fault

The makeup reservoir is almost empty and printing will stop.(if replenishment is not effected within 60 minutes after warning output)

● Add the makeup to the makeup reservoir.

( 8.2).

12Ink Heating Unit Temprature Too High

The temperature of the ink heater in the print head is too high.The heater will be temporarily deactivated.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

13Multi DC Power Supply Fan Fault

The cooling fan in the multi DC power supply has a fault. The ink ejection will stop and the printer will be automatically shutdown.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

9.2 On-screen message descriptions9.2.1 Fault messages

(1) Faults that invoke ink stoppage

9-4 ●On-screen message descriptions

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy

14Charge Voltage Too Low

The charging voltage supplied to the nozzle drive board EZJ125 from the high-voltage power supply unit is too low.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

15Charge Voltage Fault

The charge electrode signal is faulty.● Check that there is no short-

circuit with another part.

16No Ink Drop Charge

The ink drops are not electrically charged.

● Check if the ink stream is at about the center of the gutter.

● Clean the gutter, deflection electrode, and its

surroundings. ● Adjust the excitation V-ref. to

make sure that the ink drops are well made.

( Technical manual 6.11).● Check the ink pressure. ( Technical manual 6.10).

17Ink Heating Unit TemperatureSensor Fault

The temperature measured at the ink heating unit is out of normal range.The heater will be temporarily deactivated.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

18 Memory Fault C The memory data has a fault. ● Execute system setup.

19 Memory Fault opThe memory of the option board EZJ130 has a fault.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

20 Memory Fault M The memory data has a fault.● Contact your nearest local

distributor.

22Internal Communication Error S

The internal data processing error.● Turn the power OFF and then

back ON after 10 seconds.

24Ink Heating Unit Over Current

The ink heating element is shorted.The heater will be temporarily deactivated.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

25Ambient Temperature Sensor Fault

The ambient temperature measurement is out of normal range.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

26Print Controller Cooling Fan Fault

The cooling fan of the print controller area is faulty.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

30 Memory Fault S The memory data has a fault.● Contact your nearest local

distributor.

31 Pump Motor Fault Pump motor is faulty.● Contact your nearest local

distributor.

32Viscometer InkTemperature Sensor Fault

The ink temperature measurement at the viscometer is out of narmal range.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

34Ink Heating UnitTemperature Low

The ink heater in the print head is unable to heat the ink enough to reach the correct operating temperature. The heater will be temporarily deactivated.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

35 Model-key fault Model-key recognition failed.● Contact your nearest local

distributor.

37 Language key fault Language-key recognition failed.● Contact your nearest local

distributor.

●On-screen message descriptions 9-5

(2) Faults that do not invoke ink stoppage

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy

27Print Data Changeover Error C

The print data change procedure was incomplete.

● Check the data entered

28Print Data Changeover Error M

The print data change procedure was incomplete.

● Check the data entered

38Free Layout Printing Failure

The free layout printing was aborted while the message was printing.

● Delete some print items or decrease the setting of the ink drop use. ( 4.8.6)

40External Communication Error nnn

The serial communication port had a data error.

● Note the error code and see that no more error occure.

( Technical manual 5.7)

42Ink Drop Charge Too High

The charge sensor detects a high drop charge.

● Clean the gutter, deflection electrode, and its

surroundings. ● Adjust the excitation V-ref. to

make sure that the ink drops are well made.

( Technical manual 6.11)● Adjust the ink pressure.● Check that the ink stream is

correctly retracted. ( Technical manual 6.10)

43Barcode Short On Numbers

The number of characters for the selected barcode type is insufficient.

●Configure the number of ( 4.8.5) characters for

barcode to appropriate value. ( Technical manual 9)

44 Shutdown Fault The shutdown process failed.

●Turn the printer power OFF by main switch.

Contact your nearest local distributor.

45 Count OverflowThe calculation result of the count multiplier overflowed.

● Change the count multiplier setting.

46Invalid Data Change Timing

A print operation was requested while the print data was being changed.

● Change of either data change or print start.

47Invalid Count Data Change Timing

A print operation was requested while the print data was being changed.

● Change of either data change or print start.

48Invalid Print Start Timing

The print target detection signal for the next target arrived during the data was being changed.

● Change of either data change or print start.

49 Print Overlap FaultThe print target detecter signal for the next target arrived during the print operation for the current target.

● Increase the spacing between products.

● If the target signal is chattering, use sensor filter

setting. ( 4.14.1).

50Print Head Cover Open

The print head cover is open.

● Remove the cover and then hit the Clear key.

● If a magnetic substance is used to fix the cover,

it must be replaced with nonmagnetic resin (metal).

9-6 ●On-screen message descriptions

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy

51Detector Position Improper

The print target detecter signal turned OFF before print start during printing at repeat print setting.

● Move the print target detecter closer to the print head.

● If the target signal is chattering, use sensor filter setting.● Check the data entered.

52Target Sensor Time Out

The print target detecter signal was ON longer than the timeout setting of Target Sensor Timer.

● If the target is stopped in front of the sensor, move the target.

● Change the Target Sensor Timer setting.

( 4.14.1).

53Target Spacing Too Close

There are 5 or more print target detector signal turned ON before print start during printing at No repeat print setting.

● Move the print target detecter closer to the print head.

54Print Data Changeover In Progress S

A print operation was requested while the print data was being changed.

● If the target signal is chattering, Use Sensor filter setting.● Change of timing either print

data change or print start.

55Ink Self Lifeinformation

Replacement of ink is recommended.

● Use ink within its expiration dae at replacement.

● Confirm ink of number on unit information screen.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

56 Blank Print Items The print items are not properly set up. ● Change the print data.

57Excessive Format Count

A column has more than 8 print format types (the number of lines, line spacing, character size, character spacing, bold charcter and bar code).

● Perform setup so that the number of print format types does not exceed 8.

58Print Data Changeover In Progress M

A print operation was requested while the print data was being changed.

● Change timing of either print data change or print start.

59Print Data Changeover In Progress V

A print operation was requested while the video data was being changed.

● Adjust either the encoder frequency or the pulse rate division factor.● Change timing of either print

data change or print start.

60Communication Buffer Fault

The print contents are not in the communication buffer.

.● Adjust the print and communication timing.

61Makeup Self Lifeinformation

Replacement of makeup is recommended.

● Use makeup within its expiration date at eplacement.●Confirm makeup lot number

on unit information screen.● Contact your nearest local

distributor.

62Internal Communication Error C

The internal data processing error.

● Ink stop and the printer power OFF are recommend.

Turn the printer OFF and then back ON after 10 seconds.

●On-screen message descriptions 9-7

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy

63Internal Communication Error M

The internal data processing error.

● Ink stop and the printer power OFF are recommend.

Turn the printer OFF and then back ON after 10 seconds.

9.2.2 Warning messages

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy

65Excitation V-ref. Review

The excitation voltage reference needs to be updated.

● Perform the Nozzle test and update the Excitation V-ref. setting.

( Technical manual 6.10)

66Viscosity Reading Instable

The viscometer output readings fluctuated.Setting will be temporarily switched to no use of viscometer.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

67Viscosity Readings Out of Range

The viscometer is defective.Setting will be temporarily switched to no use of viscometer.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

68 Ink Viscosity High The ink viscosity is above the proper level.

● The ink concentration will be adjusted to normal level.

If print quality is still poor, then replace ink.

( Technical manual 6.3)

69 Ink Viscosity Low Ink viscosity is below the proper level.

● The ink concentration will be adjusted to normal level.

If print quality is still poor, then replace ink.

( Technical manual 6.3)

71 Battery Low M

The internal battery in engine section is low.The latest print data and operating information may not be saved.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

● Replace the internal battery in engine section and set the data/time. ( 6.2).

72Calendar Content Inaccurate

Calendar content is inaccurate due to mal-function of the clock.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

● Set the date/time. ( 6.2).

-External Communication Error nnn

The serial communication port had a date error.

● Note the error code and see that no more errors occur.

( Technical manual 5.7)

80Excitation V-ref. Review 2

Up date the excitation voltage reference.Print quality may become poor.

● Perform nozzle test and update the excitation V-ref. setting.

( Technical manual 6.11)● Watch for the print results and

the Excitation V-ref. Setting. for about 2 hours

after operation is started.

81 Ink Low Warning The ink level in the ink reservoir is low.● Add ink within 60 minutes ( 8.1).

9-8 ●On-screen message descriptions

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy

82Makeup Low Warning

The makeup level in the makeup reservoir is low.

● Add the makeup within 60 minutes.

( 8.2).

83Ink Shelf Life Expired

Ink replacement time has come.● Replace the ink ( Technical manual 6.3).

84Ambient Temperature Too High

The ambient temperature is above the proper level.

● Ensure that the ambient temperature is within the

operating temperature limits.

85Ambient Temperature Too Low

The ambient temperature is below the proper level.

● Ensure that the ambient tem-perature is within the operat-ing temperature limits.

87 Ink Pressure HighInk pressure is higher than the recommended value.

● Adjust the pressure-reducing valve to correct the pressure.

88 Battery Low C The internal battery in controller section is low.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

● Replace the internal battery in engine section and set the data/time. ( 6.2).

93 Ink Pressure LowInk pressure is lower than the recommended value..

● Adjust the pressure-reducing valve to correct the pressure.

95Product Speed Matching Error

The encoder pulse rate exceeds the available printing speed.

● Slow the print target speed.● Decrease N in the ink drop

use percentage (1/N). ( 4.14.1).

129 Model-key Failure Model-key recognition failed.● Contact your nearest local

distributor.

130Language-key Failure

Language-key recognition failed.● Contact your nearest local

distributor.

131 Upgrade-key Fault Upgrade-key recognition failed.● Contact your nearest local

distributor.

135Circulation System Cooling Fan Fault

The cooling fan of the circulation system area is faulty.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

●On-screen message descriptions 9-9

9.2.3 Other messages

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy

187Ink Temperature Correction Notice

The selected setup does not allow ink temperature corrections to be made.( P1-4)

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

200No Ink Concentration Control

The current settings have made ink concentration control unavailable.( P1-5)

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

201Print Data/Settings Notice

Recent changes to print data and printer settings may have been lost. In the previous session, power was cut OFF suddenly.

● Check print contents and each setting value.

209Print Start upFailure

Printer startup failed.

● Turn the printer power OFF and then back ON after 10 seconds.

● Contact your nearest local distributor.

210USB Memory Error

USB memory is not inserted. Or an error was generated when reading USB memory.

●Insert correctly.●Replace with a new USB

memory.

9-10 ●When checking the warning and fault generation status

Fault/warning log

2015.07.07 12:45Com=0[Stop　　　 ]

Name of alarmDate/time

Back

MManual Startup

HOME

9.3 When checking the warning and fault generation status(1) Functions●The warning or fault message generation time and contents can be viewed.●A maximum of 90 messages can be displayed.●When 90 messages are exceeded, the messages are closed from the oldest message.

(2) Operation

1 Press View alarm history in the Manage messages screen.The Fault/warning screen is displayed.

Sorted from generation date.

Message No.

●Remedial action to be taken in the event of a printing failure 9-11

(*1) See the Technical Manual

No.Printing failure

description(phenomenon)

Probable cause Solution Reference

Chipped print (minus deflection electrode side)

Ink and foreign matter are stuck to the gutter.

● Clean the gutter.● Replace the recovery filter.

6.6 (*1)6.8 (*1)

Ink and foreign matter are stuck to the charge and deflection electrodes.

● Clean the charge and deflection electrodes.

3.1.2

Ink and foreign matter arestuck to the ink ejection port.

● Remove the ink and foreign matter.

—

The ink stream is improperly positioned.

● Adjust the ink stream. 6.5 (*1)

The ink pressure is too high.● Adjust the ink pressure for

the standard value.6.10 (*1)

The ink has deteriorated. ● Replace the ink. 6.3 (*1)

Chipped print (plus deflection electrode side)

Ink and foreign matter are stuck to the charge and deflection electrodes.

● Clean the charge and deflection electrodes.

3.1.2

Ink and foreign matter are stuck to the ink ejection port.

● Remove the ink and foreign matter.

—

The flow within the nozzle is restricted.

● Backwash the nozzle. 6.4 (*1)

The character height setting is too great.

● Decrease the character height setting.

4.14.1

The ink pressure is too low.● Adjust the ink pressure for

the standard value.6.10 (*1)

The ink has deteriorated. ● Replace the ink. 6.3 (*1)

3Varying character height

The clearance between the print head and print target has changed.

● Adjust the clearance between the print head and print target.

—

Ink and foreign matterare stuck to the charge and deflection electrodes.

● Clean the charge and deflection electrodes.

3.1.2

Ink and foreign matter are stuck to the ink ejection port.

● Remove the ink and foreign matter.

—

The flow within the nozzle is restricted.

● Backwash the nozzle. 6.4 (*1)

The ink pressure has changed.● Adjust the ink pressure for

the standard value.6.10 (*1)

The ink has deteriorated. ● Replace the ink. 6.3 (*1)

9.4 Remedial Action to Be Taken in the Event of a Printing Failure

● If a printing failure occurs, perform the associated remedial procedures suggested below.● If the remedial procedures below do not achieve recovery, it is conceivable that the problem is attributable to a PC board or circulation system failure. In such an instance, contact your nearest local distributor.

Direction of deflection

←Chipped (lost)

Direction of deflection←Chipped (lost)

9-12 ●Remedial action to be taken in the event of a printing failure

No.Printing failure

description(phenomenon)

Probable cause Solution Reference

4Disordered characters

There are water, oil, or other deposits on the print target surface.

● Make prints with the print target clear of deposits.

—

The ink pressure has changed.● Adjust the ink pressure for

the standard value.6.10 (*1)

Ink and foreign matter are stuck to the charge and deflection electrodes.

● Clean the charge and deflection electrodes.

3.1.2

The flow within the nozzle is restricted.

● Backwash the nozzle. 6.4 (*1)

The ink has deteriorated. ● Replace the ink. 6.3 (*1)

The excitation V-ref. value is improper.

● Adjust the excitation V-ref.. 6.11 (*1)

●Troubleshooting guide 10-1

Phenomenon Check Solution

The power does not turn ON at the press of the Start switch.

● Check that the main power switch is turned ON. ● Turn ON the main power switch.

● Check that the power plug is properly connected to a power outlet.

● Check that electrical power is supplied to the employed power outlet.

● Turn OFF the main power switch. Ensure that power is supplied to the power outlet, and then

connect the power plug to the power outlet.

● Check that Status indicator lamp is not on when Start switch is pressed.

● Check that Start switch is pressed for about 2 seconds.

● Ensure that Status indicator lamp is off when pressing the Start switch.

● Ensure that Start switch is pressed for about 2 seconds.

Pressing a key does not invoke its predefinedoperation.Or the key is not accepted.

● See “7.4 Touch Screen Coordinate correction”.

The calendar time is not correctly printed.

● Check that «clock stop» is not selected from the date/time setup screen.

See “6.2 Set the Date and Time”.

● Select the «same as current time» option.

See “6.2 Set the Date and Time”.

The printer does not become ready for printing when Start up is pressed.

● Check for an ink stream ejection from the nozzle.

● Check whether the ejected ink stream enters the gutter hole.

● Stop the ink ejection sequence by pressing the Shut down .

● See the Technical Manual “6.4 How to correct ink stream bend-ing and nozzle clogging”, and correct the problem.

● Check if the print head are dirty. ● See “1.3 Print head cleaning”, and perform the operation.

“Print overlap fault” occurs frequently.

See “9. When Warning or Fault was generated”. A fault message is displayed.

Residual image of characters, etc. remains on the screen.

—

●Because of the characteristics of the liquid crystal panel, when the same pattern is displayed for a long time, a residual image of the pattern may remain. However, the residual image will disappear with the passage of time.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEIf the printer does not start up normally, perform the following checks before deciding the printer is malfunctioning.

● If the above remedies do not restore the printer to normal, stop using the printer, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet, and

contact your Hitachi distributor.

CAUTION

■ Report the following to your local source or service company:

1. TYPE-FORM (model number) IJ printer (Model RX2- )2. SER. No. (serial number) RX23. Failure description In detail4. Organization name (department and section names included), name of person in charge, and telephone number.

* The model number and serial number are marked on the nameplate that is attached to the right-hand side of the printer.

11-1 ●Emergency Procedures

11. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Press the main power switch to turn OFF the power.

● If an earthquake, fire, or other emergency arises while the printer is operating or when its power is on, turn OFF the power by pressing the main power switch.

Never perform this procedure except in case of an emergency.

WARNING

● Immediately after the emergency is cleared, press the main power switch to turn the power back ON and press the Start up to initiate ink ejection.

● If the emergency lasts for 5 minutes or longer, open the print head cover and clean the orifice plate and its surrounding parts and gutter section by pouring makeup over them.

When resuming operation, thoroughly clean the orifice plate and its surrounding parts and gutter section by pouring makeup over them, and then initiating ink ejection.

● If the power supply is shut off by a power failure, perform the same procedure as indicated above.

In the event of a power failureWhen you use the printer after power restoration, be sure to confirm the printings and other setup data beforehand. If you find any incorrect printings or setup data, correct it.Note that the count update information for printing is not saved in memory. When you use the printer after power restoration, it is necessary to set the count update information (initial value data) again.

CAUTION

Main power switch

●Specifications 12-1

12. SPECIFICATIONS

ItemModel

RX2-SD160 RX2-BD160Nozzle size 65μm

Max. print line numberUp to 3 lines

(OP: Up to 5 lines)Up to 3 lines

Maximum number of print characters

Up to 120 characters (OP: Up to 1000 characters)

Up to 60 characters

Font

4×5 Option: V -5×5 V V5x7(8),9×7(8) V V7x10 V V10x12 V V12x16 V V18x24 Option: V -24×32 Option: V —

Character height 2-10 mm / 0.08-0.39 inches

Display & input deviceWYSIWYG design; Display: TFT LCD (10.4″ color), backlight provided; Input device: Touch panel, input sound provided

Maximum print rate (character per second) (Font 5×5, space 1, 1line)

Up to 1,148 (OP: Up to 2,296)

Up to 765

Standard characters Alphanumeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), symbols (27), space : Total 90User pattern Each dot matrix 200 patterns Each dot matrix 50 patternsPrint functions Calendar, Count, Font mixture, Passwords security, etc.

Barcode printingcode39, ITF, NW-7, EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC-A, UPC-E, code128/EAN-128, GS1 DataBar

—

2D code printing OP: Data Matrix , QR code, Micro QR —

Message storage capacity48 messages

(Op: Up to 2000 messages (depends on data content))

24 messages

Input signal

Print target detection, Rotary encoder pulse, Printing stop, Reciprocative printing, Remote control (Run, Stop, High-voltage ON/OFF, Reset)

(NPN/PNP Selectable)

Print target detection, Rotary encoder pulse (NPN/PNP Selectable),OP:Printing stop, Reciprocative printing, Remote control (NPN/PNP Selectable)

Output signal Print ready, Fault, Warning (NPN Only), Print in progress or Print complete, Online (NPN/PNP Selectable)

Print ready, Fault, Warning (NPN Only),OP:Print in progress or Print complete, Online (NPN/PNP Selectable)

Data interface RS-232C RS-232C at baud rates selectable up to 115,200bps

Option(RS-232C at baud rates selectable up to 115,200bps)

External memory USB for user data storageHead cable length, angle 4m / 13.1ft, inline / 90 degrees Operating temperature range 0-45ºC / 32-113ºF (JP-K67, JP-K69 Ink) Humidity range 30-90% R.H. (No condensation)Power supply (Automatic voltage selection)

AC100-120/220-240V±10% 50/60Hz 150VA (AC Inlet)

Corrosive gas There must be no corrosive gasOverall size (Width x Depth x Height)

400x340x480mm / 15.7×13.4×18.9 inches

Approximate weight 25kg / 55lbs

13-1 ●Appendix

AActual print width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75Add column to end. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Adjust print parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17, 4-1, 4-5, 4-73, 5-6Adjustment char. Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Alphabet month 3 digits (JAN, FEB, —-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Auto encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74, 4-75

BBold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 6-4

CCalendar block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34, 4-35, 4-38, 4-40, 4-42, 4-44, 4-45, 4-46, 4-48, 4-52, 4-63, 4-66Calendar offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79Calendar time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-35, 4-41, 4-44, 6-1, 6-8, 6-10, 10-1Calendar time control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 6-8, 6-10Change character orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, 6-6, 6-7

Change group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11, 7-13Change group number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-13Change message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17, 3-18, 4-1, 4-3, 4-5, 4-10, 4-12, 4-15, 7-2, 7-4, 7-6, 7-7Change message name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-4Change message number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-6, 7-7Change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7Change/create group name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-11Character height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71, 4-81, 9-10, 12-1Character orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71, 4-72, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7Character width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71, 4-73, 4-78, 4-81Chimney . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19, 4-21Circulation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 3-20, 5-1, 5-6Clock display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Comm. Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 5-1Communication environment setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19, 5-6, 6-1Copy data (IJP→USB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 7-29Copy data (USB→IJP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6, 7-1, 7-30Count block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50, 4-54, 4-55, 4-59, 4-63, 4-69Count multiplication printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65, 4-67Count skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54, 4-68Cover open state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Create user pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 5-6, 7-1, 7-15, 7-19, 7-23Create/Edit message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17, 4-1, 4-10, 5-6Current message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24, 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, 4-6, 4-8, 4-9, 4-81

APPENDIX

INDEX

●Appendix 13-2

DData Entry Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26, 4-4Date/time setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 3-24, 4-34, 5-6, 6-1, 6-3, 6-9, 9-7, 10-1Day of the week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34, 4-36, 7-35Delete column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Delete group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-12Delete stored message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-3, 7-5Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-6, 4-7, 4-9, 4-10, 7-2DIN print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79Display All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6, 4-7, 4-9, 4-10, 7-2Distance between print head and work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73, 4-74Dot matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 4-19, 4-32, 7-15, 7-16, 7-28, 7-33, 12-1Drop adjust state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Duplicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32, 4-46, 7-20, 7-35

EEAN Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23, 4-79, 4-80Edit message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17, 3-18, 4-1, 4-3, 4-4, 4-9, 4-10, 4-23, 4-33, 4-35, 4-37, 4-38 4-39, 4-40, 4-42, 4-45, 4-47, 4-48, 4-51, 4-52, 4-61, 4-62, 4-63, 4-66Edit standard pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 5-6, 6-3, 7-1, 7-33, 7-34Edit substitution rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 5-6, 7-1Excitation V update (Nozzle test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19, 3-22, 3-23, 5-1, 5-6Excitation V-ref. Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5

Fault state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 9-1Free layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-6, 4-9, 4-24Free space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Group . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11, 5-6, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-6, 7-10, 7-11, 7-12, 7-13, 7-14

Handling the nozzle rubber seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

IICON Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 6-11Individual setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-5, 4-6, 4-9Ink and makeup replenishment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 8-1Ink drop charge rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76Ink drop use percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71, 4-72, 9-8Ink heating state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 3-21Ink periodic replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Ink Temperature Correction Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-9Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17, 4-32, 7-35Insert column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Inter-character space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, 4-3, 4-18, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-30, 4-32, 4-78, 5-6, 7-16Interlaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71, 4-72

13-3 ●Appendix

LLine spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-18Line speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72, 4-73, 4-78, 4-81Login history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12, 6-13Login management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 6-1, 6-12, 6-13, 6-14Login user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-12, 3-17, 4-1, 5-6, 6-12, 6-13, 6-14

MMain power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 3-1, 3-2, 3-13, 3-15, 10-1, 11-1Manage group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 7-2, 7-10, 7-11, 7-12, 7-13, 7-14Manage messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 9-10

NNo Ink Concentration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 9-9No-cleaning stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3, 3-4, 3-5

OOFF — ON transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41, 4-42, 4-43, 7-1, 7-27Operation management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 4-1, 5-1, 5-3, 5-6Overall setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-5, 4-6, 4-9Overwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1, 4-8, 4-32, 5-6Overwrite message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1, 4-8, 5-6

PPassword protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-19, 5-1, 5-7, 6-12Password setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6, 6-14Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32, 4-46, 4-50, 7-20Print characters one by one. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5Print data changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-5, 9-5, 9-6Print Data/Settings Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Print format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17, 3-18, 3-25, 3-26, 4-3, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 4-9, 4-14, 4-15 4-16,4-17, 4-18, 4-23, 4-24, 4-72, 4-80, 5-6, 6-3, 7-28, 9-6Print item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, 4-17, 4-18, 4-22, 4-24, 4-25, 4-28 4-33, 4-38, 4-39, 4-48, 4-52, 4-55, 4-67, 4-79, 6-4, 9-5, 9-6Print layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1, 4-2, 4-33, 4-34, 4-39, 4-40, 4-43, 4-48, 4-52, 4-63Print signal type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-5Print specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17, 3-18, 4-4, 4-71, 4-73, 4-75, 4-81, 5-6, 6-3, 7-28Print start delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71, 4-73, 4-74, 4-81Print target width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75Printing method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71, 4-72Product speed matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71, 4-73, 4-74, 9-8Pulse rate division factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

●Appendix 13-4

RReady state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-21, 5-3Ready state → Standby state switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Repeat count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78, 6-2Repeat intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73, 4-78Repeat print sensor mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 6-5Reverse print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-5

SSaved message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, 4-6, 4-9, 7-1, 7-4, 7-5Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 4-9, 4-10, 7-2Select login user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-17, 4-1, 5-8, 6-12, 6-13Select message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17, 4-1, 4-3, 4-7, 4-9Selecting languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 5-6, 7-1, 7-36Service state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Shift code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, 4-34, 4-46, 4-47, 4-48, 4-49Signal ON period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78Single scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71, 4-72Solenoid valve / pump test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 5-1, 5-6Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 4-9, 4-10, 6-13, 7-2, 7-35, 9-10Speed compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74Speed compensation fine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74Standby state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-20, 5-4Standby state → Ready state switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Start switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, 3-2, 3-13, 10-1Starting state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Stop state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 3-20Stop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 3-1, 3-13, 3-15Stopping state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Substitution rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, 3-19, 4-34, 4-35, 4-36, 4-44, 4-45, 5-6, 6-8, 7-1, 7-35

TTarget sensor filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76Target sensor timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76, 9-1, 9-6Test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-4, 8-1Time count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 4-34, 4-50, 4-51, 4-53Time of preparing for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73To overall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14, 4-15Total number of days. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34, 4-35Touch screen coordinate correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6, 7-1, 7-27, 10-1Touch screen setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 3-25, 3-26, 6-1, 6-11

UUnit information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 5-1, 5-2USB memory error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9User environment setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 3-24, 5-4, 5-6, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-5

13-5 ●Appendix

VVarious print setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-79, 5-6View alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19, 5-1, 9-10View software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19, 5-1, 5-5

WWeek No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34, 4-36

ZZero-suppression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35, 4-42, 4-43, 4-44, 4-45, 4-48, 4-52, 4-54 4-56, 4-57, 4-58, 4-59, 4-60, 4-64, 4-65, 4-66, 4-67

2-L3009-2

Technical Manual
INK JET PRINTER FOR INDUSTRIAL MARKING
HITACHI
Printer
Model RX2
Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.
This printer employs a noncontact, ink-jet method to print onto a print target.
This instruction manual describes the basic operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and other detailed
handling procedures of the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.
If the printer is improperly handled or maintained, it may not operate smoothly and may become defective or
cause an accident. It is therefore essential that you read this manual to gain a complete understanding of the
printer and use it correctly.
After thoroughly reading the manual, properly store it for future reference.
IF you changed the language of screen by mistake,see the chapter 7.8 "Selecting Languages".
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
● Before using the printer, thoroughly read the following safety precautions for optimum printer
use.
● You should observe the precautions set forth below in order to use the product properly and
avoid endangering you or other persons or damaging property. For the purpose of clarifying
the severity of injury or damage and likelihood of occurrence, the precautions are classified
into two categories, WARNING and CAUTION, which both describe hazardous situations
that may arise if you ignore the precautions and perform an incorrect handling or operating
procedure. The precautions in these two categories are both important and must therefore
be observed without fail.
WARNING
WARNING is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which
may cause severe personal injury or death if the warning against
performing an incorrect handling procedure is ignored.
CAUTION
CAUTION is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which
may cause personal injury or property damage if the warning
against performing an incorrect handling procedure is ignored.
● If the warning in the CAUTION category is ignored, serious results may occur depending on
the situation.
● After the manual has been read, it must be stored in such a location that all printer operation
personnel can refer to it at all times.
● All the instructions set forth in this manual are important and must therefore be observed
without fail.
Pictograph Examples
The symbols are used to indicate precautions (including those related to
potential warnings) to be observed. Detailed information is furnished by a picture
within the symbol outline (a shock hazard is indicated by the example shown at
left).
The symbols are used to describe prohibited actions. The details of a
prohibited action are given by a picture within or near the symbol outline (the
example shown at left dictates that you must keep flames away).
The
symbols are used to describe required actions. Detailed instructions are
given by a picture within the symbol outline (the example shown at left dictates
that a ground connection must be made).
Restrictions on Export
User hereby agrees not to export or re-export this product to any end-user who the user
has reason to suspect may utilize the product for the design, development or reproduction
of nuclear, chemical or biochemical weapons.
File management and USB management are carried out using eParts made from eSOL.
Ethernet is the product name of Xerox Corporation in America.
●Safety Precautions (1)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
● Ensure that there is no flame- or arc-generating device around the
printer.
The ink and makeup are both flammable and may cause fire.
Fire can be generated by matches, lighters, cigarettes, heaters, stoves, gas
burners, welders, grinders and static electricity. Arcs may be generated from
open-type relays, switches, and brush motors. Before handling the ink and
makeup, remove static electricity from your body, peripheral equipment, and so
on. In the interest of safety, position a dry-chemical fire extinguisher near the
printer.
● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, install the printer at
an adequately ventilated location.
1 Never install the printer in an enclosed space.
2 Connect exhaust equipment to the printer in order to prevent it from filling
with organic solvent vapor.
● Do not insert tweezers, a screwdriver, or any other metal article into the
ink ejection hole in the end of the print head.
When the printer is ready to print, a high voltage (approximately 6 kV) is applied
to the deflection electrode section in the print head.
Exercise caution to avoid electric shock, injury, and fire.
● Do not remove the outer covering.
A high voltage is applied to some sections of the printer.
Exercise caution to avoid electric shock and injury.
● Use an AC voltage of 100 to120 V or 200 to 240 V ±10% only and a
power frequency of 50 or 60 Hz only.
If the above requirements are not met, the electric parts may overheat and burn,
creating a risk of fire or electric shock.
● Never drain the ink or makeup waste solution into a public sewer system.
Waste disposal must comply with all appropriate regulations. Consult the
appropriate regulatory agency for further information.
● Exercise caution to avoid inadvertently disconnecting, forcibly pulling, or
bending piping tubes.
Since the ink and makeup in some portions of piping tubes are pressurized,
they may splash into your eyes or mouth or onto your hands or clothing.
If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or
cold water and consult a physician.
(2) ●Safety Precautions
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
● While the printer is operating, do not look into the ink ejection hole in the
end of the print head.
Ink or makeup may enter your eyes or mouth or soil your hands or clothing.
If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or
cold water and consult a physician.
● Before servicing the printer, be sure to stop the ink ejection.
Because ink or makeup may splash into your eyes or mouth or onto your hands
or clothing. If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush
with warm or cold water and consult a physician.
● If an earthquake, fire, or other emergency occurs while the printer is
engaged in printing or just turned on, press the Main power switch to turn
off the power.
● The printer must be managed in compliance with all appropriate
regulations.
Read and understand the appropriate Safety Data Sheet (SDS) before using
any ink or makeup.
● Use Hitachi approved consumables and periodic replacement parts.
Using products that are not designated by Hitachi could cause s failure in
certain functions.
● Warning for Mercury
Hg -- THE LAMP IN THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS MERCURY.
RECYCLE OR DISPOSE OF IT ACCORDING TO APPLICABLE
ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS.
For Recycling and Disposal information, contact your government agency, the
Electronic Industries Alliance at www.eiae.org, and/or www.lamprecycle.org (in
the US), or the Electronic Product Stewardship Canada at www.epsc.ca (in
Canada). For more information, call 1-800-HITACHI (1-800-448-2244) (in the
US).
●Safety Precautions (3)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
● When charging a refill of ink or makeup, exchanging ink, or otherwise
handling ink or makeup, take enough care not to spill ink or makeup.
If you spill any ink or makeup by mistake, wipe it off neatly and promptly with
wiping paper or something similar. Do not close the maintenance cover until
you make sure that the portion you have just wiped is completely dry.
You must pay particular attention when you have spilled ink or makeup inside
the printer and it is not completely dry. Why? Because vapors of ink or
makeup will stay inside the printer and may catch on or cause a fire.
If you find it hard to wipe the printer when it is turned on, stop it with the
maintenance cover open. Power it down, and then wipe it off again.
● If you wish to clean the casing of the printer with wiping paper impregnated
with makeup, be sure to do so with the power off.
Attempting to clean it when the power is on will cause makeup or vapors of makeup
to enter the printer, possibly catching on or causing a fire.
When the cleaning is over, open the maintenance cover and make sure that no
makeup has entered and no vapors remain inside.
● Should you find a leak of ink or makeup inside the printer while the printer is
running or being maintained, wipe it off promptly with wiping paper or
something similar. Then, with the maintenance cover open, stop the printer,
power it down, and repair the leak.
Continuing operation with a leak of ink or makeup will cause an anomaly,
resulting in abnormal printing.
Ink and makeup are flammable. They may therefore catch on or cause a fire.
● The ink and makeup, their waste solution, used wiping papers and empty
containers are flammable. Waste disposal must comply with appropriate
regulations. Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further information.
● If you wish to receive ink particles in a beaker, for a printing test for example,
use an electrically conductive beaker and connect the beaker securely to the
ground.
Do not let the tip of the printing head enter the beaker.
Ink particles used for printing are electrically charged. An ungrounded beaker has a
gradually rising charge, possibly catching on or causing a fire.
● Ensure that all electrical wiring, connections and grounding comply with
applicable cords. Properly connect the printer to its dedicated ground.
Complete the above procedure to avoid electrical shock hazards.
● When welding, keep enough space between the IJ printer and the welding
work area to prevent the arc from starting a fire. Also, be sure to insulate the
printhead and IJ printer frame to keep the welding current from flowing to the
control section of the printer, and to make a separate ground connection for
the printer.
(4) ●Safety Precautions
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
<Keep all fire away.>
○ Ink and Makeup are flammable.
○ All fire must be kept away from the machine.
○ Spilled Ink and Makeup must be wiped off and dried up immediately.
<Caution when handling Ink/Makeup>
○ Strage must comply with local regulatory requirements .
○ Read and understand Safety Data Sheet(SDS).
○ Be sure to wear protective gloves and safety goggies.
○ If the Ink/Makeup in used is an organic solvent,it must be managed in compliance with the
Ordinance on the prevention or Organic Solvent poisoning.Refer to the "Instruction Manual"and
the "Handling guidance of each ink" for details.
AVERTISSEMENT
< Tenir hors de portée du feu. >
○ L’encre et la composition sont inflammables.
○ Tenir la machine hors de portée du feu.
○ Nettoyez et séchez immédiatement les projections d’encre et de composition.
<Soyez prudent lorsque vous manipulez l’encre/la composition>
○ Le stockage doit respecter les obligations réglementaires locales.
○ Lisez attentivement la fiche signalétique de sécurité de l’appareil (FSSP).
○ Assurez-vous de porter des gants et des lunettes de protection.
○ Si l’encre/la composition utilisée est un solvant biologique, vous devez le manipuler
conformément au décret sur la prévention des empoisonnements par solvant biologique.
Reportez-vous au «Mode d’emploi» et aux «Conseils de manipulation de chaque type d’encre»
pour plus de détails.
●Safety Precautions (5)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
CAUTION
● Only persons who have completed an operator training course for
Hitachi IJP can operate and service the printer.
If the printer is operated or serviced incorrectly, it may malfunction or break
down.
● Do not attempt to make repairs for any purpose other than operation or
maintenance.
● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, observe the
following handling precautions.
1 Secure adequate space for the ink/makeup handling area and printer
installation site. At least 200 m3 must be provided per print head.
Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided.
2 When handling the ink or makeup, wear protective gloves and safety goggles
to avoid direct skin contact. If the ink or makeup comes into contact with
skin, wash thoroughly with soap and warm or cold water.
3 When transferring the ink or makeup to or from a bottle, exercise caution to
prevent it coming into contact with the printer or surrounding articles.
If there is any spillage, immediately wipe it clean using a cloth moistened
with makeup.
● Ink and makeup must be stored as flammable liquids. Storage must
comply with local regulatory requirements. Consult the appropriate
regulatory agency for further information.
● If extraneous noise enters the printer, it may malfunction or break down.
For maximum noise immunity, observe the following installation and wiring
precautions.
1 Ensure that 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC power cables are not
bundled with other power supply cables.
2 Insulate the printer main body and print head so that they do not come into
direct contact with the conveyor or other devices.
3 If the employed print target detector is housed in a metal case, use a plastic
mounting brace for the purpose of insulating the detector from the conveyor
and other devices.
4 Be sure that the print target detector wiring is not bundled together with other
power supply cables.
● Please make sure the print status and print content are correct each time when
you start operation of IJP.
● Please implement periodical checkup of print status in the process, even
including during production.
● A touch panel is employed for data entry to operation screen.
When manipulating the Touch panel, use only fingers. If the touch panel is
operated with metal and/or sharp objects such as ball point pen, it may
malfunction or break down.
(6) ●Safety Precautions
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
FCC Notice
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
●Safety Precautions (7)
CONTENTS
1. DELIVERED GOODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. INSTALLING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. INSTALLATION CHECK ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Print head air purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Setting functions which can be performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.1 Password protection will be canceled in units of Print item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3 Selecting user when power is turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.4 The state where the administrator login is returned automatically . . . . . . 3-11
4. ELECTRIC SIGNAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Wiring precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Input/output (I/O) signal connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Wiring the I/O line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 Connection to input/output (I/O) terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3 Input/output (I/O) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.3.1 Print target detector input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.2 Product speed matching function using a rotary encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3.3 Input function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.3.4 Output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.3.5 Product speed matching function without a rotary encoder (RX2-S only) . . . . . . . . 4-25
5. COMMUNICATION (Optinal on RX2-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Setting Communication Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.1 Setting Communication Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 Transmission Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Transmission Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.1 Common Transmission Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.2 Printings Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.3 Print Data Recall Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3.4 Print data registration transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.3.5 Print Condition Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.3.6 Free Layout Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.7 Calendar Conditions Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.3.8 User Pattern Character Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
●Contents 1
5.3.9 On-line/Off-line Transmission Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.3.10 Remote Operation Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.3.11 Time control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.4 Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.4.1 Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.4.2 Header Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.5 Communication Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.5.1 Signal Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.5.2 Response Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.6 Communication Monitor Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.7 Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5.8 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.8.1 Notes on Product speed matching Feature Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.8.2 Notes on Print Condition Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.9 Communication Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.9.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.9.2 Description of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.9.3 External Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.9.4 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
6. CIRCULATION SYSTEM WORK AND ADJUSTMENT
METHOD . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
6.1 Circulation control screen operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Circulation control contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Replacing the ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.4 How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4.1 Nozzle backwash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4.2 Nozzle orifice disassembly and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.5 Stream alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.6 Cleaning the Gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.7 Replacing the ink filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.8 Replacing the recovery filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.9 Replacing the circulation filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.10 Adjusting the pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.11 Excitation V adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.12 Ink drop state check method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.13 Draining ink from the main ink tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.14 Test of solenoid valve/pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
2 ●Contents
6.15 Long-term Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.15.1 Process prior to long-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.15.2 Startup process after long-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
7. MAINTENANCE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
8. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Outside Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Electrical Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 Circulation System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
9. APPENDIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
● Barcode, 2-dimensional code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
● Setting high-speed printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
● Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
● Icon List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
● Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
●Contents 3
1. DELIVERED GOODS
●Unpack the equipment and check the delivered goods.
No.
Part Name
Qty
Product code.
1
IJ printer body
1
-
2
Basic Operation manual
1
-
3
Manual CD
1
-
4
One-page sheet
1
-
Remarks
Used in ink particles shape
check, ink beam position check,
etc.
5
Magnifying glass
1
451274
6
Tweezers
1
451412
Used when removing the
orifice, etc.
7
Cleaning bottle
1
451058
Filled with makeup and used in
print head cleaning, etc.
8
Beaker with handle
1
451410
Used in print head cleaning, ink
replacement, etc.
9
Wide mouth bottle
1
451126
Use to hold the waste liquid.
10 Wiping paper
1
-
11 Nozzle flat filter 75
1
451037
Spare part.
Recovery system filter.
1
450214
Spare part.
For recovery system filter
sealing.
1
451589
An O ring for the orifice plate
seal (spare part).
Use for wiping after print head
cleaning, etc.
φ16
12 O-ring P12
φ16.6
13 O-ring SF7000-5.6
φ7.2
1-1 ●Delivered goods
No.
Part Name
14 Cable seal
Qty
Product code
Remarks
3
-
Seal for power cable and
external communications cable.
15 Cable clip
1
-
16 Plastic bag with zipper
1
-
Cable clip
Nozzle rubber seal
One page sheet
Use to store the one page
sheet and nozzle rubber seal.
17 Drainage tube
1
451676
18 Signal tower holder
1
-
Used for ink replacement and
filter replacement.
Signal tower
Holder plate
(Packing)
19 Signal tower holder plate
1
Holder
Used for attaching the signal
tower.
Note “Part Name” and “Product code” when ordering the parts.
●Delivered goods 1-2
2. INSTALLING PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
● Ensure that there is no flame- or arc-generating device around the printer.
The ink and makeup are both flammable and may cause fire.
Fire can be generated by matches, lighters, cigarettes, heaters, stoves, gas burners,
welders, grinders and static electricity. Arcs may be generated from open-type relays,
switches, and brush motors. Before handling the ink and makeup, remove static
electricity from your body, peripheral equipment, and so on. In the interest of safety,
position a dry-chemical fire extinguisher near the printer.
● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, install the printer at an
adequately ventilated location.
1 Never install the printer in an enclosed space.
2 Connect exhaust equipment to the printer in order to prevent it from filling with
organic solvent vapor.
CAUTION
● The employed ink and makeup contain organic solvents. Furnish an
adequate space for the ink/makeup handling area and printer
installation site. A space of at least 200 m3 must be provided per print head.
Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided. Follow all regulation in your
country.
(1) Provide a clearance around the IJ printer for daily operation,
300mm
Maintenance area
handling, and maintenance access (see the figure at right).
(2) The print head needs to be cleaned with the makeup while the
300
300
printer is operated and stopped (daily maintenance). Adopt a fixed
mm
mm
structure in consideration of print head cover and print head
IJ printer
removal.
(3) Installation must be completed so that no vibration will be applied to
the IJ printer main body, print head, or print head cable.
750mm
If they are vibrated, print quality deterioration and print irregularity
Top view
may be incurred (the maximum permissible vibration value is
1.96m/s 2 ).
* Leave a maintenance area of
(4) The IJ printer main body must be installed with a levelness error of
at least 20 cm for the upside
not over ±1°.
of printer.
(5) The IJ printer main body must be electrically insulated from the
other equipment (conveyors, packing machines,etc.), photoelectric
switches, and the rotary encoder.
(6) The standard distance between the printing head and the object to be
Distance between the printing head
printed on is as indicated in the right-hand table.
and the object to be printed on
The smaller the clearance between the print head and print target,
the smaller the character height and the better printing.
Nozzle diameter
Distance
(7) The IJ printer proper requires maintenance as the occasion may
10 to 30mm
65μm
demand including replenishment of ink and makeup and
replacement of filter.
(8) If ambient humidity is 85 to 90%RH, you must purge inside of print
head by air.
It is necessary for dry-clean air, regulator for pressure of air and air
filter.
(Quantities of the air are 1L / minutes.)
2-1 ●Installing Precautions
(9) When installing the print head and print head cable, comply with the following conditions.
1 When positioning the end of the print head above the printer main body installation surface,ensure
that the distance between the end of the print head and the installation surface does not exceed 1.5 m.
2 When positioning the end of the print head below the printer main body installation surface, ensure
that the distance between the end of the print head and the installation surface does not exceed 1 m.
Print head cable
IJ printer
main body
Print head
1.5m
Main body installation surface
1m Print head
cable included
Upward printing
Lateral printing
Downward printing
(10) When using the printer for upward or lateral printing, ensure that the rising print head cable upper end
is positioned not more than 0.5 m above the print head.
Print head cable
Bend R
0.5m
Print head
(11) If you fixed the print head, ensure that the minimum bend radius of the print head cable is at least 150 mm.
Handle the headcable with care when wiring it.
If the minimum bend radius is less than 150mm, the tubes and wires inside the headcable might be broken.
(12) The ink stream may bend for some reason or other (due, for instance, to dirt).
The facilities positioned in the direction of ink ejection should be partially covered as needed to avoid ink
accumulation.
(13) When connecting an exhaust duct to the printer, install a damper and adjust the wind velocity at the intake
port to 0.3 to 0.5 m/s. (Use an anemometer for verification. If the wind velocity is too high, the makeup
consumption increases.)
Connect a duct to this port
(50 mm in diameter).
Exhaust duct
connection port
●Installing Precautions 2-2
(14) If you try to fix the print head with a magnetic substance (such as iron), the cover switch will
malfunction resulting in an "Cover Open" error.
This, you must only use nonmagnetic resins or metals for fixing the print head.
(15) In the case of carrying the printer proper, use the handles in the drawing below.
2-3 ●Installing Precautions
3. INSTALLATION CHECK ITEMS
3.1 Print head air purge
If the makeup remains in the electrode section after cleaning or if you use the IJ
printer at a high humidity, moisture condensation may occur within the print head,
causing leakage from the deflection electrode section. It is also important to
remember that dust or splashed ink accumulation on the deflection electrode
section may cause leakage. Performing the following air purge procedure for the
print head interior is effective in preventing such leakage.
(1) Situations requiring an air purge
1 When the printer is used in a highly humid place such as a beer or other beverage can line
(If you use the printer in an environment in which the relative humidity is 85% or higher,
complete the print head air-purge procedure).
2 When a water drainage blow sequence is performed before printing.
3 When the printer is used in a place where a considerable amount of paper powder or other dust
exists.
4 When the printing distance is short so that the end of the print head is splashed with ink.
5 When you use inks that are indicated on the handling guidance of each ink to complete
air-purge procedure.
(2) Air-purging procedure
Introduce clean dry air into the print head air purge connection port (Rc 1/8 (PT 1/8)×screw) in
the rear of the printer main body at a pressure of about 0.1 to 0.3 MPa. If it is possible that the
employed air tanks oil or water, turn it into clean dry air with an air filter, micro-mist separator, or
the like before introducing it into the printer main body.
Back of body
Pressure gauge
0.1〜0.3MPa
Air source
(clean dry air)
Pressure reducing valve
(capacity: Approx. 1L/min)
Print head air purge
connection port
Made of resin. Be careful not to
tighten too tightly when connecting
with a metal joint.
Max. tightening torque:1.5N.m
NOTICE
If the air-purge amount is excessive, print irregularities may occur.
After air-purge pressure adjustment, be sure to perform a printing test to
verify the printing results.
●Print head air purge 3-1
3.2 Setting functions which can be performed
4
(1) Functions
●Sets whether or not each function is enabled or disabled for each login user.
●The operation buttons of disabled functions are not displayed or the screen cannot be entered.
●”User conditions setup” and “Using environment setup” can be started when the administrator logs in.
●The function restrictions state can be checked at the function restrictions screen. (Refer to “Instruction
manual 5.5 Checking functions that can be performed”)
Protected functions
Item
Protected function name
Edit message
●Edit message
●Calendar conditions
●Substitution rules setting
●Count conditions
Select message
●Select message
Save message
●Save message
●Overwrite message
●Print specifications
Print specifications ●Various print setup
●Adjust print parameters
Print format
Maintenance
Password setup
●Print format
●Adjust inter-character space
[Auxiliary functions]
●Manage messages/group
●Create user pattern
●Calibrate touch screen coordinates
●Copy data (IJP→USB)
●Copy data (USB→IJP)
●Edit standard pattern
●Edit substitution rules
●Select language
●Password setup
3-2 ●Setting functions which can be performed
[Environment setup]
●User environment setup
●Date/time setup
●Communication environment setup
●Touch screen setup
[Maintenance work]
●Operation management
●Excitation V update
●Circulation control
●Solenoid valve/pump test
(2) Operation
The administrator is logged in.
1 Press Login management of the Environment setup menu.
The Login management menu is displayed.
Log in as a user with administrator rights when User conditions setup or Using environment setup are
not displayed on Login management menu.
Login management menu
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Startup
Sets function
restrictions for
each user.
Sets whether or
not to select a
user which logs
in when power
is turned on.
Login history
Select login user
Password setup
HOME
User conditions
Using environment
setup
setup
Create new user ID
Delete user ID
Sets the password.
Back
Delete the user.
Create the new user.
2 Press User conditions setup .
The User conditions setup screen is displayed.
A user list is displayed.
User conditions setup
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Current user ID : admin
admin
user2
user4
user5
user3
user5
Back
●Setting functions which can be performed 3-3
3 Select user5 .
“user5” settings are displayed.
User conditions setup
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Modifies the user
name.
ID：5
Displays the kind
of administrator
rights.
Sets function
restrictions.
user5
M
Administrator
Administrator rights
Users
Edit message
access
protect
Select message
access
protect
Save message
access
protect
Print specifications
access
protect
Print format
access
protect
Maintenance
access
protect
Password update
access
protect
Manual Startup
HOME
Cancel
Password
setup
OK
Password
setup
OK
4 Select the administrator rights.
5 Select “access” or “protect” for each function item.
6 Press Password setup and set the password.
An error message appears when the entry in the old password input field does not agree
with the current password.
However, the error does not occur if you type in "IGNOREPW" as the password.
Use this word if you forget your password.
7 Press OK .
The administrator rights, function restrictions, user name, and password for user “user5” are set.
3-4 ●Setting functions which can be performed
3.2.1 Password protection will be canceled in units of Print item
(1) General
●When Password protection is valid, it can be canceled in units of Print item.
●When Administrator logs in, Password protection can be canceled.
(2) Operation
●The character input is made as follows.
(Column 1)
ＵＳＥ
ＢＹ ・
(Column 2)
１４．０２．２０・
●For “user5” whose “Administrator rights” is “Users", set “Edit message” to “protect”.
●Password protection for Column 2 will be canceled.
1 Administrator logs in.
2 As described in Section 3.2 “Setting functions which can be performed”, make
“User conditions setup” enabled for “user5” and set “Edit message” to “protect”.
At this time, Administrator still logs in.
3 Return to “Print description” screen from “Login management menu”.
Change message
Change
message
Select
message
Overwrite
message
Adjust print
parameters
Operation
management
Menu
4 Press Change message on “Print description” screen.
“Change message” screen will be displayed.
Edit message
Print
format
Edit
message
Print
spec.
Various
print setup
<Format Setup>
Individual
setup
:Multiple print formats can be mixed.
Overall
setup
:Character size and inter-character space set
value are matched at all lines.
Only 1 column can be input.
Free layout
:An arbitrary position can be set for each print
item.
Save and Back
Back
●Setting functions which can be performed 3-5
5 Press Edit message on “Change message” screen.
“Edit message” screen will be displayed.
Edit message
[Stop
Message name[ＳＡＭＰＬＥ
１
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
]
M
Manual
−
＋
ＵＳＥ ＢＹ
abcde
fghij
klmno
１４．０２．２０
abcde
fghij
klmno
Prev.item
Next item
《 ←
123‥
Sign
1
2
1
10
20
ＵＳＥ ＢＹ ・
‥ Calendar etc.
ABC… ★◎
Logo
/count
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
▽
0
＋ − × ／ （ ） ． ： ， ！
"
＃ ＄ ％ ＆ ￥ '
■
［ ］
＝ ？ ＜ ＞ ； ＊ ＿
Space
→
》
Delete Back space
OverInsert write
Duplicate Paste
Cal.
cond.
Count
cond.
Startup
HOME
Column 1
Item 1
Char. count
15 / 120
Pint
format
Print
spec.
Password
protection
Password protection
Back
6 Press Password protection on “Edit message” screen.
“Password protection” screen will be displayed.
The character input of all the items is restricted by showing shaded characters.
The cursor is placed on Column 1.
Password protection
Message name[ＳＡＭＰＬＥ
[Stop
１
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
]
M
Manual
−
abcde
fghij
klmno
＋
ＵＳＥ ＢＹ
１４．０２．２０
Prev.item
Startup
HOME
abcde
fghij
klmno
Next item
Next item
protect
access
protect all
Back
3-6 ●Setting functions which can be performed
7 Press Next item .
The cursor moves to Column 2.
Password protection
Message name[ＳＡＭＰＬＥ
[Stop
１
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
]
M
Manual
−
abcde
fghij
klmno
＋
ＵＳＥ ＢＹ
１４．０２．２０
Startup
HOME
abcde
fghij
klmno
Prev.item
Next item
protect
access
access
protect all
Back
8 Press access .
Password protection where the cursor is placed will be canceled and the character’s shade will
disappear.
The character input will be available on Column 2.
Password protection
Message name[ＳＡＭＰＬＥ
[Stop
１
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
]
M
−
abcde
fghij
klmno
＋
ＵＳＥ ＢＹ
１４．０２．２０
Prev.item
Manual
Startup
Apply
HOME
HOME
abcde
fghij
klmno
Apply
Next item
protect
access
protect all
Back
9 Press Apply .
All inputs which are set on “Password protection” screen will be applied.
10 Press HOME .
It will return to “Print description” screen.
11 Log in as “user5” on “Select login user” screen.
Administrator rights “Users” is now applied.
The character input will be available ONLY on Column 2 on “Edit message” screen.
●Setting functions which can be performed 3-7
(3) Supplemental explanation
●The print data which was just edited shall be saved. After saved, when the data is selected, the character
input will be available ONLY on Column 2.
● In case the number of Print lines is changed by Print format, the character input of ALL print items will
be restricted. IJP status will return to default of “before Password protection canceled”.
3-8 ●Setting functions which can be performed
3.3 Selecting user when power is turned on
(1) Functions
●Sets whether or not to select a user which logs in when power is turned on.
Possible login methods
Login method “Disable”
Login method “Enable”
Immediately displays the Print
Operation when power is description screen when the power
turned on
is turned on. The login user is
decided beforehand.
Selects the user which logs in when
the power is turned on.
●The login user can be changed by login user change function even when the login method is “Disable”.
●”User conditions setup” and “Using environment setup” can be started when the administrator is logged in.
(2) Operation
Log in the administrator.
1 Press Login management of the Environment setup menu.
The Login management menu is displayed.
Login management menu
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Startup
Sets function
restrictions for
each user.
Sets whether or
not to select a
user which logs
in when power
is turned on.
Login history
Select login user
Password setup
HOME
User conditions
Using environment
setup
setup
Create new user ID
Delete user ID
Sets the password.
Back
Create the new user.
Delete the user.
●Selecting user when power is turned on 3-9
2 Press Using environment setup .
The Using environment setup screen is displayed.
When "Disable" is selected,
the Print description screen
is immediately displayed
when the power is turned on.
Using environment setup
Login method
[Stop
]
Com=0
Disable Enable
Default login ID : 1
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Startup
admin
HOME
Administrator Automatic Deselect
Disable Enable
Specifies the login user
Cancel
OK
3
OK
Press Login method Enable .
When "Enable" is selected,
selects the user which logs
in when the power is turned
on.
Using environment setup
Login method
[Stop
]
Disable Enable
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Startup
HOME
Administrator Automatic Deselect Disable Enable
Cancel
OK
OK
4 Select the login method and press OK .
Sets whether or not to select a user which logs in when power is turned on.
CAUTION
When the Login method is "Enable", the Select login user screen is displayed when the power is turned
on. At this time, if the set password is forgotten, the program will not advance to the print description
screen. Set and manage the password carefully.
If you forget the password, consult your nearest local distributor.
3-10 ●Selecting user when power is turned on
3.4 The state where the administrator login is returned automatically
(1) Function details
●In case that Administrator logged in to printer and left the screen untouched for 15 minutes, the new
function will switch the login condition to Users from Administrator.
●Flow diagram below shows the steps of switching to User login condition.
Did any User login after
the power on?
YES
NO
YES
Is "Login method" set to
[Enable]?
NO
NO
Is [Default login ID] set to
[Users]?
YES
Switch to User of the
smallest number.
Switch to User of
[Default login ID.]
Switch to User who last
logged in.
(2) Working conditions
●The working conditions of this new function are listed in Table1 below.
Only when all the conditions are met, this new function will work.
Table 1. Model combinations where Copy data is available
No.
Working conditions
1 "Administrator Automatic Deselect" is set to [Enable].
2 One or more than one user are registered as the Login user.
One of the menus below appears on the screen.
(Print description, Change message, Print format, Adjust Inter-character space, Edit message,
3 Count conditions, Print specifications, Various print setup, Save message, Select message,
Adjust print parameters, Operation management, Maintenance menu, Aux. function menu,
Environment setup menu)
4 [Apply] key does not appear on the screen.
● The state where the administrator logs in is returned automatically 3-11
(2) Operation
Log in the administrator.
1 Press Login management of the Environment setup menu.
The Login management menu is displayed.
Login management menu
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Startup
Sets function
restrictions for
each user.
Sets whether or
not to select a
user which logs
in when power
is turned on.
Login history
Select login user
Password setup
HOME
User conditions
Using environment
setup
setup
Create new user ID
Delete user ID
Sets the password.
Back
Delete the user.
Create the new user.
2 Press Using environment setup .
The Using environment setup screen is displayed.
When "Disable" is selected,
the Print description screen
is immediately displayed
when the power is turned on.
Using environment setup
Login method
[Stop
Disable Enable
Default login ID : 1
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
admin
Manual Startup
HOME
Administrator Automatic Deselect
Disable Enable
Specifies the login user
When "Disable" is selected,
it does not return a user
automatically.
Cancel
OK
3-12 ● The state where the administrator logs in is returned automatically
OK
3
Press Administrator Automatic Deselect Enable .
When "Disable" is selected,
the Print description screen
is immediately displayed
when the power is turned on.
Using environment setup
Login method
[Stop
]
Disable Enable
Default login ID : 1
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Admin
Manual Startup
HOME
Administrator Automatic Deselect
Disable Enable
Specifies the login user
Cancel
When "Enable" is selected,
it does return a user
automatically.
OK
OK
4 Select the Administrator Automatic Deselect and press OK .
Administrator Automatic Deselect is set up.
● The state where the administrator logs in is returned automatically 3-13
4. ELECTRIC SIGNAL CONNECTION
4.1 Wiring precautions
(1)If noise enters the IJ printer from the outside, there is the danger of erroneous operation or trouble.
To improve noise resistance, perform wiring work as follows:
1 Separate the power cable to the IJ printer from other power lines for powering use (especially, power
line for a speed control inverter, etc.).
Wiring the power cable through a separate duct is even better.
2 Do not bundle input/output (I/O) signal wiring together with other power lines. Wire them
independently instead.
3 Electrically isolate the print target detector, print head, stand, and IJ printer body from other
machinery and equipment (conveyor, etc.).
4 Separate the print target detector wiring from other power lines.
5 Perform that all electrical wiring, connections and grounding comply with applicable cords.
(When erroneous operation was caused by noise, etc., use a dedicated ground.)
Print target
Stand
Conveyor
Print head
IJ printer body
Print stop
Ready
3
4
Print target detector
5 Ground
M
1 Primary power source
Motor power line
(2) Connection to power supply
Use a suitable plug and always connect the power source to a protective ground. In addition, arrange the
receptacles near the IJ printer so that removal is easy.
4-1 ●Wiring precautions
(3) Precautions related to welding current of welder
Signal (weak electric) ground and frame ground are connected because the ink drops of the IJ printer
are electrically charged.
Nozzle Ink column Charge electrode
+++
+++
The ink drops are electrically charged by impressing a voltage between the charging electrode and ink column as
shown at the left.
Therefore, the ink always becomes signal ground.
In addition, since the ink is always connected to frame
ground by the clamp, etc. of the circulation path, separating
signal ground and frame ground is difficult.
Signal ground
Charge theory
Therefore, when a large current (for example, the welding current of a welder) flows from the
outside through frame ground, the current is also diverted to signal ground and the PC boards may
be damaged. For this reason, when performing welding work near the IJ printer, proceed as follows:
Method
Be sure to insulate the printhead and IJ printer frame to keep the welding current from flowing to
the control section of the printer, and to make a separate ground connection for the printer.
If this method is used, welding work becomes possible even while the IJ printer is operating.
IJ printer body frame
Print head unit
Primary power cable
Stand (option)
E
Spaced by insulator
Welding work cautions
WARNING
●Fire is strictly forbidden around the IJ printer
The ink and makeup are both flammable. Welding sparks may cause ignition or a fire.
Take measures so that sparks do not enter the surrounding area whether or not the IJ
printer is operating, and ventilate sufficiently.
Just in case, ensure safety by installing a powder type fire extinguisher nearby.
●Wiring precautions 4-2
4.2 Input/output (I/O) signal connection
4.2.1 Wiring the I/O line
Open the top cover and run the I/O line wiring from the lead-in port on the side and connect it to external
connection terminal boards 1 and 2 and the external communications connector inside the IJ printer.
CAUTION
When performing wiring work, always turn off the power.
During normal use, leave the top cover closed.
Ethernet communication connector
(Option: Depending on models)
Terminal blocks 1
Lead-in Port
Communication connector (Optional on RX2-B)
[Lead-in port]
W
H
Name
For separate code
d
Cable outside
diameter range Size/Dimension
φ4.5〜10(M16)
For external communications φ3.5〜10
For print target detector/
φ3.5〜7(M12)
for encoder
For reciprocative printing,
Print-in-progress,
φ4.5〜10(M16)
Print.complete, print stop,
online, remote signal
For Ready, Fault, Warning
φ4.5〜10(M16)
19(d)
38(W)×17(H)
15(d)
19(d)
19(d)
CAUTION
Use cables with an outside diameter within the range specified above. Firmly tighten
the lead-in port lock nut.
In addition, do not bundle weak electric system and strong electric system cables
together inside and outside the IJ printer so that the weak electric system signals
(signals to terminal board 1 and external communication connector) are not affected by
strong electric system signals (power source).
Especially, absolutely never bundle together the print target detector and print stop
signals and the power source and Ready to print signal cable and do not wire them
inside the same duct.
4-3 ●Input/output (I/O) signal connection
Lead-in port connection method
Set screw
[Lead-in port]
Cable seal block
Cable seal block
Seal
Lock nut
Cable
Seal
Cable
1 Remove the lock nut.
2 Pass the cable through as shown
in the figure.
3 Tighten the lock nut.
Tighten the lock nut securely
using a tool.
(
)
1 Remove the set screw and remove
the cable seal block from the body.
2 Separate the cable seal block.
3 Wrap the outside of the cable with
seal as shown in the figure.
Wrap the seal so that there is
no gap between it and the cable
seal block.
4 Reassemble the cable seal block by
following the opposite procedure.
(
)
●Input/output (I/O) signal connection 4-4
4
4.2.2 Connection to input/output (I/O) terminals
[Overview of Terminals and Connectors]
The terminal blocks and connectors for wiring are located behind the electrical access door (upper
front panel door).
External connection
terminal block1
TB1
Communication connector
CAUTION
Faulty wiring causes the substrate breakdown.
Before wiring, be sure to confirm the terminal signal.
[Usage for the External connection terminal block 1 (TB1)]
● Applicable cable size
: AWG24 to 16 (Φ0.5 to 1.3)
● Wire covering to be stripped : 8 to 9 mm
Wire (Twist the wire.)
1 Press
Stripped
2 Insert
Terminal block
(TB1)
4-5 ●Input/output (I/O) signal connection
[ Connection to the external connection terminal block (TB1 of EZJ127 P.W.B) ]
● The I/F signal with conveyer is connected.
● NPN/PNP interface can be selected for the print target detector and a part of I/O signals.
● Totem pole/Open collector(NPN) can be selected for the encoder signal.
● Pin #4, #5 and #14 to 23 --- RX2-S:Standard, RX2-B: Option
Pin
No.
Name
NPN Interface
Input/output
PNP Interface
NPN
PNP
1
Power supply for Print target detector
Output
2
Print target detector
3
Ground for Print target detector
4
Print stop
5
Signal ground
6
Power supply for encoder
7
Encoder signal (Totem pole)
Input
8
Encoder signal (Open collector NPN)
Input
9
Ground for Encoder
● DC24V, 100mA max. (*1)
● Power supply, NPN / PNP can be selected
by SW1.
Input
Input
● NPN / PNP can be selected by SW2
● RX2-S: Standard, RX2-B: Option
Output
● DC24V, 100mA max. (*1)
● Totem pole / Open collector (NPN) can
be selected by SW1
● Power supply can be selected by SW1
-
10 Ready
-
Output
-
11 Signal ground
-
-
-
12 Fault
-
Output
-
13 Warning
-
Output
-
14 Deflection voltage ON/OFF signal
Input
15 Reciprocative print signal
Input
16 Run signal
Input
17 Reset signal
Input
18 Stop signal
Input
19 Print-in-progress / Print-complete
Output
20 Online output
Output
21 Universal output 1
Output
22 Universal output 2
Output
23 Signal ground
Remarks
● Open collector (NPNn) only.
● NPN / PNP can be selected by SW2
● RX2-S: Standard, RX2-B: Option
● Print-in-progress/ Print-complete can be
selected with screen operation.
● NPN / PNP can be selected by SW2
● RX2-S: Standard, RX2-B: Option
-
(*1): The supplying power capacity for print target detector and encoder is up to 100mA in total.
●Input/output (I/O) signal connection 4-6
SW1
EZJ127 board
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
SW2
Input : NPN
Output : NPN
SW1
Input : PNP
Output : PNP
ON
OFF
SW2
Input : NPN
Output : PNP
Input : PNP
Output : NPN
ON
OFF
(Precautions when using combination of NPN/PNP interfaces)
● Use either NPN or PNP interface for input/output signals #4 to 5 and #14 to 23. Do not use a
combination of the interfaces for these input/output signals.
● Interfaces can be combined for units of print material sensor signals (#1 to 3), encoder signals (#6 to 9),
input/output signals (#4 to 5, #14 to 18) and status output signals (#19 to 22).
(For example, PNP interface can be used for print target detector and NPN interface can be used for
status output signals (#19 to 22).
4-7 ●Input/output (I/O) signal connection
4.3 Input/output (I/O) specifications
When handling external signals, observe the voltage, current, and time given in this manual.
Operation is not guaranteed if external signals are not handled properly.
[Input / Output Signal Specifications]
(1) Input signals (external device →IJ printer)
No. Signal name
1
Print object
detection
2 Printing stop
Function
Indicates the arrival of a print object.
Issues instructions so that printing does
not start even if a print object is
detected.
Issues instructions so as to change the
Reciprocative order of characters to be printed.
3
printing
OFF:Transport in normal direction
ON :Transport in reverse direction
4
5
6
7
8
Encoder
(for speed
follow-up)
Makes a pulse entry in proportion to the
print object transport speed.
Functionally the same as the RUN key
on the operator panel.
Run *2)
Performs processing from "ink
injection" to "ready to print"
Functionally the same as the Reset key
and the Message Delete key on the
Reset
Error Message window.
Resets an error.
Functionally the same as the STOP key
on the operator panel.
Stop
Stops injection of ink (automatic
flushing).
Functionally the same as the Deflection
Voltage Control function in a message
which appears when the CONTROL
High voltage
key on the operator panel is pressed.
ON/OFF
The deflection voltage is turned on
(Ready) and off (Standby) alternately
each time this signal is entered.
Electrical characteristics
+NPN input
PNP input
+24 V output (Up to 100mA *1)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 12 mA max.; I in(at24V): 12 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
+24 V output (Up to 100mA *1)
NPN open collector Totem pole
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 20mA max.; I in(at24V): 20mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
ON state :
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
V in: 1V max. *3)
*1) The current supply capacity of +24V for Print object detector and encoder is up to 100mA in total.
*2) RUN signal instructs to inkjet ink. Handle the signal with care.
*3) Ensure that the external device transistor leak current doesn't exceed 0.1mA while the input signal is OFF.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-8
(2) Output signals (IJ printer →external device)
No.
Signal name
Function
Operates when the IJ printer is ready for
Ready
printing or in input mode.
Fault
Operates when the IJ printer is fault state.
Operates when the IJ printer is in alarm
Warning
condition.
Print. in
Operates when the IJ printer is engaged in
Progress *4)
printing.
Operates when the IJ printer completes a
Print.
printing process
Completed *4)
(outputs a pulse of up to 1 second).
Operates when the IJ printer is in online
Online output
mode
1
2
3
4
5
Electrical characteristics
Open collector (NPN)
● Sink current: 20 mA max.
● ON voltage: 0.5 V or less
● Operating voltage: 30 V or less
Open collector (NPN) Open collector (PNP)
● ON voltage:
● I in: 10 mA max.
0.5 V or less
(Load resister:
● Sink current:
2.2kΩ or more)
20 mA max.
● ON voltage: +24V
● Operating voltage:
30 V or less
*4): As regards "Print. in progress" and "Print. completed", one must be selected from a screen.
4.3.1 Print target detector input
This function inputs the IJ printer print start signal.
Use a no-contact (transistor) type print target detector. An optoelectronic sensor with built-in amplifier
which uses a light beam to detect the print target is ideal. When the total current consumption of the print
target detector and the rotary encoder is 100mA or less, power can be supplied from the power supply
built into the IJ printer. When the total current consumption exceeds 100mA, provide a dedicated power
supply.
In this case, perform wiring and setting as described below.
(1) Print target detector connection method
(a) When NPN interface and IJ printer built-in
power supply are used
(b) When PNP interface and IJ printer built-in
power supply are used
TB1
Power
Signal
GND
Print target detector
・SW1 "3": ON
・SW1 "5": ON
・SW1 "6": OFF
SW1 setting
ON
1
2
3
4
4-9 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
5
6
7
8
TB1
1
DC24V
2
Signal
3
GND
4
NC
ON
OFF
Power
Signal
GND
Print target detector
ON
2
3
DC24V
2
Signal
3
GND
4
NC
・SW1 "3": OFF
・SW1 "5": ON
・SW1 "6": ON
SW1 setting
1
1
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
(c) When NPN interface and dedicated power
supply are used
(d) When PNP interface and dedicated power
supply are used
TB1
TB1
DC24V
Power
1
Signal
GND
GND
24VDC dedicated
power supply
DC24V
2
Signal
3
NC
4
NC
Power
DC24V
Signal
GND
GND
24VDC dedicated
power supply
3
4
5
6
7
2
Signal
3
GND
4
NC
ON
・SW1 "3": OFF
・SW1 "5": OFF
・SW1 "6": ON
SW1 setting
ON
ON
2
NC
Print target detector
Print target detector
・SW1 "3": ON
・SW1 "5": OFF
SW1 setting
・SW1 "6": OFF
ON
1
1
8
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
(2) Print target detector specifications
(a) When NPN interface is used
Internal circuit diagram
1
DC24V
Signal
IL
SW1-5
2
DC24V
Tr
3
GND
IJ printer
Print target detector
When the IJ printer input circuit is a current drive load for the print target detector output circuit and
output transistor Tr of the print target detector is ON, it becomes the print start signal input.
Use an output transistor Tr which satisfies the following specifications (NPN/PNP):
Withstand voltage
: 24VDC or greater
.
. 10mA)
Maximum drive current : 12mA or greater (IL=
Residual voltage
: 2V or less
Leakage current
: 0.1mA or less
The IJ printer built-in power supply specifications are:
Power supply voltage
: 24V
Maximum supply current
: 100mA *Note 1
*Note 1: Total power supply to print target detector and rotary encoder is max. 100mA
(b) When PNP interface is used
Internal circuit diagram
1
Power
Tr
Signal
GND
IL
DC24V
2
3
SW1-6
Print target detector
IJ printer
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-10
(3) Print target detector signal noise filter
(a) IJ printer built-in noise filter setting.
This function uses to filter the normal noise generated at the print target detector signal and noise
generated by water drops, etc. with CR.
The target sensor filter function (See “Instruction manual 4.14 Set the print specifications”) is effective
against sensor chattering.
Internal circuit diagram
1kΩ
SW1-8
2.2μF
Time constantｔ＝2.2ms
SW1 setting・SW1 "8" ON : Filter ON
OFF: Filter OFF
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
(b) Addition of external noise filter
In case that the built-in noise filter cannot eliminate the noise, add the following additional CR filter outside
of IJ Printer.
R1(Addition)
Power
1
SW1-5
Signal
2
GND
3
DC24V
Tr
Print target detector
C1(Addition)
IJ printer
If R1=1kohm (0.5W) and C1=1micro farad /25V, the CR time constant=1ms. If R1=1kohm (0.5W) and
C1=1micro farad /25V, the CR time constant=1ms. The filter could eliminate a several hundred micro-seconds
of noise. If you need to eliminate bigger noise, add an additional capacitor in parallel with C1.
Notes for addition of CR filter:
- R1 has to be less than 1kohm.
- C1 should be temperature compensating ceramic capacitor. If it is difficult to find such type of
capccitor, select high-precision and good temperature characteristics type of high dielectric
ceramic capacitor as much as possible.
- R1 and C1 should be placed near IJ Printer as much as possible.
4-11 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
(4) Relationship between print object detection signal and printing operation
3 ms min.
Print object
detection signal
3 ms min.
OFF ON
Printing operation
Printing
*: The printing preparation time minimum
value varies with the print dot matrix, ink
drop use, etc., however, the right table can
be used as a reference.
Printing
*Printing preparation
time
(Print start delay
adjustment = 0)
(Printing interval)
Nozzle size
Reference of printing preparation
time minimum value
65µm
9 ms
The accurate printing preparation time can be calculated by following formula.
Necessary printing preparation time (Note 1) = [(One scan time) × (N + 1) ] (ms)
(One scan time) =
(Number of vertical dots + Character width) × Ink drop use percentage
Excitation frequency (kHz)
N : (One scan time×N) >
= Remaining number that is set to "a"
(a: Refer to the right table.)
(ms)
Nozzle size
a
65µm
5.5
Excitation frequency: 68.9 (Model RX2, with 65µm nozzle and JP-K69 ink)
(Note 1) Time for repeated printing of fixed characters. When using the communications function or
2-dimensional bar code function, it will be longer than the time calculated from this formula.
When the speed is followed up, the number of encoder pulses shown below will serve as reference for the
minimal value of print space:
Minimal time of 1 pulse =
(Number of vertical dots + Character width) × Ink drop use percentage
Excitation frequency (kHz)
+
a
Number of necessary
encoder pulses = Minimal time of 1 pulse
(ms)
Frequency division setting value (pulse)
(5) Tracking function
● This function achieves printing even when two or more print objects are positioned between the print
object detector and print head.
● Up to four print objects can be positioned between the print object detector and print head.
● This function cannot be exercised simultaneously with the repeat-printing function.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-12
4.3.2 Product speed matching function using a rotary encoder
The product speed matching function is used when the speed of the print target or the conveyer carrying the
print target changes while the IJ printer is printing. If this function is not used, when the speed changes, the
width of the printed characters may change and the characters may be difficult to read.
When the product speed matching function is used, it is necessary to input an external electric pulse having a
period proportional to the speed to the IJ printer. Ordinarily a rotary encoder is used for this purpose. The IJ
printer can print each vertical line of the printed message in synchronization with the pulses from the rotary
encoder.
4.3.2-1 Rotary encoder specifications wiring and switch setting
(1) The specifications of the connectable rotary encoders are:
Output waveform
: Square wave (duty: 30to 70%)
Output withstand voltage : 24VDC or greater
Load current
: 20mA or greater
Leakage current
: 0.1mA or less
Power supply voltage
: 24VDC
Current consumption
: 100mA or less *Note 1
(When the IJ printer built-in power supply is used, the total current
consumption with the detectors is 100mA or less.)
Input signal frequency
: 200kHz or less
Number of pulses
: Decided by production line conditions
*Note 1) The maximum power supply capacity of the IJ printer built-in power supply (24VDC) is
100mA. When the current consumption of the detector and encoder exceeds 100mA and the
power supply voltage is outside 24V, use a dedicated power supply and perform the wiring
work described in (3) below.
(2) Encoder wiring and setting of SW1 on PC board EZJ127 when IJ printer built-in power supply is used
(a) When open collector output and IJ printer built-in (b) When totem pole output and IJ printer built-in
power supply are used
power supply are used
TB1
24V
24V
Signal
6
GND
24V
GND
8
Signal
9
GND
SW1 setting
ON
3
4
7
8
GND
9
Rotary encoder
ON
2
6
Signal
GND
Rotary encoder
1
24V
Signal
7
Signal
TB1
24V
5
4-13 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
6
7
8
OFF
SW1 setting
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
(3) Encoder wiring and setting of SW1 on EZJ127 PC board when used with a dedicated power supply
● Wiring used for a dedicated power supply differs according to output interface of the encoder, but can be the same
depending on power supply voltage.
(c) When open collector output and dedicated power (d) When totem pole output and dedicated power
supply are used
supply are used
(+12V, +24V)
DC dedicated power supply
+V
+V
GND GND
+V
Signal
(+12V, +24V)
DC dedicated power supply
TB1
6
GND
8
6
+V
7
+V
Signal
GND
Rotary encoder
7
GND
GND
9
TB1
Signal
8
Signal
9
GND
Rotary encoder
● Switch setting for a dedicated power supply differs according to power supply voltage, but can be the same
depending on output interface of the encoder.
SW1 setting (for 24V dedicated power supply)
ON
ON
SW1 setting (for 12V dedicated power supply)
ON
ON
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
OFF
*For open collector output and totem pole output
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
OFF
*For open collector output and totem pole output
4.3.2-2 Setting to IJ printer
(1) Make the settings related to “Product speed matching” and “Pulse rate div. factor” at the “Print specifications”
screen. (See “Instruction manual 4.14 Set the print specifications”.)
●Set “Product speed matching” to “1: Enable”.
●Set “Pulse rate div. factor” as required. This function lowers (makes the period longer) the frequency of the
input pulses inside the IJ printer. The divided pulses become the pulses used in printing.
<Description of pulse division function>
(When division factor: 001) (When division factor: 002)
Pulses from encoder
●The rotary encoder signal pulse frequency, the print scan frequency and the division factor have the
relationship shown in (Eq. 1).
Encoder pulse frequency [kHz] =
Print scan count [kHz]
Division factor (l/n)
----(Eq. 1)
●Set “Speed compensation” at the “Print specifications” screen to “Enable”, as required.
<What is “Speed compensation”?>
This function reduces changes in the print start delay when the conveyer speed changes.
CAUTION
This function cannot be used when the product speed matching function is not used.
In addition, this function cannot be used when “Repeat print” mode is set at the “Print specifications”
screen.
When “Speed compensation” is enabled, print start is delayed for 30 scans.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-14
4.3.2-3 Method of calculating the conditions which allow product speed
matching
Calculate to find whether the Ink drop use and division factor are the conditions which allow product speed
matching, based on the following.
Print quality improves as the calculation shown below is performed and the Ink drop use becomes smaller.
In addition, when changing Ink drop use, check the print quality.
(1) Set the Character width on the "Print specifications" as below depending on the Ink drop use.
Large
Small
Ink drop use
Character width set value
1/1
002
1/2
001
1/3 to 1/16
000
(2) The maximum print scan frequency is found from the following equation by means of the printed character
width and highest conveyer speed. Substitute the value according to the nozzle diameter of the type used at d.
Max. number of print scans [kHz] =
Number of horizontal dots -1
1
Highest conveyer speed [m/min]× 60 ×
Print length [mm]-d[mm]
Nozzle diameter
d
65μm
0.33
------(Eq. 2)
(3) Next, use (Eq. 3) to check if the maximum print scan frequency found from (Eq. 2) can be matched at IJ
printer set print speed.
Excitation frequency (f)
[kHz] (Eq. 3)
(Number of vertical dots + character width set value +1) × (Denominator of ink drop use (*1))
> Max. number of print scans [kHz]
● When the result of (Eq. 3) is smaller than the maximum print scan frequency (Eq. 2), product speed
matching is not performed normally and the character width becomes large.
(*1) The value is 3 when the ink drop use
is 1/3.
Normal
Character width large
●In addition, when “Product speed matching error” warning is set, a warning is generated.
In this case, (1) lower the conveyer speed, (2) widen the print character width, or (3) set Ink drop use
larger, so that the maximum print scan frequency becomes smaller than the calculated value of (Eq. 3).
(Makes the IJ printer set print speed faster than the highest conveyer speed.)
(4) The excitation frequency (f) in (Eq. 3) depends on the type of ink used. The excitation frequency by
typical nozzle diameter and ink is shown below. For other inks, refer to the handling guidance of each ink.
Nozzle diameter
Type of ink
Excitation frequency (f)
65μm
JP-K67
68.9kHz
65μm
JP-K33
74.0kHz
65μm
JP-K69
68.9kHz
4-15 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
(5) When a rotary encoder is used, the print character width cannot be changed by changing the IJ printer character
width set value.
When the print character width must be changed, a device (timing belt, pulley, etc.) which varies the conveyer
speed and rotary encoder speed synch signal pulse frequency ratio must be installed.
(6) Restriction of the speed synchronization signal pulse frequency from the rotary encoder
t1 5μs min.(f=200 kHz max)
t3 2 μs min.
Encoder signal
OFF
t2
ON
ON
See that the duty is between 30% and 70%. Duty ＝
t2
t1
×100％
Arrange for encoder signal cycle time (t1) to be at least 5 μs.
Flat period of encoder signal (t3) : 2 μs min.
(7) Rotary encoder selection method and calculation method
The print character width when the product speed matching function is used is determined by the amount of
movement of the product per encoder pulse.
Several examples are introduced below.
Example 1: Calculate the resolution of the rotary encoder when the rotary encoder is connected directly to the
conveyer shaft.
Conveyor
Encoder
Diameter
<Calculation conditions>
●Dot font
●Inter-character space
●Inter-character interval
: 5×7 dots (horizontal direction 5, vertical direction 7)
: 1 dot (1 scan)
: 1.8mm [horizontal direction 6 dots (6 scans)]
(Inter-character dots 5 + inter-characters space 1)
●Diameter of conveyer pulley : 60mm
1 Distance the conveyer moves per 1 revolution of the rotary encoder
60mm×3.14=188.4mm/rev
2 Number of scans which must be executed while the conveyer is moving 1mm
6 scans/1.8mm=3.33 scans/mm
3 Required resolution of the rotary encoder (number of output pulses per 1 revolution of
the rotary encoder)
.
188.4mm/rev × 3.33 scans/mm=628PPR =
(. 2500PPR, Division factor=4)
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-16
Example 2: Calculate the diameter ratio (RT) of the pulley when the rotary encoder is connected to the
conveyer through a pair of pulleys.
Conveyer
Pulley B
Pulley A
Diameter
Encoder
<Calculation conditions>
●Dot font
●Inter-character space
●Inter-character interval
: 5×7 dots (horizontal direction 5, vertical direction 7)
: 1 dot (1 scan)
: 1.8mm [horizontal direction 6 dots (6 scans)]
(inter-character dots 5 + inter-character space 1)
●Diameter of conveyer pulley : 60mm
●Resolution of rotary encoder : 1,000PPR
1 Amount of movement of conveyer per 1 revolution of rotary encoder
60mm × 3.14=188.4mm/rev
2 Number of scans which must be executed while conveyer moves 1mm
6 scans/1.8mm=3.33 scans/mm
3 Necessary number of output pulses (resolution) from rotary encoder
188.4mm/rev × 3.33 scans/mm=628PPR
4 Diameter ratio (RT) of pulley
RT=Diameter of pulley B/diameter of pulley A=1,000PPR/628PPR=Approx. 1.6/1
Example 3: Calculate the necessary rotary encoder resolution when a pulley is installed to the shaft of the
rotary encoder and this pulley is connected to the conveyer.
Diameter
Pulley
Conveyer
Encoder
<Calculation conditions>
●Dot font
7)
●Inter-character space
●Inter-character interval
: 5×7 dots (horizontal direction 5, vertical direction
: 1 dot (1 scan)
: 1.8mm [horizontal direction 6 dots (6 scans)]
(Inter-character dots 5 + inter-character space 1)
1 Amount of movement of conveyer per 1 revolution of rotary encoder
95.5mm × 3.14=300mm/rev
2 Number of scans which must be executed while the conveyer is moving 1mm
6 scans/1.8mm=3.33 scans/mm
3 Necessary number of output pulses (resolution) from rotary encoder
300mm/rev × 3.33 scans/mm=1,000PPR
4-17 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
4.3.3 Input function
The IJ printer can be controlled by inputting print stop, remote operation (“Startup”, “Shutdown”, “Reset”,
“Deflection voltage control”) and reciprocative print switching to pins 4, 5, and 14 to 18 of TB1 by switch or
contact signal from the outside.
Internal circuit diagram
(a) NPN interface input (no voltage input)
24V
4
Print stop
14
Deflection voltage
control
15
Reciprocative print
16
NPN interface input
specifications
4.7kΩ
Startup
*Other signals are
also the same.
17
Reset
18
Shutdown
5
GND
IJ printer
●Each input is activated when contact ON.
●No-contact signal (transistor)
Withstand voltage
: 30VDC or greater
Maximum drive current
: 6mA or greater
Residual voltage
: 2V or less
Leakage current
: 0.1mA or less
Drive method
: Open collector
●Contact signal
Use a relay whose contacts chattering at contacts ON/OFF is 2.0ms or less.
(b) PNP interface input (voltage input)
●Impressed voltage 24 to 30V
24V
4
Print stop
14
Deflection voltage control
15
Reciprocative print
16
Startup
17
Reset
18
Shutdown
*Other signals are
also the same.
4.7kΩ
PNP interface input
specifications
5
GND
IJ printer
●Each input is activated when contact ON.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-18
●No-contact (transistor)
Withstand voltage
Maximum drive current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
Drive method
●Contact signal
: 30VDC or greater
: 6mA or greater
: 2V or less
: 0.1mA or less
: Open collector
Use a relay whose contacts chattering at contacts ON/OFF is 2.0ms or less.
4.3.3-1 Print stop signal input
[Function] This function prevents printing from the outside. (Note that the Ready to print output signal does not
change even if this signal is input from the outside.)
Input ON - In the IJ printer Ready to print state, the printer does not print even if the product target
detector is turned ON. However, the product being printed cannot be aborted.
Input OFF - In the IJ printer Ready to print state, the printer prints when the product target detector is
turned ON.
Print stop signal
OFF
ON
0ms or
greater
50ms or greater
Print target detector
Printing-in-progress signal
20ms or greater
50ms or greater
50ms or greater
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
[No printing]
Printing
Printing operation
Printing
●Regarding the signal levels, the ON state indicates low level and the OFF state indicates high level.
●The tracking function cannot be used.
In the tracking mode, the timing which stops printing by print stop signal cannot be specified.
●When Repeat print is set, the IJ printer is controlled by a print start signal generated internally.
4.3.3-2 Reciprocative print signal input
[Function] This function switches the order of the characters to be printed.
Input OFF : Forward direction
(Example)
Input ON : Reverse direction
When OFF
When ON
123
Reciprocative print signal
Product target detection signal
OFF
123
(The arrow indicates
the sequence of printing. )
ON
OFF
ON
Min. 100ms
ON
Min. 100ms
*When the user environment setup item "Change Character Orientation" was set to "Reverse direction
printing", provide a minimum interval of 100ms up to input of the print target detector signal after
changeover (ON→OFF, OFF→ON) of the reciprocative printing signal.
When the Change Character Orientation was set to "normal or inverted" or "Character orientation 0 or
3", provide a minimum interval of 400ms up to input of the print target detector signal after signal
changeover.
4-19 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
4.3.3-3 Remote startup signal input
[Function] This function inputs the same operations as the IJ printer operation state operation keys (“Startup”,
“Shutdown”, “Reset”, “Deflection voltage control”(standby state and Ready to print state
switching)) by external switch or contact signal.
(a) Judgment conditions
(a-1) Remote signals in general
1 Remote signal ON time t1 shall be 100ms or greater.
t1
Remote signal
2 Take measures so that multiple remote signals are not turned ON simultaneously.
If multiple signals are turned ON simultaneously, the signals will not be accepted.
3 Signals cannot be received in the following cases:
i When a confirmation window is open
ii When the Circulation control screen is opened by maintenance function
iii When the Touch screen coordinate correction screen is opened by auxiliary function
(a-2)“Deflection voltage control”
1 When “Deflection voltage control” is input continuously, a certain OFF period is necessary.
When t2 is 10ms or less, OFF is not detected and the signal is not received.
t2
Deflection voltage control
2 Time until state changes after “Deflection voltage control” is input
t3: Within 3 seconds (Standby→Ready)
t3
Deflection voltage control
Ready signal
t4: Within 100ms (Ready→Standby)
t4
Deflection voltage control
Ready signal
3 When “Deflection voltage control” is turned ON, state confirmation is necessary.
If “Deflection voltage control” is turned on by mistake during printing, printing is aborted even in
the process of printing and the IJ printer is switched from the Ready state to the Standby state.
To prevent erroneous printing, input this signal when the printer is in a not printing state.
4 When the Product speed matching function is used, and when the print description is changed when
the line is stopped during printing, etc., the IJ printer will enter the Standby state by this signal and
the print description can be changed.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-20
(a-3) “Reset signal”
1 Input this signal when the fault signal is ON.
In addition, after signal input, check if “Fault” is cleared.
2 Turn on the “Reset signal” 30 seconds or longer after the IJ printer power is turned on.
3 The time until the fault is cleared after the “Reset signal” is input
t5: within 100ms
t5
Reset signal
Fault signal
(a-4)“Startup signal”
1 The “Startup signal” is a signal that specifies an automatic procedure up to ink ejection.
Handle it with care.
2 When the “Startup signal” is turned ON during ink stop processing, it is ignored.
3 Turn on the “Startup signal” 30 seconds or longer after the IJ printer power is turned on.
In addition, input this signal after checking if the “Fault” is cleared.
Moreover, it takes about 2 minutes for the IJ printer to enter the Ready to print state after the
“Startup signal” is turned ON.
(a-5) “Shutdown signal”
1 Turn off the power after confirming that the IJ printer has entered the Stop state after the “Shutdown
signal” is turned ON
It takes about 3 minutes for the IJ printer to enter the Stop state after the “Shutdown signal” is turned
ON.
2 The time until the state changes after the “Shutdown signal” is input
t6: within 100ms
t6
Shutdown signal
Ready signal
(Notes)
(1) For key input, input must be confirmed, but when an external signal is input, processing is
performed in accordance with the signal instructions. Especially, since “Startup”(startup
signal) specifies ejection of the ink, handle it with care.
(2) When a confirmation window is opened, input of all remote operation signals is disabled.
Re-input the signals after the confirmation window is closed.
When the line monitor screen is displayed, input of all the remote operation signals is
disabled.
(3) When the Touch screen coordinate correction or Circulation control screen is displayed,
input of all the remote operation signals is disabled. Re-input the signals after a different
screen was displayed.
(4) The remote operation signals are enabled even when a rotary encoder is used and the
conveyer is stopped during printing.
(5) When the Shutdown signal is input while the Fault window is open, the ink is stopped with
the window remaining displayed.
4-21 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
4.3.4 Output function
The state of the IJ printer is monitored by connecting the print output (“Print-in-progress” or “Print.complete”),
online output, Ready, Fault, and Warning signals to pins 10 to 23 of TB1. (No-contact (transistor) output)
Internal circuit diagram
(a) NPN interface output (no-voltage output)
Vd
19
IL
20
23
10
Print output
Online output
GND
VCE
Ready
11
GND
12
Fault
13
Warning
*Other signals are also the same.
IJ printer
●The output transistor is open collector, and the logic is transistor ON at operation ON.
●The voltage and current used by the external equipment must satisfy the following specifications:
IL <
=20mA (VCE : TYP0.6V, MAX2V)
Vd <
= DC30V
●Wiring precautions
TB1
20
Online output
23
GND
Load
*Other signals are also the same.
●When the load is a relay, solenoid, or other inductive load, connect a diode to prevent generation of a
counter electromotive force in parallel with the load.
●The load circuit is DC dedicated. It cannot be used with an AC load.
(b) PNP interface output (voltage output)
19
R
IL
20
23
24V
Print output
Online output
VCE
GND
IJ printer
●The output transistor is open collector and the logic is transistor ON (voltage output) at operation ON.
●When used with external equipment, the following shall be satisfied:
IL <
=10mA(VCE : TYP0.6V, MAX2V), Guide line of R : R => 2.2kΩ
Withstand voltage 50VDC or greater (2 times or more of the voltage used)
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-22
4.3.4-1 Print output signal (NPN/PNP interface output : TB1-19)
[Function] This function outputs a signal to the outside at IJ Printer Print.complete or Print-in-progress.
(a) Print-in-progress and Print.complete switching
Switching of the Print-in-progress and Print.complete signals is set at the User environment setup screen.
(See Instruction manual “6.1 Set the user environment”.)
(b) Signal timing
1s or greater
Printing operation
Under 1s
Print-in-progress
Print-in-progress signal
ON
OFF
Print.complete signal
ON
*
OFF
1s
*When the next printing operation started within 1 second, turned OFF at
the stage at which the printing operation started.
4.3.4-2 Online output signal (NPN/PNP interface output : TB1-20)
[Function] This function outputs a signal to the outside when the IJ printer is online.
4.3.4-3 Ready output (NPN interface output only : TB1-10)
[Function] This function outputs a signal to the outside to indicate IJ printer Ready-to-print state or input mode
state. (It is used to stop the conveyer when the IJ printer cannot print to prevent the product from
flowing without being printed.)
4.3.4-4 Fault signal output (NPN interface output only : TB1-12)
[Function] This function outputs an “IJ printer in fault mode” signal to the outside.
4.3.4-5 Warning signal output (NPN interface output only : TB1-13)
[Function] This function outputs an “IJ printer in warning mode” signal to the outside.
4-23 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
4.3.4-6 External communication (RS-232C)
External equipment is connected to the IJ printer by serial communication of RS-232C.
Pin No.
Name
Input/Output
Remarks
1
(NC)
-
2
RD
Input
3
SD
Output
4
DTR
-
5
SG
-
6
DSR
-
Connect with DTR by IJ printer side.
7
RTS
-
Connect with CTS by IJ printer side.
8
CTS
-
Connects with RTS by IJ printer side.
9
(NC)
-
Connect with DSR by IJ printer side.
Attaching screw : inch screw
Connector on EZJ127 board :9-pin D sub-connector(plug)
IJ printer
SD
Transmission
External unit
Output
RD
#3
RD
Reception
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
SD
Input
#2
#4
#6
#7
#8
#5
SG
SG
FG
Cable length : maximum 5 m
Turn OFF SW1-bit7 on EZJ 127 board.
SW1
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
CAUTION
●Do not bundle it together with heavy-current signals inside and outside the equipment
so that it will not be influenced by noise from a heavy-current signals (a connection
signal to the power supply, etc).
●Use a cable which is as short as possible.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-24
4.3.5 Product speed matching function without a rotary encoder
(RX2-S only)
4.3.5-1 Auto product speed matching function
Auto product speed matching function is used for detecting the change of speed of the conveyer carrying
print target using the print target detector connected to the IJ printer, and prints each vertical line of the print
according to the change of speed in the same way as the Speed matching function using a rotary encoder.
Ensure to confirm the print start position and check for the slip of the print target by thoroughly testing before
using this function. If the print start position or the character width of print vary widely as a result of the test,
use the Speed matching function using a rotary encoder.
Cases that the speed can not be matched
No.
Conditions of use
1
In case the print target slips on the conveyer between after the print target passes the print target
detector and before IJ printer complete printing.
2
In case the carrying speed changes or the conveyer stops between after the print target passes the
print target detector and before IJ printer complete printing.
4.3.5-2 Print target detector
●Use a no-contact (transistor) output type print target detector with a photoelectric sensor with built-in
amplifier which detects the target using the optical beam.
●To start the print from the edge of the print target, place the print target detector so that the "Distance
between the print head and print target detector" is larger in width than print target.
4.3.5-3 IJ Printer setup
●Configure the setting for "Product speed matching", "Print target width", and "Actual print width" on "Print
Specifications" screen. (See Chapter 4.14 "Set the print specifications" in the Instruction Manual)
●Set "Auto" for "Product speed matching".
●Enter "Print Target width" and "Actual Print width" in mm.
The value for "Actual Print width" must be smaller than "Print Target width".
●"Enable" the "Speed compensation" as required.
Precaution
When "Speed compensation" is enabled, the print start position is delayed 2 scans
because calculation is performed to reduce the change of the print start position.
The position accuracy of the print start position may be worse than the product speed
matching function using a rotary encoder, because calculation is performed by sensing
the print target detector.
●When setting the "Sensor filter" on "Print specifications", set the value as small as possible so that the
Sensor filter function is completed before the target passes the print target detector.
●"Repeat count" on "Print specifications" can not be used at the same time.
●The Character width on the "Print specifications" is automatically set as below depending on the Ink drop
use.
Ink drop use
1/1
1/2
1/3 to 1/16
Character width
002
001
000
4.3.5-4 Carrying speed
●Set the minimum speed the target print is carried by conveyer to 1m/min.
●If the carrying speed the IJ printer detects is faster than the speed of when the printed without Speed
matching, print is made with the same interval as when the Speed matching function is not used.
(At the time speed exceeds the limit speed in the condition)
●If "Print Target width" or "Actual Print width" on the "Print specifications" is not entered, the print is made
with the same interval as when the Speed matching function is not used.
4-25 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
5.COMMUNICATION
(Optional on RX2-B)
5.1 Overview
The functions described in this document are used to transmit printings and their registration numbers and
enter them into the IJ printer with an external device connected to the IJ printer via an RS-232C serial
communication line.
(1) Printings transmission
● An "item number" and "character string" are transmitted from the external device to the IJ printer.
● The IJ printer receives the "item number" and "character string" and then makes preparations for
making designated prints.
● The printings of print item for which bar codes or increased-width printings can also be transmitted by
the communication functions.
● When a number (alphabetical character) is transmitted via a communications link to a count setting
digit, the default value can be set.
(2) Print data recall transmission
● A print data "message number" is transmitted from the external device to the IJ Printer.
● The IJ printer recalls print data designated by a "message number" and makes preparations for making
prints.
(3) Print data registration transmission
● Transmits Print data's "message number" and "message name" from external unit to the IJ printer.
● The IJ printer provides a "message name" and registers data currently being printed as print data of
"registration No."
(4) Print condition transmission
● The external device transmits "print specifications" and "print format" to the IJ printer.
● The IJ printer receives the "print specifications" and "print format", and prepares for making prints
under the specified conditions.
(5) Free layout transmission
● An ''item number'' and ''amount of move'' are transmitted from the external device to the IJ printer.
● The IJ printer receives the ''item number'' and ''amount of move'', and then moves the item specified to
the specified position.
(6) Calendar conditions transmission, count conditions transmission
● Transmits and sets "initial values", "range" of count conditions, and "offset", "zero suppress" of
calendar condition etc. from external unit to the IJ printer.
●Communication 5-1
(7) User pattern character transmission
● This function is used to transmit a user pattern and enter it into the IJ printer.
● A transmitted user pattern can be edited using the "Create user pattern" function, which is provided as
an auxiliary function.
(8) On-line/off-line transmission procedure
● Specifies switch of online state and offline state from external unit to the IJ printer.
(9) Remote operation transmission
● Specifies ink ejection/stop, deflection voltage control (on/off) and error reset from external unit to the
IJ printer.
(10) Time control
● Transmits and sets "current time", "calendar time", etc., from external unit to the IJ printer.
● Inquires current time from external unit to the IJ printer and the IJ printer returns "current time".
(11) Communication buffer
● The print contents received through print content transmission will not be reflected in printing
immediately, but will be temporarily held in buffer.
● The print contents are fetched from the buffer one by one for each printing, and reflected in
subsequent printing.
5-2 ●Communication
5.2 Setting Communication Environment
5.2.1 Setting Communication Environment
(1) Overview
Function
State at power-up
Communication and
signal error
Baud rate
Data format
Number of comm.
bytes
BCC code handling
Communication
mode
Print message
transfer ACK
Print spec. transfer
char. height
Description
Default
● Comm. port is OFF : Offline mode when the
power is turned on.
● Comm. port is ON : Online mode when the
power is turned on.
Comm. port is OFF
● OFF fixed
: Always offline mode and
you cannot change to the
online mode.
● Warning : An external communication error and
external signal error are considered to be
"Warning."
● Fault
: An external communication error and
Warning
external signal error are considered to be
"Fault." The printer does not print even if
the product target detector is turned ON.
● Sets the baud rate at which communication is
established with the outside.
● Eleven different settings are selectable: 150, 300,
4,800bps
600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400,
57,600, or 115,200 bps.
● Sets the data length, parity bit, and stop bits for
communication with the outside.
Data length: 8 bit
● The following settings are available.
Parity bit : none
1 Data length: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bits : 1 bit
2 Parity bit: none, odd, or even
3 Stop bits: 1 bit or 2 bits
● Sets the number of character code bytes for
communication with the outside.
1 byte
● A setting of 1 byte or 2 bytes can be selected.
● Setup can be performed so that no communication
error occurs even if BCC code attached data is
Disable
received.
● Overwrite-protected: No new data will be received
until the previously received
data is printed.
● Overwrite-enabled : New data is received even if
Overwrite- protected
the previously received data
has not been printed.
The newly received data
overwrites the old data.
● t=fixed : The time from receiving the print
description from an external device to
sending ACK becomes nearly fixed
t=async.
regardless of the transmission volume.
● t=async. : The system will be ready to print
immediately after returning ACK.
● 2 digits: Uses 2-digit data for character height
setting ([00] to [99]) transmission.
2 digits
● 3 digits: Uses 3-digit data for transmission.
●Setting Communication Environment 5-3
(2) Operating procedure
1 Press Communication environment setup from the Environment setup menu.
The "Communication environment setup" screen appears.
Comm. env. setup
State at power-up
[Stop
]
Com=0
Comm. port in ON
Warn.
Communication and signal error
Fault
M
Manual
＜Transmission condition by port＞
Target port
2015.07.07 12:45
Startup
Standard port
HOME
4800
Baud rate (bps)
＜Data format＞
Data length
7 bits
Parity bit
Disable
Stop bits
1 bits
2 bits
1 byte
2 bytes
Disable
Enable
Change the on-line
or off-line.
8 bits
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
＜Standard communication＞
Number of comm. bytes
BCC code handling
Communication mode
overwrite-protected overwrite-enabled
Print message transfer ACK
t=fixed
t=async.
Print spec transfer char height
2 digits
3 digits
Back
2 Press Next settings .
The second screen appears.
Comm. env. setup
Buffer function
Buffer repeat count
Empty Buffer Fault
[Stop
Disable
]
2015.07.07 12:45
Enable
０００１ (1〜9999)
Disable
Com=0
Enable
Timing of Fault
Print Start
Data Number at Fault
0
(0〜9)
M
Manual
Startup
Print. Complete
HOME
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Back
Setting of communication buffer
(Refer to " 5.9 Communication buffer".)
5-4 ●Setting Communication Environment
5.2.2 Transmission Specifications
(1) Communication method
(2) Startup method
(3) Synchronization method
(4) Transmission method
(5) Baud rate
(6) Codes transmitted
(7) Data format
Item
Format
A
B
C
D
E
F (default)
G
H
I
J
: Half duplex
: Started up by host
: Asynchronous
: Bit serial transmission
: 150, 300, 600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400,
57,600, 115,200(bps)
: Alphanumerical characters, symbols, dedicated characters,
user pattern characters, and punctuation characters
: Formats A through J are selectable (see the table below).
No other formats can be chosen.
Data format table
Start bit
Data length
(bits)
(bits)
1
7
1
7
1
7
1
7
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
Parity bit
(bits)
1 (even)
1 (odd)
1 (even)
1 (odd)
None
None
1 (even)
1 (odd)
1 (even)
1 (odd)
Stop bits
(bits)
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
Selecting a data length of 7 bits allows you to transmit alphanumerical characters
and symbols but inhibits you from transmitting punctuation characters and using
2-byte codes to send dedicated characters and user pattern characters.
(8) Bit configuration
Formats A and B
Start
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
Parity
Stop
Stop
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
Parity
Stop
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Stop
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Stop
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Parity
Stop
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Parity
Stop
Formats C and D
Start
Formats E
Start
Stop
Formats F
Start
Formats G and H
Start
b0
Formats I and J
Start
b0
Stop
Order of code transmission: Transmission occurs beginning with the least significant bit (b0).
(9) Error control
● Vertical parity error (detection on an individual character basis)
● Overrun error
● Framing error
●Setting Communication Environment 5-5
5.3 Transmission Sequences
5.3.1 Common Transmission Sequences
(1)Basic transmission operation.
1 When ENQ and ACK are present:
External device
ENQ
IJ printer
Text
STX
ETX
ACK
ACK
2 When ENQ is omitted:
External device
Text
STX
ETX
IJ printer
ACK
(2)When DC2 (retransmission) code is used
(When no response is received though ENQ has been issued and yet the contents of print
area switched)
External device
DC2
IJ printer
STX
ENQ
ACK
Text
ETX
ACK
ACK
(3)When the IJ printer is incapable of receiving data or is off-line
External device
ENQ
IJ printer
NAK
(4)Abnormal transmission operation (when the text contains an erroneous message)
External device
ENQ
IJ printer
STX
Text
ETX
ACK
NAK
(5)When BCC code is included
External device
IJ printer
ENQ
STX
Text
ETX
BCC
ACK
ACK
(6)When the IJ printer power is OFF
No response will be returned for any code transmission from the external decice.
(7) The printings, print specifications, print format, and user pattern data can be
consecutively transmitted in the following order in a single session.
1 Print format
2 Print specifications
3 Printings
(Example)
Print format
Print format
Print format
Print
specification
Print
Print content
specification
The user pattern can be positioned anywhere within the above data chain.
''Line count / print format uniformity'', ''Format setup change'' and ''Free layout transmission'' must
be transmitted independently. If an attempt is made to send it together with the other data, a
communication error (NAK response) occurs.
The print data recall must also be transmitted independently. Even if it is sent together with the
other data, no error occurs. However, the print data recall takes precedence, rendering the other
data invalid.
(8) Up to 3000 bytes of data can be transmitted at a time, including "STX" and "ETX".
If the 3000-byte limit is exceeded, a communication error (NAK response) occurs.
5-6 ●Transmission Sequences
(9) Any data transmitted by communication (print contents, print specifications, print
format, and user pattern) is not stored except in the following cases.
[Conditions for storing the data]
1 When the ink is stopped after communication by the Shut down key or a stop signal.
2 At 01 minute of every hour.
(10) Transmit to the existing print item after creating a transmission objective print item.
5.3.2 Printings Transmission
5.3.2-1 Text
(1) When printings are to be changed
DLE
Item
number
Printings
(2) If deleting character string within print item
DLE
Item
number
(3) When multiple printings are to be designated
DLE
Item
number
Printings
DLE
Printings change
Item
number
Printings erasure
● Multiple print items can be consecutively transmitted within one session.
● Print items are to be designated by specifying the item numbers. The item numbers need not be sorted
● Print items not transmitted are not changed.
● Both calendar characters and count characters can be transmitted.
● If printings are transmitted for a print item for which Micro QR setup is completed, a communication
error occurs.
●If transmission is made to the item number(s) which does NOT exist, the new item number(s) of the
message will be added, which format type is either ''Individual'' or ''Free layout''.
5.3.2-2 Item number
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
1
31H
11
3BH
21
45H
31
4FH
41
59H
51
63H
61
6DH
71
77H
81
81H
91
8BH
2
32H
12
3CH
22
46H
32
50H
42
5AH
52
64H
62
6EH
72
78H
82
82H
92
8CH
3
33H
13
3DH
23
47H
33
51H
43
5BH
53
65H
63
6FH
73
79H
83
83H
93
8DH
4
34H
14
3EH
24
48H
34
52H
44
5CH
54
66H
64
70H
74
7AH
84
84H
94
8EH
5
35H
15
3FH
25
49H
35
53H
45
5DH
55
67H
65
71H
75
7BH
85
85H
95
8FH
6
36H
16
40H
26
4AH
36
54H
46
5EH
56
68H
66
72H
76
7CH
86
86H
96
90H
7
37H
17
41H
27
4BH
37
55H
47
5FH
57
69H
67
73H
77
7DH
87
87H
97
91H
8
38H
18
42H
28
4CH
38
56H
48
60H
58
6AH
68
74H
78
7EH
88
88H
98
92H
9
39H
19
43H
29
4DH
39
57H
49
61H
59
6BH
69
75H
79
7FH
89
89H
99
93H
10
3AH
20
44H
30
4EH
40
58H
50
62H
60
6CH
70
76H
80
80H
90
8AH
100
94H
● The order of print items is indicated below.
(3-column example) Circled number: Item number
Row1
Row2
1
4
2
5
3
6
●Transmission Sequences 5-7
5.3.2-3 Printings
● An array of “character codes”.
● The coding system varies with the mode which is designated by the “Number of communication bytes”
setting entered from the communication environment setup screen.
User pattern
Calendar
characters,
Count
(00 to 47)
characters
ASCII
ASCII
2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code
2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code
Alphanumerical
Number of
Dedicated
communication characters and
characters
bytes
symbols
1-byte mode
2-byte mode
ASCII
ASCII
Punctuation
Katakana
(48 to 199) mark
5.3.2-4 Character codes
(1) 2-byte code (number of communication bytes: 1-byte mode)
● For 1-byte mode, 2-byte codes are sandwiched between "SI" and "SO."
● One character
High-order Low-order
byte
byte
SI
SO
● Two or more characters
High-order Low-order High-order Low-order High-order Low-order
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
SI
SO
(2) 2-byte code (number of communication bytes: 2-byte mode)
High-order Low-order
byte
byte
(3) Mixture of ASCII and 2-byte codes (number of communication bytes: 1-byte mode)
ASCII
ASCII
High-order Low-order High-order Low-order
byte
byte
byte
byte
SI
SO
ASCII
(4) Mixture of ASCII and 2-byte codes (number of communication bytes: 2-byte mode)
ASCII
High-order Low-order High-order Low-order
byte
byte
byte
byte
ASCII
ASCII
5.3.2-5 Example of print contents transmission
(1) Example when No. of communication bytes: 1 byte mode
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
41H
A
42H
B
43H
C
10H
DLE
32H
2
Print item 1
0FH
SI
F2H 52H
Calendar
F2H 52H
Calendar
Print item 2
(2) Example when No. of communication bytes: 2 byte mode
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
41H
A
42H
B
43H
C
Print item 1
[Transmission results]
Print item 1
Print item 2
5-8 ●Transmission Sequences
10H
DLE
32H
2
F2H 52H
Calendar
F2H 52H
Calendar
Print item 2
ABC
DD
DD:Calendar character "day"
03H
ETX
0EH
SO
03H
ETX
5.3.3 Print Data Recall Transmission
5.3.3-1 Text
ESC2
Header 20H
Classification
31H
1000s place
100s place
10s palce
Units place
Print data message number (0001 to 2000)
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
ESC
Header 56H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (001 to 999)
ESC
Header 26H
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (01 to 99)
5.3.3-2 Print data message number
● An already saved print data number is to be designated as the print data message number.
● The message number is expressed by a combination of three ASCII codes.
5.3.3-3 Example of print contents transmission
(1) Example of specifying 4-digit print data registration No.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
20H
31H
1
Header, classification
30H
0
30H
0
31H
1
32H
2
03H
ETX
Print data message number
[Transmission results]
Calls print data of print data message number 12.
●Transmission Sequences 5-9
5.3.4 Print data registration transmission
5.3.4-1 Text
● Specifies message number
ESC2
Header 21H
Classification
31H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (0001 to 2000)
● Specifies registration No. and message name.
ESC2
Header 21H
Classification
31H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (0001 to 2000)
ESC2
Header 21H
Classification
32H
Message name (1 to 12 digits)
Message name : ASCII code (20H to 5FH, 61H to 7AH)
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
● Specifies registration No.
.
ESC
Header 55H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (001 to 999)
ESC
Header 25H
10s place
Units place
Print message number (01 to 99)
● Specifies registration No. and message name.
.
ESC
Header 55H
100s place
10s place
Units place
ESC
Header 86H
Message name (1 to 12 diguts)
Print data message number (001 to 999)
ESC
Header 25H
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (01 to 99)
5-10 ●Transmission Sequences
ESC
Header 86H
Message name (1 to 12 diguts)
(Contd.)
5.3.4-2 Message name
(1) message number specified
● A message name is automatically attached when print data is registered.
● Based on the message name displayed in the upper left hand corner of the screen, the last 4 digits are
replaced with the message number and used as the new message name.
(Example) Registering for No. 123
Contents displayed in upper left hand corner of the screen
:“ABCDEFGHIJKL”
Message name after registration
:“ABCDEFG 0123”
(2) Message number and message name specified
● The specified message name attached when print data is registered.
(3) Same message name is used for other message number
● If a message name is in use for other message number, new message name will be created by using
original message name as a base and replacing its 7th and 8th digits with AA~ZZ.
(Example) Message name [ABC] is already registered on No.1. Register on No.2 using identical
message name.
Message name of No.1: [ABC
]
Message name of No.2: [ABC
AA
]
(4)Characters available for message name
● Characters used for setting the message name transmission are different from characters used in
manual input on registration screen.
Function
Manual input
Message name transmission
Alphameric character/
Symbols
Available
Available
Accent character/
Arabic character
Available
Unavailable
Numbers/symbols (ASCII code): 20H to 5FH, 61H to 7AH
5.3.4-3 Supplement
● When transmitting print data together with the print contents, send the print contents last.
5.3.4-4 Example of print data registration transmission
(1) Example of registering by specifying message name
02H 1FH 21H
STX ESC2
!
31H
1
Header, classification
30H
0
30H
0
31H
1
32H 1FH 21H
2
ESC2
!
32H
2
Print data message unmber Header, classification
41H
A
42H
B
43H
C
03H
ETX
Message name
[Transmission results]
Massage name "ABC" is assigned to current print data and is registered under message number 12.
●Transmission Sequences 5-11
5.3.5 Print Condition Transmission
5.3.5-1 Text
(1)Line count / print format uniformity
ESC2
Header 22H
Classification 31H
● Line count and print format are made uniform for all print items.
● Line count of all rows are made uniform based on the first row.
● Space between stages, character size, space between characters, whether or not to use bar code and
double width size are made uniform based on the setting value of the first print item.
● Send the message independently. The message cannot be sent together with print format, print
specs., and print contents.
● If transmission is made to the message which format setup is ''Free layout", a communication error
will occur.
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
ESC
Header 2BH
30H
(2) Format setup change
ESC2
Header 22H
Classification33H
Format setup
Format setup (30H to 32H)
Format setup
30H:Individual
31H:Overall
32H:Free layout
● This transmission can change the format setup.
● The print data will be adjusted to match the "After-change" Format setup.
● Print condition transmission shall be made independently.
Print condition can not be transmitted with Print format or Print specification or Print description.
● If "Format setup change" of "Free layout" is transmitted to RX2-Basic machine, a communication
error will occur.
(3)Configuration of print format text
● Print item not specified
Print format text
If item No. is not specified, it is set for all items.
To transmit print format and print specs. consecutively, transmit in the order of 1 print format
and 2 print specs. If transmitted the other way round, an error will occur.
● Print item specified
ESC2
Header 70H
Item No.
Print format text
Item No. specified (1 to 100)
Only specified print item is applicable for change.
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
ESC2
Header 24H
Item No. specified (1 to 100)
5-12 ●Transmission Sequences
Item No.
Print format text
(4)Print format text
● Line count and Line spacing
ESC2
Header 22H
Classification
32H
Line count
Line spacing
Line count (1 to 5) Line spacing (0 to 2)
● Character size and inter-character space
ESC2
Header 23H
Classification Character size
31H
Character size
(30H to 3CH)
10s place
Units place
Inter-character space (0 to 28)
Character size
30H : 4×5
31H : 5×5
32H : 5×8(5×7)
33H : 9×8(9×7)
34H : 7×10
35H : 10×12
36H : 12×16
37H : 18×24
38H : 24×32
39H : 11×11
3AH: 5×3(Chimney)
3BH: 5×5(Chimney)
3CH: 7×5(Chimney)
● Increased width
ESC2
Header 23H
Classification
32H
Increased
width
Increased width (1 to 9)
● Bar code type (Type change, Bar code "not used" → "used")
ESC2
Header 23H
Classification
33H
Type
Bar code type (30H to 47H)
● Bar code "used"→ "not used"
ESC2
Header 23H
Classification
33H
30H
30H :Bar code "not used"
● Readable code (Bar code EAN-13)
ESC2
Header 23H
Classification
34H
Code
Readable code type (0: None, 1: 5×5, 2: 5×7)
● Prefix code (Bar code EAN-13)
ESC2
Header 23H
Bar code type
30H : not used
31H : code 39
32H : ITF
33H : NW-7
34H : EAN-13
35H : DM8×32
36H : DM16×16
37H : DM16×36
38H : DM16×48
39H : DM18×18
3AH: DM20×20
3BH: DM22×22
3CH: DM24×24
3DH: Code 128 (Code set B)
3EH: Code 128 (Code set C)
3FH: UPC-A
40H: UPC-E
41H: EAN-8
42H: QR21×21
43H: QR25×25
44H: QR29×29
45H: GS1 DataBar (Limited)
46H: GS1 DataBar
(Omnidirectional)
47H: GS1 DataBar (Stacked)
Classification Tens position Units position
35H
Prefix code (00 to 99)
● Two or more print format items can be consecutively transmitted in a single chain.
●Transmission Sequences 5-13
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
● Line count and Line spacing
ESC
Header 22H
Line count
Character size
30H:5×5
31H:5×8(5×7)
32H:7×10
33H:12×16
34H:18×24
35H:24×32
Line spacing
Line count (1 to 5) Line spacing (0 to 2)
● Character size and inter-character space
ESC
Header 21H
Character size
Character size (1 to 5)
inter-character
space
Bar code type
30H : code 39
31H : ITF
32H : NW-7
33H : EAN-13
34H : DM16×16
35H : DM8×32
36H : Code 128
37H : DM16×36
38H : DM16×48
39H : DM18×18
3AH: DM20×20
3BH: DM22×22
3CH: DM24×24
inter-character space (0 to 8)
● Bar code type
ESC
Header 2AH
Type
Bar code type (30H to 3CH )
● Bar code "used"→ "not used"
ESC
Header 29H
30H
Used or not used (0:not used, 1:used)
● Bar code "not used"→ "used"
ESC
Header 29H
31H
ESC
Header 2AH
Type
Used or not used (0:not used, 1:used)
● ID code (Bar code EAN-13)
ESC
Header 7DH
Code
Code type (0:none, 1:5×5, 2:5×7)
● Prefix code (Bar code EAN-13)
ESC
Header 2CH
10s place
Units place
Prefix code (00 to 99)
● Code set (Code128)
ESC
Header 3FH
Code set
(0:Code set B, 1:Code set C)
● Increased width
ESC
Header 28H
Increased width
Increased width (1 to 9)
(5)Print specifications
● Character height
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
31H
10s place
Units place
Character height (00 to 99)
● Ink drop use percentage
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
32H
10s place
Units place
Ink drop use percentage (01 to 16)
● High-speed printing
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
33H
Mode
Mode (0:HM, 1:NM, 2:QM)
5-14 ●Transmission Sequences
● Character width
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
1000s place
34H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Character width (0000 to 3999)
● Character orientation
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
35H
Character
orientation
Character orientation (0 to 3)
● Print start delay
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
1000s place
36H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print start delay (0000 to 3999)
● Print start delay (reverse)
ESC2
Header 25H Classification 1000s place
37H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print start delay (reverse) (0000 to 3999)
● Product speed matching
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
38H
Character
orientation
Product speed matching (0:Time-based, 1:Encoder based, 2:Auto-encoder based)
● Pulse rate division Factor
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
39H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Pulse rate division Factor (001 to 999)
● Repeat count
ESC2
Header 25H Classification 1000s place
3DH
100s place
10s place
Units place
Repeat count (0000 to 9999)
● Repeat intervals
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
10000s place 1000s place
3EH
100s place
10s place
Units place
Repeat intervals (00000 to 99999)
● Target sensor timer
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
3FH
100s place
10s place
Units place
Target sensor timer (000 to 999)
●Transmission Sequences 5-15
● Target sensor filter
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
40H
Division
Division (1:time setup, 2:until end of print)
● Target sensor filter setting value
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
1000s place
41H
10s place
Units place
Value (0000 to 9999)
● Ink drop charge rule
ESC2
100s place
Header 25H
Classification
Charge rule
42H
Charge rule (31H:Standard, 32H:Mixed single scan and interlaced 33H:Dot mixed)
● Two or more print specification items can be consecutively transmitted in a single chain.
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
●Character height
ESC
Header 30H
10s place
Units place
Character height (00 to 99)
● Character width
ESC
Header 31H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Character width (000 to 199)
● Character orientation
ESC
Header 32H
Units place
Character orientation (0 to 3)
●Repeat intervals
ESC
Header 34H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Repeat intervals (0000 to 9999)
●Repeat count
ESC
Header 35H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Repeat count (0000 to 9999)
● Print start delay
ESC
Header 33H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print start delay (0000 to 9999)
● Print start delay (reverse)
ESC
Header 36H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print start delay (reverse) (0000 to 9999)
●Target sensor timer
ESC
Header 37H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Target sensor timer (000 to 999)
●Target sensor filter
ESC
Header 38H
1000s place
ESC
Header 39H
Division
100s place
10s place
Target sensor filter (0000 to 9999)
Division (1:time setup, 2:until end of print)
●High-speed printing
ESC
Header 3AH
Mode
Mode (0:HM, 1:NM, 2:QM)
●Product speed matching
ESC
Header 3BH
Character
orientation
Product speed matching (0:Time-based, 1:Encoder based)
●Pulse rate division Factor
ESC
Header 3CH
100s place
10s place
Units place
Pulse rate division Factor (001 to 999)
●Ink drop use percentage
ESC
Header 3DH
10s place
Units place
Ink drop use percentage (01 to16)
5-16 ●Transmission Sequences
Units place
5.3.5-2 Text setup rules
(1) Line count
● When you change the line count for a print item in a certain column, you must also set the line
count for the other print items that belong to the same column.
(Example)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting items 7 and 8 to one line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Transmit the line count consecutively to items 7 and 8. If you transmit the line count to only one
of them, a communication error occurs.
● When you change the line count for a print item, you must also set the line count for the other print
items that belong to the same column as the former one.
(Example)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting items 7 and 8 to two lines
Transmit the line count consecutively to items 7 and 8. If you transmit the line count to only one
of them, a communication error occurs.
(2) Line spacing
● When you transmit one-line setup data for a certain print item, you have to transmit a line spacing
setting of "0" as well as for the same chain as the one-line setup data.
If you do not transmit an line spacing setting of "0", a communication error occurs.
● Ensure that the same line spacing setting is selected for print items belonging to the same column.
In other words, when you transmit a new line spacing setting for a print item in a certain column,
you must consecutively transmit the same setting to the other print items in the same column.
(3) Character size and inter-character space
● The available inter-character space varies with the character size.
See "4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters" 4 of the Instructions
Manual.
● The total number of vertical dots cannot exceed the limit.
Machine type
RX2-BD, RX2-SD(3-line)
Option:RX2-SD(4-line)
Option:RX2-SD(5-line)
Maximum number of vertical dots
30 dots
32 dots
32 dots
● Some characters cannot be entered depending on the character size. If a print
item contains an unavailable character after a character size change, its contents
are changed to a space.
See "4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters" 3 of the Instructions
Manual.
● If an inter-character space other than "0" is transmitted for a print item for which bar code setup is
completed, a communication error occurs.
●Transmission Sequences 5-17
(4) Bar code use and bar code type
● Two or more bar code types cannot coexist.
● When bar code set up is completed for a print item, its inter-character space can not be changed.
(The inter-character space need not be transmitted in this case.)
● When the bar code type is ITF or code128(code set C), you have to observe the following input rules.
If you violate the rules, the contents of an illegal print item will be deleted.
ITF or code128(code set C) input rules
No.
1
Input rule
Characters must be paired to make an
entry.
Input example
(Correct) [012345]
(Incorrect) [01234]
● Some characters cannot be entered depending on the bar code type.
If any unacceptable character is included in a print item for which bar code setup is completed, the
contents of the print item are changed to a null character. See "4.7.5 Print a bar code" of the
Instructions Manual.
● FNC1 is a control code used for Code128, 2-byte code of 81A6, indicated as ※ on print layout screen.
5.3.5-3 Caution for format type "Free layout"
● When the format setup is "Free layout" and if "Line count / print format uniformity" or "Line count
and line spacing" or "High-speed printing" or "Ink drop charge rule" is transmitted, a communication
error will occur.
5.3.5-4 Example of print conditions transmission
(1) Example where print item is not specified
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
22H
“
32H
2
Header,
classification
31H
1
30H
0
1FH
ESC2
Line count 1
line spacing 0
25H
%
36H
6
30H
0
Header,
classification
31H
1
32H
2
33H
3
03H
ETX
Write position 123
[Transmission results]
All print items are set as 1 stage, write position is changed to 0123.
(2) Example where print item is specified
02H 1FH 70H 31H 1FH 23H 31H 34H 30H 30H 1FH 70H 33H 1FH 23H 31H 34H 30H 30H 03H
STX ESC2 p
1 ESC2 #
1
4
0
0 ESC2 p
3 ESC2 #
1
4
0
0 EXT
Header, item No.
Header,
classification
Character size 7×10, Header,
inter-character space 0 item No.
[Transmission results]
Upper stage character size is changed.
1
2
5-18 ●Transmission Sequences
3
4
1
3
2
4
Header,
Character size 7×10,
classification inter-character space 0
5.3.6 Free Layout Transmission
5.3.6-1 Overview
● When Format setup is "Free layout", the selected print item can be moved individually.
● Free layout transmission shall be made independently. Free layout transmission can NOT be transmitted
with Print format or Print specification or Print description.
● If transmission is made to the item number(s) which does not exist, a communication error will occur.
● If transmission is made when the format setup is either "Individual" or "Overall", a communication error
will occur.
● If transmission is made to RX2-Basic machine, a communication error will occur.
5.3.6-2 Text
(1) Specify Horizontal/Vertical coordinate and move
● Specify the bottom-left coordinate and the print item will be moved.
● Horizontal and Vertical coordinate
ESC2
Header 24H Classification
31H
Item
number
10000s
place
10s place
Unit place (Contd.)
Horizontal (X) coordinate
(0 to 31998)
Item number
(1 to 100)
10s place
1000s place 100s place
Unit place
Vertical (Y) coordinate
(0 to 29)
● Horizontal coordinate
ESC2
Header 24H Classification
32H
Item
number
10000s
place
1000s place 100s place
10s place
Unit place
Horizontal (X) coordinate
(0 to 31998)
Item number
(1 to 100)
● Vertical coordinate
ESC2
Header 24H Classification
33H
Item
number
10s place
Unit place
Item number Vertical (Y) coordinate
(1 to 100)
(0 to 29)
●Transmission Sequences 5-19
(2)Specify Horizontal/Vertical directions and move
● Specify the number of dots for moving and the print item will be moved.
● Horizontal and Vertical move
ESC2
Item
number
Header 24H Classification
41H
(Contd.)
Item number
(1 to 100)
Horizontal sign/Vertical sign
(Input either one of the two.)
2BH: " ＋ (plus)"
2DH:" － (minus)"
Horizontal
sign
10000s
place
1000s place 100s place
10s place
Unit place (Contd.)
Horizontal (X) direction
(-31998 to +31998)
Vertical
sign
10s place
Unit place
Vertical (Y) direction
(-29 to +29)
-- Either plus(+) or minus(-) sign to be input for both Horizontal/Vertical directions.
-- In case there will be NO horizontal move, input either "+00000" or "-00000".
-- In case there will be NO vertical move, input either "+00" or "-00".
● Horizontal move
ESC2
Item
number
Header 24H Classification
42H
(Contd.)
Item number
(1 to 100)
Horizontal sign
(Input either one of the two.)
2BH: " ＋ (plus)"
2DH:" － (minus)"
Horizontal
sign
10000s
place
1000s place 100s place
10s place
Horizontal (X) direction
(-31998 to +31998)
-- Either plus(+) or minus(-) sign to be input for Horizontal direction.
-- In case there will be NO horizontal move, input either "+00000" or "-00000".
● Vertical move
ESC2
Header 24H Classification
43H
Item
number
Item number
(1 to 100)
Vertical
sign
10s place
Unit place
Vertical (Y) direction
(-29 to +29)
Vertical sign
(Input either one of the two.)
2BH: " ＋ (plus)"
2DH:" － (minus)"
-- Either plus(+) or minus(-) sign to be input for Vertical direction.
-- In case there will be NO vertical move, input either "+00" or "-00".
5-20 ●Transmission Sequences
Unit place
5.3.6-3 Example of Free layout transmission
(1) Specify Horizontal/Vertical coordinate and move
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
31H
1
35H
5
30H
0
Header, Item No.
classification
30H
0
31H
1
32H
2
30H
0
Horizontal (X)
coordinate
32H
2
35H
5
03H
ETX
Vertical (Y)
coordinate
[Transmission result]
Print item 5: Horizontal (X) coordinate will be set to 120 and Vertical (Y) coordinate to 25.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
32H
2
31H
1
31H
1
Header, Item No.
classification
32H
2
33H
3
34H
4
35H
5
03H
ETX
Horizontal (X)
coordinate
[Transmission result]
Print item 1: Horizontal (X) coordinate will be set to "12345".
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
33H
3
94H
100
30H
0
30H
0
03H
ETX
Header, Item No. Vertical (Y)
classification
coordinate
[Transmission result]
Print item 100: Vertical (Y) coordinate will be set to "0".
●Transmission Sequences 5-21
(2) Specify Horizontal/Vertical directions and move
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
41H
A
3AH
10
2BH
+
Header, Item No.
classification
30H
0
30H
0
31H
1
30H
0
30H
0
Horizontal (X) direction
2BH
+
32H
2
30H
0
03H
ETX
Vertical (Y) direction
[Transmission result] Move print item 10 rightward by 100 and upward by 20.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
41H
A
44H
20
2DH
－
Header, Item No.
classification
30H
0
30H
0
30H
0
32H
2
30H
0
Horizontal (X) direction
2DH
－
30H
0
35H
5
03H
ETX
Vertical (Y) direction
[Transmission result] Move print item 20 leftward by 20 and downward by 5.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
41H
A
32H
2
2BH
+
Header, Item No.
classification
31H
1
32H
2
33H
3
34H
4
35H
5
Horizontal (X) direction
2DH
－
30H
0
30H
0
03H
ETX
Vertical (Y) direction
[Transmission result] Move print item 2 rightward by 12345.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
41H
A
62H
50
2BH
+
Header,
Item No.
classification
30H
0
30H
0
30H
0
30H
0
30H
0
Horizontal (X) direction
2DH
－
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
42H
B
34H
4
2DH
－
Header, Item No.
classification
30H
0
30H
0
31H
1
Horizontal (X) direction
[Transmission result] Move print item 4 leftward by 100.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
43H
C
80H
80
2BH
+
30H
0
35H
5
03H
ETX
Header, Item No. Vertical (Y) direction
classification
[Transmission result] Move print item 80 upward by 5.
5-22 ●Transmission Sequences
30H
0
30H
0
Vertical (Y) direction
[Transmission result] Move print item 50 downward by 10.
02H
STX
31H
1
30H
0
03H
ETX
03H
ETX
5.3.7 Calendar Conditions Transmission
5.3.7-1 Text
(1) Calendar Conditions Transmission
● Offset
ESC2
Header 28H
Classification Calendar
32H
block No.
Calendar block No.
(1 to 8)
Type
1000s place 100s place
10s place
Units
place
Offset
Type
30H : Year
31H : Month
32H : Day
33H : Hour
34H : Minute
Offset setting range
Setting item
Offset setting range
Year
0000 to 9999
Month
0000 to 9999
Day
0000 to 1999
Hour
-023 to 0099
Minute
-059 to 0099
“-” (2DH) when setting negative offset to
hour, minute.
● Zero-suppression
ESC2
Header 28H
Classification Calendar
34H
block No.
Calendar block No.
(1 to 8)
Type
Mode
Type
30H : Year
31H : Month
32H : Day
33H : Hour
34H : Minute
35H : Weeks
36H : Day of week
Mode
30H : Disable
31H : Zero-suppression (space)
32H : Zero-suppression (character fill)
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
● Offset
ESC2
Header 76H
Item No.
Type
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Offset
● Zero-suppression
ESC2
Header 77H
Item No.
Type
Disable or
Enable
Disable or Enable (0: Disable;
1: Zero-suppression (space))
Type
30H : Year
31H : Month
32H : Day
33H : Hour
34H : Minute
●Transmission Sequences 5-23
(2) Count Conditions Transmission
ESC2
Count
Header 2CH Classification block No.
Setting
value
Calendar block No.
(1 to 8)
Classification
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
38H
39H
3AH
3BH
3EH
Item name
Initial value
Range 1
Range 2
Update setting range (In progress)
Update setting range (Unit)
Increment setting range
Direction
Jump from
Jump to
Reset
Reset signal (option)
External signal count (option)
Setting value
Character code
Character code
Character code
000000 to 999998
000001 to 999999
01 to 99
0: up, 1: down
Character code
Character code
Character code
0:signal 1, 1:signal 2
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Character code of setting value
Mode
1-byte mode
2-byte mode
Alphanumeric
ASCII
ASCII
User pattern
ASCII
2-byte code
*) When count characters has been divided (e.g., [ CC
5-24 ●Transmission Sequences
CC
]), transmit four-digits characters.
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
(1) Initial value, Range, Jump from, Jump to, Reset
ESC
Header 80H
Item No.
Type
Initial value
30
Range 1
31
Range 2
32
Setting value
Code of type
ASCII
Jump from
33
Jump to
34
Reset
35
ASCII is hexadecimal number.
Character code of setting value
Mode
1-byte mode
2-byte mode
Alphanumeric
ASCII
ASCII
User pattern
ASCII
1-byte code
*) When count characters has been divided (e.g., [
CC
CC
]), transmit four-digits characters.
100000s
place
10000s place 1000s place
(2) Update setting range
ESC
Header 81H
Item No.
In progress
30
Unit
31
Type
100s place
10s place
Units place
Code of type
ASCII
ASCII is hexadecimal number.
Update setting range
Set item
In progress
Unit
Update setting range
000000 to 999998
000001 to 999999
(3) Direction, External signal count, Reset signal
ESC
Header 82H
Item No.
Type
0/1
Direction
(0: up, 1: down)
External signal count (0: Disable, 1: Enable)
Reset signa
(0:Signal1, 1:Signal2)
Code of type
Direction
30
ASCII
External signal count
31
Reset signal
32
ASCII is hexadecimal number.
(4) Increment
ESC
Header 83H
Item No.
Type
10s place
Unit place
Increment setting range
Set item
Increment
Increment setting range
01 to 99
5.3.7-2 Example of calendar conditions transmission
(1) Example of offset
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
28H
(
32H
2
32H
2
32H
Day
30H
0
Header,
Calendar
classification block No.
30H
0
31H
1
32H
2
03H
ETX
Offset 12 days
[Transmission results]
Defines offset 12 days for calendar block 2.
●Transmission Sequences 5-25
5.3.7-3 Example of count conditions transmission
(1) Example of reset
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
2CH
,
3AH
:
31H
1
30H
0
30H
0
Header,
Count
classification block No.
30H
0
30H
0
30H
0
03H
ETX
Reset value 00000
[Transmission results]
Defines reset value 00000 for count block 1.
5.3.8 User Pattern Character Transmission
5.3.8-1 Text
● When the number of communication bytes is set to "1" for communication
ESC2
Header 32H Classification
Character
code
Pattern data array
Character size
● When the number of communication bytes is set to "2" for communication environment setup purposes
ESC2
Header 32H Classification
High-order
byte
Character size
Low-order
byte
Pattern data array
Character code
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
● When the number of communication bytes is set to "1" for communication environment setup purposes
ESC2
Header 20H
Character
size
Character
code
Pattern data array
Character size
0 : 5x5
1 : 5x8(5x7)
2 : 7x10
3 : 12x16
4 : 18x24
5 : 24x32
● When the number of communication bytes is set to "2" for communication environment setup purposes.
ESC2
Header 20H
Character
size
High-order
byte
Low-order
byte
Character code
5-26 ●Transmission Sequences
Pattern data array
5.3.8-2 Character size
● The character size is represented by the codes shown in the following table.
5.3.8-3 Pattern data
(1) Pattern data length
● The pattern data length per character varies with the character size as indicated below.
Character size code table
Character size Character size code Pattern data length (bytes)
4×5
30H
8
31H
8
5×5
5×8(5×7)
32H
8
9×8(9×7)
33H
16
34H
16
7×10
10×12
35H
32
12×16
36H
32
37H
72
18×24
24×32
38H
128
11×11
39H
32
3AH
5
5×3(chimney)
5×5(chimney)
3BH
5
7×5(chimney)
3CH
7
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Remarks
(2) Pattern data structure
The pattern data structure and data creation rules are explained below.
a) Rules
● Each pattern data unit consists of 8 bits. For each bit, dot presence is indicated by the value 1 (dot
present) or 0 (dot not present).
● Vertically arrayed 8 dots correspond to 8 bits (1 byte).
● For character sizes of 4×5, 5×5, 7×10, 5×7, and 9×7, etc., some portions of 8-bit data are
unavailable. Set such portions to "0". (Even if you set them to "1", processing will be performed with
their settings changed to "0".)
4×5
Inter-character space data area
5×5
Inter-character space data area
5×7
Inter-character space data area
●Transmission Sequences 5-27
7×10
9 ×7
Inter-character space data area
: Unavailable area
Inter-character space data area
Note:The inter-character space is 1 dot at the maximum.
10×12
Inter-character space data area
5-28 ●Transmission Sequences
11×11
Inter-character space data area
5×3 (Chimney)
5×5 (Chimney)
7×5 (Chimney)
●Transmission Sequences 5-29
● For pattern data composition purposes, the data is arranged in successive order, beginning from the
bottom left, from bottom to top and from left to right.
b) Pattern data example
[For a character size of 5×5]
Unusable area
Inter-character space data area
4
5 6 7 8
byte
byte
byte
byte
● ●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
byte
Third byte
Second byte
First byte
●
Removal of the first byte
27
20
●●●
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1 = 07H
●
● Rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise
●
Composition order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pattern data
07H 0AH 12H 0AH 07H 00H 00H 00H
5-30 ●Transmission Sequences
[For a character size of 18×24]
●●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 44 47 50 53 56 59 62 65 68 71
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 31 34 37 40 43 46 49 52 55 58 61 64 67 70
●Transmission Sequences 5-31
5.3.8-4 Character codes
For character code designation, either ASCII codes or 2-byte codes are used.
(1) ASCII codes (when the number of communication bytes is 1)
User pattern character
ASCII
User pattern character
ASCII
User pattern character
ASCII
00
D0
16
E0
32
F0
01
D1
17
E1
33
F1
02
D2
18
E2
34
F2
03
D3
19
E3
35
F3
04
D4
20
E4
36
F4
05
D5
21
E5
37
F5
06
D6
22
E6
38
F6
07
D7
23
E7
39
F7
08
D8
24
E8
40
F8
09 10 11 12 13 14 15
D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF
41 42 43 44 45 46 47
F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF
ASCII codes are in hexadecimal notation.
Applicable to cases where the number of user pattern characters does not exceed 48 (user pattern characters
00 through 47).
(2) 2-byte codes (when the number of communication bytes is 2)
User pattern character 00: F140 = high-order byte F1 + low-order byte 40
See “5.4.1 Code Tables”.
5.3.8-5 Supplement
(1) If the same character code is used to transmit two or more user pattern character data in a single message,
the last-transmitted data takes effect.
(2) When two or more user pattern characters having differing character sizes or character codes are
transmitted in a single message, no limitations are imposed on the order in which they are transmitted.
5.3.8-6 Example of user registration character transmission
(1) Example where number of communication bytes of communication environment
settings is "1 byte," character size is "5 x 5" and character code is "47."
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
32H
2
31H
5x5
FFH
47
Header,
Code 47
classification
07H
-
0AH
-
12H
-
0AH
-
00H
-
Pattern data arrangement
[Transmission results]
Defines character size 5×5, character code 47 user pattern.
5-32 ●Transmission Sequences
07H
-
00H
-
00H
-
03H
ETX
5.3.9 On-line/off-line Transmission Procedure
5.3.9-1 Text
(1) Change to online
ESC2
Header 73H
(2) Change to offline
ESC2
Header 74H
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
(1) Change to online
ESC
Header 79H
(2) Change to offline
ESC
Header 7AH
● In the following cases, Online/Offline transmission cannot be performed.
If it is attempted, NAK code will be the reply:
1 "Apply" key is displayed while inputting set value.
2 In the "Communication environment setup" screen, "Off fixed" is selected for "State at power-up"
item.
3 During input of count conditions.
4 The confirmation window is open.
5 The circulation control screen is opened by the maintenance function.
6 The touch screen setup screen is opened by the auxiliary function.
7 The communication monitor screen is opened.
5.3.9-2 Transmission example
External device
ESC2
73H
IJ printer
ACK
ENQ, STX and ETX are not required.
●Transmission Sequences 5-33
5.3.10 Remote Operation Transmission
5.3.10-1 Text
ESC2
Header 72H
Type
Type
30H:Operation start
31H:Operation stop
32H:Deflection voltage control (ON)
33H:Deflection voltage control (OFF)
34H:Fault clear
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
ESC
Header 71H
Type
5.3.10-2 Types of control
Types of control for operation
No.
Type
1
Operation start
2
Operation stop
3
4
5
Deflection
voltage control
(ON)
Deflection
voltage control
(OFF)
Fault clear
Content
Starts to jet ink, and shifts from stop status to ready
status.
(Same process as with <Startup> button)
Stops ink jet, and shifts to stop status (Same process as
with <Shutdown> button)
Turns deflection voltage on
(Same process as with <Ready> button in Manual
control menu window)
Turns deflection voltage off
(Same process as with <Standby> button in Manual
control menu window)
Closes the window for any fault that has occurred.
However, the window will remain if the cause of fault
is not resolved.
Function enabled status
Stop status
When ink is being jetted
(standby, ready status, etc.)
Standby status
Ready status
When fault has occurred
● Specify only one category of control at a time.
● Even if executing function is not possible, ACK will be answered, but no function will be executed.
5-34 ●Transmission Sequences
5.3.11 Time control
5.3.11-1 Text
(1) Date/time setup transmission
● Current time
Header
2EH
ESC2
1000s
place
Classification
31H
100s
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Hour
Day
(Contd.)
Month
Year
10s
place
Units
place
Units
place
Minutes
10s
place
Units
place
Second
● Calendar time control
Header
2EH
ESC2
Control
type
Classification
32H
Control type (31H: Same as current time; 32H: Clock stop)
● Calendar time
Header
2EH
ESC2
1000s
place
Classification
33H
100s
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Hour
Day
(Contd.)
Month
Year
10s
place
Units
place
Units
place
Minutes
10s
place
Units
place
Second
● Clock system
ESC2
Header
2EH
Classification
34H
Control
type
Control type (31H: 24-hour system; 32H: 12-hour system)
(2) Current time output transmission
Outputs current time of IJ printer internal calendar.
External device
IJ printer
ESC2 Header
75H
ACK
STX
Header
ESC2 7FH Yaer
Second
ETX
Year / month / day / hour / minute / second / 14 digits
●Transmission Sequences 5-35
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
(1) Date/time setup transmission
● Current date/time
ESC
Header 72H 1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
10s place
Yaer
10s place
Units place
10s place
Day
Units place
Month
10s place
Units place
10s place
Minutes
Hour
Units place
(Contd.)
Units place
Second
● Calendar time control
ESC
Header 73H control type
control type (31H:Same as current time, 32H:Clock stop)
● Calendar time
ESC
Header 74H 1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
10s place
Units place
10s place
Yaer
10s place
Units place
10s place
Day
Units place
(Contd.)
Month
10s place
Minutes
Hour
Units place
Units place
Second
(2) Current time output transmission
● Clock system
ESC
Header 75H control type
control type (31H:24-hour system, 32H:12-hour system)
External device
ESC2 Header
7BH
IJ printer
ACK
STX
ESC
Header
7CH Yaer
Second
ETX
Year / month / day / hour / minute / second / 14 digits
5.3.11-2 Date/time setup
(1) This function allows operator to set each item on "Date/time setup screen" for Maintenance menu.
No.
Setting item
1
Current time
2
3
4
Calendar time control
Calendar time
Clock system
Setting contents
Current date time displayed across the very top of screen
(year/month/day/hour/minute/second)
Same as current time, clock stopped
Time reflected in calendar characters of print contents
24/12-hour system
(2) After receiving date and time setting transmission, the print contents calendar characters and current time
display are updated.
(3) When transmitting "calendar time", first transmit the message for "calendar time: clock stop":
Simultaneous transmission is also possible.
(4) When changing the calendar time control from "clock stop" to "same as current time", the values on
calendar time will not be saved.
5.3.11-3 Example of time control transmission
(1) Example of setting current time
02H 1FH 2EH 31H 32H 30H 31H 35H 30H 37H 30H 37H 31H 32H 34H 35H 30H 30H 03H
STX ESC2
.
1
2
0
1
2
0
7
0
7
1
2
4
5
0
0 ETX
Header, classification
Yaer
[Transmission results]
Set current time to 2015/07/07, 12:45:00.
5-36 ●Transmission Sequences
Month
Day
Hour
Minutes
Second
5.4 Code Tables
5.4.1 Code Tables
(1)Transmission control
ASCII
02H
03H
Name
STX
(start)
ETX
(end)
05H
ENQ
(enquiry)
06H
ACK
(acknowledgment)
0EH
0FH
10H
SO
(shift out)
SI
(shift in)
DLE
(start of item)
12H
DC2
(retransmission)
13H
DC3
(retransmission)
15H
NAK
(negative
acknowledgment)
1BH
ESC
(start of header)
1FH
ESC2
(start of header)
Description
Code that is transmitted immediately before text.
Code that is transmitted immediately after text.
This enquiry code is used when the external device checks whether
the IJ printer is ready for signal reception. This code must be
transmitted before data transmission to the IJ printer. When the IJ
printer is ready for reception, the "ACK" code is transmitted after
ENQ code reception. If the IJ printer is not ready for reception, the
"NAK" code is transmitted.
1 When the IJ printer is ready for reception, it transmits this code in
response to an "ENQ" code reception from the external device.
2 This code reports that text reception is normally completed.
When the 1-byte transmission mode prevails, this code is positioned
at the end of 2-byte code for transmission purposes.
When the 1-byte transmission mode prevails, this code is positioned
at the beginning of 2-byte code for transmission purposes.
This code is positioned at the beginning of printings for each print
item for transmission purposes.
This code is transmitted if the printings need to be changed before
the printing of the contents transmitted to the IJ printer while the
overwrite-protected mode prevails. After receipt of this code, the
IJ printer transmits the ACK code and becomes ready for reception.
However, if the IJ printer is off-line, the "NAK" code is transmitted.
The same as DC2.
However, when receiving DC3, the IJ printer terminates printing
forcibly.
1 The IJ printer transmits this code if it is not ready for reception
when it receives the "ENQ" code from the external device.
2 This code reports that text reception is not normally completed
(when, for instance, the received data is in transmission error or
an unregistered print data number is received)
This code is positioned at the beginning of a header for transmission purposes. The header is a code that recognizes the transmission
data type and is transmitted next to STX.
(Existing machine / message specs.)
This code is positioned at the beginning of a header for transmission purposes. The header is a code that recognizes the transmission
data type and is transmitted next to STX.
●Code tables 5-37
(2)ASCII codes
High-order
Low-order
0
0
1
DLE Space
1
3
4
0
5
6
7
P
9
A
p
↑
↑
↑
!
1
A
Q
a
q
B
R
b
r
8
2
STX DC2
“
2
3
ETX DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
年
↑
$
4
D
T
d
t
月
↑
日
4
ENQ NAK
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
ACK
&
‘
6
F
V
f
v
7
‘
7
G
W
g
w
↑
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
↑
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
C
,
<
L
¥
l
D
-
=
M
]
m
↑
n
↑
ESC
E
SO
.
>
N
F
SI ESC2
/
?
O
Category
Transmission
control
_
D
E
F
00
16
32
↑
01
17
33
↑
02
18
34
03
19
35
↑
04
20
36
↑
05
21
37
06
22
38
↑
07
23
39
↑
08
24
40
09
25
41
10
26
42
↑
11
27
43
↑
12
28
44
13
29
45
↑
14
30
46
↑
15
31
47
↑
5
B
↑
nn
2
C
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
B
↑
↑
↑
↑
o
Dedicated
characters
Standard characters
User pattern
character
: Unusable
: Dedicated character consisting of multiple codes
: User pattern character number
NOTICE
(3-code)) consisting of two or more
1 As regards a dedicated character (e.g.,
codes, the text must be created so that it can be contained within a single print item.
2 As regards a print item for which a bar code is set up, the text must be created in
such a manner that the employed character codes are within the range applicable to
the bar code.
(3)Dedicated characters (2-byte codes)
Dedicated
characters
年
月
←
日
←
←
←
←
←
2-byte code F040 F041 F042 F043 F044 F045 F046 F047 F048 F049 F04A F04B F04C F04D F04E F04F
Dedicated
characters
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
2-byte code F050 F051 F052 F053 F054 F055 F056 F057 F058 F059 F05A F05B F05C F05D F05E F05F
Dedicated
characters
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
2-byte code F060 F061 F062 F063 F064 F065 F066 F067 F068 F069 F06A F06B F06C F06D F06E F06F
Dedicated
characters
←
←
←
←
←
←
2-byte code F070 F071 F072 F073 F074 F075 F076 F077 F078
5-38 ●Code tables
←: Dedicated characters consisting of two or more codes.
“
” consists of three characters (F046, F047, and F048).
Special characters (2-byte codes)
(When special characters can be input)
Characters
Communication code F340 F341 F342 F343 F344 F345 F346 F347 F348 F349 F34A F34B F34C F34D F34E F34F
Characters
Communication code F350 F351 F352 F353 F354 F355 F356 F357 F358 F359
F35B F35C
F35E F35F
Characters
Communication code F360 F361 F362 F363 F364 F365 F366 F367 F368 F369 F36A F36B F36C F36D F36E F36F
Characters
Communication code F370 F371 F372 F373 F374 F375 F376 F377 F378 F379 F37A F37B F37C
Characters
Communication code F380 F381 F382 F383 F384 F385 F386 F387 F388 F389 F38A F38B F38C F38D F38E F38F
Characters
Communication code F390 F391 F392 F393 F394 F395 F396 F397 F398 F399 F39A F39B
Characters
Communication code F3A0 F3A1 F3A2 F3A3 F3A4 F3A5 F3A6 F3A7 F3A8 F3A9 F3AA F3AB F3AC F3AD F3AE F3AF
Characters
Communication code F3B0 F3B1 F3B2 F3B3 F3B4 F3B5 F3B6 F3B7 F3B8 F3B9 F3BA F3BB
Characters
Communication code
F29F
Characters
Communication code
F2AC
Characters
Communication code F3C0 F3C1 F3C2 F3C3 F3C4 F3C5 F3C6 F3C7 F3C8 F3C9 F3CA F3CB F3CC F3CD F3CE F3CF
Characters
Communication code F3D0 F3D1 F3D2 F3D3 F3F4 F3D5 F3D6
F3DF
Characters
Communication code F3E0 F3E1 F3E2 F3E3 F3E4 F3E5 F3E6 F3E7 F3E8 F3E9 F3EA E3EB E3EC F3ED F3EE F3EF
Characters
Communication code F3F0 F3F1 F3F2 F3F3 F3F4 F3F5 F3F6
Characters
Communication code F540 F541 F542 F543 F544 F545 F546 F547 F548 F549 F54A F54B F54C F54D F54E F54F
Characters
Communication code F550 F551 F552 F553 F554 F555 F556 F557 F558 F559 F55A F55B F55C F55D F55E F55F
Characters
Communication code F560 F561 F562 F563 F564 F565 F566
Characters
Communication code F570 F571 F572 F573 F574 F575 F576 F577 F578 F579 F57A F57B F57C F57D F57E
Characters
Communication code F580 F581 F582 F583 F584 F585 F586 F587 F588 F589 F58A F58B F58C F58D F58E F58F
Characters
Communication code F590 F591 F592 F593 F594 F595 F596 F597
●Code tables 5-39
Arabic characters (2-byte codes)
Characters
Communication code F44D F44C F44B F44A F449 F448 F447 F446 F445 F444 F443 F442 F441
F440
Characters
Communication code F45B
F45A F459 F458 F457 F456 F455 F454 F453 F452 F451 F450 F44F F44E
Characters
Communication code F465 F464 F463 F462 F461
F460 F45F
F45B F45D
F45C
Characters
Communication code F475 F474 F473 F472 F471 F470 F46F F46E F46D F46C F46B F46A F469 F468 F467 F466
Characters
Communication code F485 F484 F483 F482 F481 F480 F47F F47E F47D F47C F47B F47A F479 F478 F477 F476
Characters
Communication code F495 F494 F493 F492 F491 F490 F48F F48E F48D F48C F48B F48A F489 F488 F487 F486
Characters
Communication code F4A3 F4A2 F4A1 F4A0 F49F
F49E F49D F49C F49B F49A F499 F498 F497 F496
Characters
Communication code
F4AA F4A9
F3A8 F4A7
F4A6 F4A5
F4A4
F4B1 F4B0
F4AF F4AE
F4AD F4AC
F4AB
Communication code F4BC F4BB F4BA F4B9 F4B8
F4B7 F4B6
F4B5 F4B4
F4B3
Characters
Communication code F4B2
Characters
Characters
Communication code
5-40 ●Code tables
F4C6 F4C5 F4C4 F4C3 F4C2 F4C1 F4C0 F4BF F4BE F4BD
(4)User pattern characters (2-byte codes)
Fixed size
User pattern
character
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
2-byte code F140 F141 F142 F143 F144 F145 F146 F147 F148 F149 F14A F14B F14C F14D F14E F14F
User pattern
character
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
2-byte code F150 F151 F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F15A F15B F15C F15D F15E F15F
User pattern
character
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2-byte code F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 F169 F16A F16B F16C F16D F16E F16F
User pattern
character
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
2-byte code F170 F171 F172 F173 F174 F175 F176 F177 F178 F179 F17A F17B F17C F17D F17E F17F
User pattern
character
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
2-byte code F180 F181 F182 F183 F184 F185 F186 F187 F188 F189 F18A F18B F18C F18D F18E F18F
User pattern
character
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
2-byte code F190 F191 F192 F193 F194 F195 F196 F197 F198 F199 F19A F19B F19C F19D F19E F19F
User pattern
character
96
97
98
99
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B0
B1
2-byte code F1A0 F1A1 F1A2 F1A3 F1A4 F1A5 F1A6 F1A7 F1A8 F1A9 F1AA F1AB F1AC F1AD F1AE F1AF
User pattern
character
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
2-byte code F1B0 F1B1 F1B2 F1B3 F1B4 F1B5 F1B6 F1B7 F1B8 F1B9 F1BA F1BB F1BC F1BD F1BE F1BF
User pattern
character
C8
C9
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
E0
E1
E2
E3
2-byte code F1C0 F1C1 F1C2 F1C3 F1C4 F1C5 F1C6 F1C7 F1C8 F1C9 F1CA F1CB F1CC F1CD F1CE F1CF
User pattern
character
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
2-byte code F1D0 F1D1 F1D2 F1D3 F1D4 F1D5 F1D6 F1D7 F1D8 F1D9 F1DA F1DB F1DC F1DD F1DE F1DF
User pattern
character
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
H0
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
2-byte code F1E0 F1E1 F1E2 F1E3 F1E4 F1E5 F1E6 F1E7 F1E8 F1E9 F1EA F1EB F1EC F1ED F1EE F1EF
User pattern
character
H6
H7
H8
H9
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
J0
J1
2-byte code F1F0 F1F1 F1F2 F1F3 F1F4 F1F5 F1F6 F1F7 F1F8 F1F9 F1FA F1FB F1FC F1FD F1FE F1FF
User pattern
character
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
2-byte code F220 F221 F222 F223 F224 F225 F226 F227
User pattern character display scheme
00,01 … … 09
(0 to 9)
10,11 … … 19
(10 to 19)
:
90,91 … … 99
(90 to 99)
A0,A1 … … A9
(100 to 109)
:
J0,J1 … … J9
(190 to 199)
●Code tables 5-41
(5)Punctuation characters (2-byte codes)
Punctuation
character
‘
.
:
,
Space
;
!
2-byte code F240 F241 F242 F243 F244 F245 F246
(6)Katakana (when KANA and dedicated characters can be input)
1 Available character sizes
Inter-character
space (dots)
5×8
7×10
10×12
12×16
18×24
1 to 3
1
2
4
6
2 Character codes table (2-byte code)
(1)Character size 5x8, 7x10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
834*
ァ
ア
ィ
イ
ゥ
ウ
ェ
エ
ォ
オ
カ
キ
ク
835*
ケ
コ
セ
ソ
タ
836*
チ
ッ
837*
838*
サ
メ
839*
テ
ツ
モ
ャ
ヲ
ン
ヤ
ス
ト
フ
ヒ
ム
シ
ナ
ユ
ョ
ヌ
C
ネ
ホ
ヘ
ュ
ニ
B
ヨ
ラ
リ
ル
レ
D
E
ノ
ハ
マ
ミ
ロ
F
ワ
゛
゜
ー
(2)Character size 10x12, 12x16, 18x24
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
834*
ァ
ア
ィ
イ
ゥ
ウ
ェ
エ
ォ
オ
カ
ガ
キ
ギ
ク
グ
835*
ケ
ゲ
コ
ゴ
サ
ザ
シ
ジ
ス
ズ
セ
ゼ
ソ
ゾ
タ
ダ
836*
チ
ヂ
ッ
ツ
ヅ
テ
デ
ト
ド
ナ
ニ
ヌ
ネ
ノ
ハ
バ
837*
パ
ヒ
ビ
ピ
フ
ブ
プ
ヘ
ベ
ペ
ホ
ボ
ポ
マ
ミ
838*
ム
メ
モ
ャ
ヤ
ュ
ユ
ョ
ヨ
ラ
リ
ル
レ
ロ
ヲ
ン
839*
Character code of long “ー “ is 815B.
5-42 ●Code tables
ワ
(7)Calendar character code
● Set "calendar block starting character"as the first character and set "calendar block ending charater" as
the last character.
(Example)
Calendar block
Y Y M M D D
Calendar block end character
Calendar character
Calendar block start character
Minute Second
Total number
Day of
Weeks
of days
week
Yaer
Month
Day
Hour
Calendar character
F250
F251
F252
F253
F254
F255
F256
F258
F259
Calendar block start chracter
F260
F261
F262
F263
F264
F265
F266
F268
F269
Calendar block end chracter
F270
F271
F272
F273
F274
F275
F276
F278
F279
Calendar character is 2-byte code only.
Specified number of digits for calendar characters
Calendar character
Yaer
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Total number of days
Weeks
Day of week
Specified number of digits
1 to 4 digits
1 to 3 digits
1 to 3 digits
1 to 2 digits
1 to 2 digits
1 to 2 digits
1 to 3 digits
1 to 3 digits
1 to 3 digits
Example of when performing printings transmission of calendar character
(Example 1) Example of when setting a calendar block to print item 1
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
0FH
SI
F2H 60H
Start chracter
F2H 50H
Calendar
F2H 51H
Calendar
F2H 71H
End chracter
0EH
SO
03H
ETX
Calendar block
[Transmission results]
Print item1
YYMM
: Calendar block range
YM
: Calendar character “Year, Month”
●Code tables 5-43
(Example 2) Example of when setting 2 calendar blocks to print item 1
02H 10H 31H 0FH F2H 60H F2H 50H F2H 51H F2H 51H F2H 52H F2H 72H 0EH
STX DLE
1
SI
Start
chracter
Calendar
Calendar
Calendar
Calendar
End
chracter
(Contd.)
SO
Calendar block 1
41H 42H 43H 0FH F2H 62H F2H 52H F2H 53H F2H 73H 0EH 03H
A
B
C
SI
Start
chracter
Calendar
Calendar
End
chracter
SO ETX
Calendar block 2
[Transmission results]
: Calendar block range
YYMMDD AND DDHH
Print item1
YMDH
: Calendar character “Year, Month,
Day, Hour”
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
0FH
SI
F2H
50H
Calendar
F2H
50H
Calendar
F2H
51H
Calendar
F2H
51H
Calendar
0EH
SO
03H
ETX
Calendar block
[Transmission results]
Print item1
: Calendar block range
YYMM
YM
: Calendar character “Year, Month”
(8)Count character code
● Set "count block starting character"as the first character and set "count block ending charater" as the
last character.
(Example)
Count block
C C C C C C
Count block end character
Count character
Count block start character
Count character
F25A
Count block start character Count block end character
F26A
F27A
Count character is 2-byte code only.
5-44 ●Code tables
C : Count character
Example of when performing printings transmission of count character
(Example 1)Example of when setting a count block to print item 1
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
0FH
SI
F2H 6AH
Start chracter
F2H 5AH
Count
F2H 5AH
Count
F2H 7AH
End chracter
0EH
SO
03H
ETX
Count block
[Transmission results]
: Count block range
CCCC
Print item1
: Count character
C
(Example 2)Example of when setting 2 count blocks to print item 1
02H 10H 31H 0FH F2H 6AH F2H 5AH F2H 5AH F2H 5AH F2H 5AH F2H 7AH 0EH
STX DLE
1
SI
Start
chracter
Count
Count
Count
Count
End
chracter
(Contd.)
SO
Count block 1
41H 42H 43H 0FH F2H 6AH F2H 5AH F2H 5AH F2H 7AH 0EH 03H
A
B
C
SI
Start
chracter
Count
End
chracter
Count
SO ETX
Count block 2
[Transmission results]
CCCCCC
Print item1
ABC C C C C
: Count block range
: Count character
C
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
0FH
SI
F2H 5AH
Count
F2H 5AH
Count
F2H 5AH
Count
F2H 5AH
Count
0EH
SO
03H
ETX
Countr block
[Transmission results]
Print item1
CCCC
: Count block range
C
: Count character
●Code tables 5-45
5.4.2 Header Table
ESC2
Header
Classification
Type
Recall
Registration
Message number
Header Classification
4
0001 to 2000
31H
4
0001 to 2000
32H
1 to 12
31H
0
-
32H
2
Line count : 1 to 5
Line spacing: 0 to 2
Format setup change
33H
1
Format setup : 30H to 32H
Character size/
inter character space
31H
3
Character size : 30H to 3CH
Inter character space : 00 to 28
32H
1
1 to 9
33H
1
30H to 47H
Readable code
34H
1
0 to 2
Prefix Code
35H
2
00 to 99
Horizontal and Vertical
coordinate
31H
8
Item number : 1 to 100
Horizontal (X) coordinate: 0 to 31998
Vertical (Y) coordinate : 0 to 29
Horizontal coordinate
32H
6
Item number : 1 to 100
Horizontal (X) coordinate : 0 to 31998
Vertical coordinate
33H
3
Item number : 1 to 100
Vertical (Y) coordinate : 0 to 29
41H
10
Item number : 1 to 100
Horizontal (X) direction :
-31998 to +31998
Vertical (Y) direction : -29 to +29
Horizontal move
42H
7
Item number : 1 to 100
Horizontal (X) direction :
-31998 to +31998
Vertical move
43H
4
Item number : 1 to 100
Vertical (Y) direction : -29 to +29
Character height
31H
2
00 to 99
Ink drop use percentage
32H
2
01 to 16
High-speed printing
33H
1
0 to 2
Character width
34H
4
0000 to 3999
Character orientation
35H
1
0 to 3
Print start delay
36H
4
0000 to 9999
37H
4
0000 to 9999
Message name
21H
Line count, print format
uniformity
Line count/Line spacing
Print format
Increased width
Bar code
Free layout
Horizontal and Vertical
move
Print start delay (reverse)
Print
Product speed matching
specifications
Pulse rate division Factor
5-46 ●Code tables
Data section
31H
Message number
20H
Data
count
22H
23H
24H
Message name: Max 12 digits
38H
1
0 to 2
39H
3
001 to 999
Repeat count
3DH
4
0000 to 9999
Repeat intervals
3EH
5
00000 to 99999
Target sensor timer
3FH
3
000 to 999
Target sensor filter
40H
1
1 to 2
Target sensor filter value
41H
4
0000 to 9999
Ink drop charge rule
42H
1
Charge rule : 31H to 33H
25H
Type
Calendar
condition
Count
condition
Date/time
setup
User pattern
character
transmission
Other
Header Classification
Data
count
Data section
32H
6
Calendar block : 1 to 8
Type : 0 to 4
Offset : Yaer 0000 to 0099
Month 0000 to 0099
Day
0000 to 1999
Hour -023 to 0099
Minute -059 to 0099
Zero suppress usage
(Year / month / day / hour
/ minute / week /
Day of week)
34H
3
Calendar block : 1 to 8
Type : 0 to 6
Mode : 0 to 2
Initial value
31H
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Initial value : max 20 digits
Range 1
32H
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Range 1 : max 20 digits
Range 2
33H
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Range 2 : max 20 digits
Update (in progress)
34H
7
Count block : 1 to 8
Update (in progress) : 000000 to 999998
Update (unit)
35H
7
Count block : 1 to 8
Update (unit) : 000001 to 999999
Increment
36H
3
Count block : 1 to 8
Increment : 01 to 99
Direction
37H
2
Count block : 1 to 8
Direction : 0 to 1
Jump from
38H
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Jump from : max 20 digits
Jump to
39H
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Jump to : max 20 digits
Reset
3AH
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Reset : max 20 digits
Reset signal
3BH
2
Count block : 1 to 8
Reset signal : 0 to 1
External signal count
3EH
2
Count block : 1 to 8
External count : 0 to 1
Current time
31H
14
Yaer, Month, Day, Hour, Minute,
Second (14 digits)
32H
1
1 to 2
Offset
(Year / month / day / hour
/ minute)
28H
2CH
Calendar time control
2EH
Calendar time
33H
14
Yaer, Month, Day, Hour, Minute,
Second (14 digits)
Clock system
34H
1
1 to 2
30H to 3CH
-
Character code + pattern data
Used together with print format message
Character size fixed
pattern
32H
Item No. specification
70H
Item No.
-
Remote operation
72H
30H to 34H
-
Online
73H
-
-
No STX/ETX
Offline
74H
-
-
No STX/EXT
Current time inquiry
75H
-
-
No STX/ETX; Inquiry
Communication buffer
Claer buffer
76H
-
-
Communication buffer
Reset printing
77H
-
-
Current time output
7FH
-
14
Yaer, Month, Day, Hour, Minute,
Second (14 digits)
●Code tables 5-47
5.5 Communication Timing
5.5.1 Signal Timing
(1)In overwrite-protected mode
On-line
Off-line
ENQ
External
device
ENQ
STX
ETX
ENQ
STX
ETX
A
B
ACK ACK
ACK ACK
ENQ
ENQ
STX
ETX
C
IJ printer
NAK
(No signal output)
Readiness
for reception
Ready for
reception
NAK
ACK
ACK
Not ready
for
reception
Print start signal
Printing
operation
A
(a)
(b)
B
(c)
C
C
(d)
(a) When the IJ printer is off-line
● The NAK code is transmitted in response to an ENQ code reception from the outside.
(b) When the IJ printer is on-line
1 When transmitting printing only
● Transmission data is received from the external device. When the received data is not in error, the
ACK code is transmitted and the "not ready for reception" state prevails.
● To switch from the "not ready for reception" state to the "ready for reception" state, perform one of
the following procedures.
1) Perform a printing operation once.
2) Transmit the DC2 (retransmission) code to the IJ printer.
3) Press the Comm On/Off buttun to enter the off-line mode, and then switch back to the on-line
mode.
● If the data transmitted from the external device is in error, the NAK code is transmitted after receipt
of the ETX code.
Since the "ready for reception" state is maintained in this instance, retransmit the data beginning.
2 When transmitting print conditions, user pattern characters, and print data recall
● When the data received from the external device is not in error, the ACK code is transmitted.
In this instance, the "ready for reception" state is maintained.
3 When transmitting printing, print conditions, user pattern characters, and print data recall
● When transmitting printing, print conditions, user pattern characters, and print data recall, ensure that
the print conditions, user pattern characters, and print data recall are transmitted prior to the printing.
If the printing is transmitted earlier than the other data, the "not ready for reception" state prevails.
Therefore, the subsequent transmission of the print conditions, user registration characters, and print
data recall causes a communication error.
(c) When the "not ready for reception" state prevails after transmission data reception from the external device
● The NAK code is transmitted in response to the ENQ code reception from the outside.
(d) Transmission data received from the external device
● Error-free transmission data is stored in the IJ printer. The same contents are printed until different
transmission data is transmitted to the IJ printer.
● If the data transmitted from the external device is in error, the IJ printer printings remain unchanged.
In such an instance, retransmit the data beginning as explained in (b).
The retransmission count setup must be determined from the device side.
5-48 ●Communication Timing
(e) When a data transmission is aborted (the transmission of up to the ETX
● The IJ printer printings remain unchanged. For data retransmission, perform either of the following
procedures.
1 Transmit the DC2 (retransmission) code to the IJ printer.
2 Press the Comm On/Off buttun to enter the off-line mode, and then switch back to the on-line mode.
(2) In overwrite-enabled mode
On-line
Off-line
ENQ
ENQ
External
device
STX
ETX
ENQ
STX
ETX
ENQ
STX
ETX
A
B
C
ACK ACK
ACK ACK
ACK ACK
ENQ
STX DATA ETX
D
IJ printer
NAK
ACK
ACK
(No signal output)
Not ready
Readiness for
Ready for
for reception reception reception
Print start signal
Printing
operation
A
(a)
(b)
C
C
(c)
D
(d)
D
(e)
(a) When the IJ printer is off-line
● The NAK code is transmitted in response to an ENQ code reception from the outside..
(b) When the IJ printer is on-line
● Transmission data is received from the external device. When it contains no error, the ACK code is
transmitted. In this instance, the "ready for reception" state is maintained.
● If the data transmitted from the external device is in error, the NAK code is transmitted after receipt of
the ETX code.
In this instance, retransmit the data beginning.
(c) Data retransmission
● Transmission data is received from the external device, and subsequent transmission data is accepted.
In this case, the received data is accepted even if the DC2 (retransmission) code is not attached.
(d) Printing during reception
● While data is being received from the external device, the previously printed contents are printed.
(e) Transmission data received from the external device
● Error-free transmission data is stored in the IJ printer. The same contents are printed until different
transmission data is transmitted to the IJ printer.
(f) When a data transmission is aborted
(the transmission of up to the ETX code is not completed)
● The IJ printer printings remain unchanged. For data retransmission, perform either of the following
procedures.
1 Transmit the DC2 (retransmission) code to the IJ printer.
2 Press the Comm On/Off buttun to enter the off-line mode, and then switch back to the on-line mode.
●Communication Timing 5-49
(3) Switching print data with no occurrence of fault "Print data changeover in progress M"
The following shows the method of use with no occurrence of "Print data changeover in progress M" when
switching the print contents during transmission:
(a) Print timing schematic diagram
Print target
detector
Printing
Print target
detector
ABC
Print target
detector
ABC
ABC
Print target
detector
Print target
detector
DEF
DEF
Switching
Communication
DEF
1 The IJ printer receives contents "DEF" in communication while printing contents "ABC".
2 The IJ printer switches printing to the received contents: It will print the previous data during
switching.
Switching time
No.
1
2
3
Transmission type
Print description
Print data recall
Print conditions
Conditions
When the character height, character width,
character orientation, ink drop use percentage,
or print format changes before or after recall.
When the character height, character width,
character orientation, ink drop use percentage,
or print format does not change before or after
recall.
-
Maximum time
(ms)
100
500
100
500
● The fewer characters, the shorter the time.
● The fewer different time of the print format, the shorter the time.
(b) Restrictions
Perform communications only under the conditions shown below. If even one of these conditions is not met, any
input to print target detector while the communicated contents are being printed will cause fault "Print data
changeover in progress M" to occur.
Conditions that the print target detector input will not cause an abnormality
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Conditions
Make sure that none of the following software options are provided:
Barcode Reader Connection (SOP-08)
Set the Print data changeover on User environment setup screen to "Disable".
Set the Communication mode on Communication environment setup screen to "overwrite-enabled".
Set the Buffer function on Communication environment setup screen to "Disable".
Transmit print contents independently, and do not package print content transmission with print
condition transmission.
Transmit to print items with no count block.
Do not transmit the count characters.
5-50 ●Communication Timing
5.5.2 Response Time
5.5.2-1 Time interval (T1) between external device communication and
IJ printer response
External device
ENQ
STX
IJ printer
………
ETX
ACK
ACK
T0
T1
Baud rate (bps)
150 to 1200
2400 to 115200
T0 Maximum time (ms)
5
1
(1) When Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall"
Time interval T1 when Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall"
No. Transmission type
Conditions
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=fixed.
1 Print description
2 Print data recall
Print data
3
registration
4
5
Print conditions
6
7
Free layout
8
User pattern
character
9 Date/time setup
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=async.
Print specifications
Print format
Line count /
print format uniformity
Format setup change
-
T1 Maximum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
10
M
+25
10
45
Remarks
*1
M
+75
10
*1 *2
(M: Number of
(M: Number of
communication
communication
characters)
characters)
5
30
1800
1800
10
20
10
50
20
50
100
100
M+10
M+10
(M: Number of
(M: Number of
communication
communication
patterns)
patterns)
5
5
*3
15
15
Error reset
10 Remote operation Operation start, operation stop,
20
50
deflection voltage control
● When the Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall" and Free layout transmission is made,
a communication error will occur.
*1 For "t=fixed" and "t=async.", see Section 5.2.1, "Setting Communication Environment ".
*2 When there is a data matrix , QR code and GS1 DataBar setting, the time is as follows:
*3 If time changes just before 3ACK transmission, ACK transmission may be delayed about 20 ms.
Time T1 when there is a data matrix , QR code and GS1 DataBar setting
T1 Maximum time (ms)
Barcode type
Character size
Within 24 items
25 items or more
100
8×N+20
5×8
Data matrix
150
12×16, 18×24
15×N+40
QR (21×21)
200×N
200×N
QR code
QR (25×25)
300×N
300×N
QR (29×29)
400×N
400×N
GS1 DataBar
15×N+30
15× N+30
(N : Number of Barcode)
●Communication Timing 5-51
(2) When Print format is set to "Free layout"
Time interval T1 when Print format is set to "Free layout"
No. Transmission type
Conditions
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=fixed.
1 Print description
2 Print data recall
Print data
3
registration
4
5
Print conditions
6
7 Free layout
8
User pattern
character
9 Date/time setup
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=async.
Print specifications
Print format
Line count /
print format uniformity
Format setup change
-
Error reset
Operation start,
10 Remote operation
operation stop,
deflection voltage control
T1 Maximum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
60
120
M
+110
10
M
+270
10
1800
1800
20
20
20
50
-
-
Remarks
*4
*4
(M: Number of
(M: Number of
*5
communication
communication
characters)
characters)
30
30
100
100
20
20
M+10
M+10
(M: Number of
(M: Number of
communication
communication
patterns)
patterns)
5
5
*6
15
15
100
250
● When the Print format is set to "Free layout" and Print condition transmission of "Line count/Print
format uniformity" is made, a communication error will occur.
*4 For "t=fixed" and "t=async.", see Section 5.2.1, "Setting Communication Environment ".
*5 When there is a data matrix , QR code and GS1 DataBar setting, the time is as follows:
*6 If time changes just before 3ACK transmission, ACK transmission may be delayed about 20 ms.
Time T1 when there is a data matrix , QR code and GS1 DataBar setting
T1 Maximum time (ms)
Barcode type
Character size
Within 24 items
25 items or more
58
250
5× 8
Data matrix
85
600
12×16, 18×24
300
600
QR (21×21)
400
600
QR code
QR (25×25)
500
700
QR (29×29)
GS1 DataBar
60
250
(N : Number of Barcode)
5-52 ●Communication Timing
5.5.2-2 Time interval (T2) between IJ printer response and printing start
External
device
ETX
IJ printer
STX
ENQ
ACK
ACK
5ms (*7)
T2
Print start signal
Printing
operation
(1)When Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall"
Time interval T2 when Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall"
No. Transmission type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Print description
Print data recall
9
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=fixed.
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=async.
When the character height, character
width, character orientation, ink drop
use percentage, or print format changes
before or after recall
When the character height,
character width, character orientation,
ink drop use percentage, or print format
does not change before or after recall
Print conditions
User pattern
character
Date/time setup
T2 Minimum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
M
+15
10
(M: Number of
communication
characters)
M
+30
10
(M: Number of
communication
characters)
Remarks
*8 *11
0
0
400
400
*9
40
40
*10
-
30
30
Line count / print format uniformity
Format setup change
-
400
400
200
200
-
400
400
200
200
-
-
25
25
Print data
registration
Free layout
8
Conditions
Print specifications
Print format
-
M
+15
10
(M: Number of
printing
characters)
M
+30
10
(M: Number of
printing
characters)
*9
*9
*10
*8
● The IJ printer executes an internal process to make printing preparations in accordance with the received print
data. Do not enter the print start signal during internal process execution.
● In the overwrite-protected mode, initiate the next communication after completion of printing.
● In the overwrite-enabled mode, the next communication can be transmitted during printing, but the ACK/
NAK response does not return until the ongoing printing operation is complete. (t=async.)
● When a print start signal is input with shorter timing than T2, the fault "Print data changeover in progress M"
occurs.
● The more different items of the print format, the longer the time until ready to print.
● When the Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall" and Free layout transmission is made,
a communication error will occur.
*7 If the communication time interval is not sufficiently secured, it may not operate normally.
*8 When there is a data matrix and QR code setting, the time is as follows:
*9 When there is a QR code setting, T2 Minimum time is 400xN (ms) (N : Number of QR codes).
*10 When there is a QR code setting, the time is as follows:
*11 When there is a GS1 DataBar setting, the time is as follows:
●Communication Timing 5-53
Time T2 when there is a data matrix, QR code and GS1 DataBar setting
Barcode type
T2 Minimum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
100
8×N+20
150
15×N+40
200×N
200×N
300×N
300×N
400×N
400×N
15×N+30
15×N+30
Character size
5×8
12×16, 18×24
QR (21×21)
QR (25×25)
QR (29×29)
Data matrix
QR code
GS1 DataBar
(N : Number of Barcode)
(2) When Print format is set to "Free layout"
Time interval T2 when Print format is set to "Free layout"
No. Transmission type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Print description
Print data recall
Conditions
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=fixed.
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=async.
When the character height, character
width, character orientation, ink drop
use percentage, or print format changes
before or after recall
When the character height,
character width, character orientation,
ink drop use percentage, or print format
does not change before or after recall
Free layout
User pattern
character
Date/time setup
M
+50
10
(M: Number of
communication
characters)
M
+150
10
(M: Number of
communication
characters)
0
0
400
400
40
250
-
150
250
Line count / print format uniformity
Format setup change
-
400
400
200
400
400
400
250
400
-
25
25
Print data
registration
Print conditions
T2 Minimum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
Print specifications
Print format
-
M
+50
10
(M: Number of
printing
characters)
M
+150
10
(M: Number of
printing
characters)
Remarks
*12
*12
*12
● The IJ printer executes an internal process to make printing preparations in accordance with the received print
data. Do not enter the print start signal during internal process execution.
● In the overwrite-protected mode, initiate the next communication after completion of printing.
● In the overwrite-enabled mode, the next communication can be transmitted during printing, but the ACK/
NAK response does not return until the ongoing printing operation is complete. (t=async.)
● When a print start signal is input with shorter timing than T2, the fault "Print data changeover in progress M"
occurs.
● The more different items of the print format, the longer the time until ready to print.
● When the Print format is set to "Free layout" and Print condition transmission of "Line count/Print format
uniformity" is made, a communication error will occur.
5-54 ●Communication Timing
*7 If the communication time interval is not sufficiently secured, it may not operate normally.
*12 When there is a data matrix, QR code and GS1 DataBar setting, the time is as follows:
Time T2 when there is a data matrix, QR code and GS1 DataBar setting
Barcode type
T2 Minimum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
58
250
85
600
300
600
400
600
500
700
60
250
Character size
5 ×8
12×16, 18×24
QR (21×21)
QR (25×25)
QR (29×29)
Data matrix
QR code
GS1 DataBar
(N : Number of Barcode)
5.5.2-3 On-line/Off-line Transmission
Off-line
External device
ESC2
On-line
73H
ESC2
IJ printer
Off-line
74H
ACK
ACK
T
T
T Maximum time (ms)
50
5.5.2-4 Current time output Transmission
T
External device
ESC2
75H
IJ printer
ACK
STX
Baud rate (bps)
150 to 1200
2400 to 115200
Text
ETX
T Maximum time (ms)
15
5
●Communication Timing 5-55
5.6 Communication Monitor Function
● The contents of serial communications between the external device and IJ printer are displayed.
● Up to 3,000 bytes of data can be acquired at a time.
● When you press the Start button, the system erases monitored data and acquires new data.
● When you press the USB output button, the communication description which is displayed on screen
can be output to USB memory.
Comm. monitor
[Ready
]
Com=1
2015.07.07 12:45
Blue : DLE2,ESC2,DLE,ESC Red : Failed line
No Trans.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
S
R
S
R
S
R
S
Communication description
05
06
02 10 31 41 42 43 44 45 10 32 31 32 33 34 35 03
06
05
06
02 10 31 41 42 43 44 45 10 32 31 32 33 34 7F 03
15
M
Manual Shutdown
HOME
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Abort
USB output
Start
Detection
Disable Enable
Proc. status：Halted
Back
(1) Screen display
Item
Trans.
Communication
description
Proc. status
Description
External device → IJ printer
: R (Receive)
IJ printer
→ External device : S (Send)
Sended/received data are displayed in hexadecimal notation. Sixteen bytes of
data are displayed per line.
The current status is indicated (monitoring or interrupted).
(2) Input keys
Item
Start
Abort
Error detection
Previous list/
Next list
USB output
Back
5-56 ●Communication Monitor Function
Description
Starts exercising the line monitor function. Erases the monitored
information.
Aborts the execution of the line monitor function.
This switches over whether the system is to detect error-ridden locations.
● Disable: The system will not detect error-ridden locations. The system
will memorize up to bytes 3,000 of data transmitted and received.
● Enable: The system will display error-ridden locations in red. The system
will memorize up to transmitted and received data up to the location where
an error was detected.
Used to switch to another screen when the amount of information to be
displayed is too large to fit on a single screen.
The Communication description which is displayed on screen can be output
to USB memory.
Returns you to the maintenance menu.
(3) Explanation of USB output function.
● When you press the USB output button, the Communication description which is displayed on screen can
be output to a USB memory.
● The Communication description which is displayed on screen can be output to a USB memory.
when "Comm. monitor"screen is displayed AND Comm. monitor is in "Halted" status.
● The Communication description is output in a Text file format.
● Explanation of file composition and file name.
・RXCLOG holder is automatically created right below the USB memory.
・The Communication description is output in the name of LOG_Serial number_YYMMDDhhmmss.txt
right below the RXCLOG holder.
USB Memory
RXCLOG  LOG_Serial number_YYMMDDhhmmss.txt
YYMMDDhhmmss stands
for Year, Month, Date, Hour,
Minute and Second.
● Explanation of content of output.
・A Target port is output in the lead, such as "Standard" for the standard port and "Secondary" for the
expansion port.
・Compositions of the Text file are output in the order of No., Trans, and Communication description.
(No.: 4 digit number; Trans.: "S" for sending and "R" for receiving.)
・An asterisk (*) is output in front of the error part when an error was detected.
(Example of output text file)
Standard
A Target port is output.
0001,R,05,
0002,S,06,
0003,R,02,10,31,41,42,43,44,45,10,32,31,32,33,34,35,03,
0004,S,06,
It is an error part.
0005,R,05,
0006,S,06,
0007,R,02,10,31,41,42,43,44,45,10,32,31,32,33,34, *7F, 03,
0008,S,15,
Trans. is output with "S" for sending and "R" for receiving.
No. is output in 4 digit number.
● Explanation of content of notes.
・The data is NOT output by pressing the USB output button if the Communication description does NOT
Exist.
・The data is NOT output by pressing the USB output button when the Line monitor is in operation.
・<USB Memory Error> is displayed when the USB memory is NOT installed on the IJP.
・<USB Memory Error> is displayed when the USB memory runs out of its capacity.
・The data is overwritten if the same file name already exists in the USB memory.
・Do NOT remove the USB memory when the USB data output is in process.
●Communication Monitor Function 5-57
5.7 Warning Messages
● If any communication is in error, the associated warning message appears below the status display area.
● Note the message to confirm the error and then take remedial action as appropriate for the indicated error
code.
Print description
[Ready
Message name[
]
]
Warning
Com=1
2015.07.07 12:45
Current user ID : user2
Warning
M
Manual Shutdown
−
＋
Interlaced
Ink operating time
１００(hours)
Cumulative op. time
１００(hours)
０．２５０(MPa；standard value:０．２５０)
Ink pressure
Maintenance
Print count
reset
１０００(prints)
Print count
Auxiliary
function
Environment
setup menu
Select
login user
Create/Edit
message
Menu
Error code table
Error
code
Name
Description
● The transmitted code was not defined
for communication use.
● The transmitted message had an illegal
structure.
Print specifications The print specifications data value was
002
code error
illegal.
The maximum value was exceeded by
Print character code
003
the number of characters for printings
error
that could be received as one item.
004 Item number error The item number code value was illegal.
005 Header error
The header value was illegal.
● An attempt was made to establish
communication while the "not ready
for reception" state prevailed.
● "Apply" key and message window
were both displayed.
Ready-for006
● "Off-line fixed" has been set in
reception error
Communication environment.
● Communication monitor screen was
displayed.
● Communication was conducted during
the stop or shutdown process.
Print specifications The maximum value was exceeded by
008
code error
the print specifications data.
Transmissioncode
001
error
009 ETX code error
The ETX code position was illegal.
010 DLE code error
The DLE code position was illegal.
011 STX code error
The STX code position was illegal.
012 ENQ code error
The ENQ code position was illegal.
ESC code error
(ESC, ESC2)
The ESC code position was illegal.
013
5-58 ●Warning Messages
Check
Check the baud rate and transmission
code.
Check the print specifications
communication text.
Check the printings communication text.
Check the printings communication text.
Check the header.
Check the transmission timing.
Check the print specifications
communication text.
Check the transmission procedure and
ETX code.
Check the transmission procedure and
DLE code.
Check the transmission procedure and
STX code.
Check the transmission procedure and
ENQ code.
Check the transmission procedure and
ESC code.
Error
Name
code
014 Parity error
Print format code
015
error
016 Overrun error
017 Framing error
019
020
021
022
023
024
026
027
Description
Check
The parity error occurred.
Check the baud rate and data format.
Check the print format transmission text
The print format data value was illegal.
section.
The overrun error occurred.
Check the baud rate and data format.
The framing error occurred.
Check the baud rate and data format.
● An illegal 2-byte code (2 bytes per
character) was transmitted.
2-byte code error
Check the 2-byte code transmission text.
● Only one byte of 2-byte code was
transmitted.
● The print data registration number was
illegal.
Check the print data recall / transmission
Print data code error
● An unregistered number was
code.
encountered.
The SI (shift in) or SO (shift out) code
SI/SO code error
Check the printings communication text.
position was illegal.
User pattern
The character size or character code
Check the user pattern communication
character size/
values were illegal.
text.
character code error
● When necessary conditions for high
speed printing were not satisfied, NM
or QM mode was transmitted.
High-speed
Check the print specifications
● When High speed printing NM or QM
printing setup error
communication text.
mode was set, a setting which did not
satisfy necessary conditions for high
speed printing was transmitted.
● Transmitted to block where
calendar/count characters were not
present.
Calendar/count
Check calendar/count condition
● Set value was outside specifications.
conditions error
communication text.
● Zero suppression transmission was
performed to print item for which
barcode had been set.
● A character undefined for bar code use
was found in the printings.
● The number for ITF did not consist of
an even number of numerals
Check the printings print format
Bar code setup error beginning with an odd digit position. communication text.
● The input data for EAN-13 was not
numeric.
● The number of DM, QR code, Micro
QR code or GS1 DataBar is 2 or more
when Format setup is Free Layout.
● A dedicated character or katakana was
transmitted in a character size which
cannot be inputted.
Printings error
● The three characters of a dedicated
Check the printings communication text
character string were not properly
grouped.
● A count value is out of a count range.
●Warning Messages 5-59
Error
code
031
Name
Create messages
error
Setting conditions
error
033 Setting range error
032
Free layout
transmission036
Communication
error
Free layout
037 transmissionSetup error
Free layout
038 transmissionReflection error
Free layout
transmission039
Format setup
reflection error
Free layout
transmission040 Format setup
communication
error
5-60 ●Warning Messages
Description
● While "Create messages" function was
operating, on-line transmission was
performed.
● On-line transmission was performed
when print data which was controlled
separately from data created and
registered by print description screen,
was present.
● Setting value does not satisfy the
required conditions.
● Setting value is out of stipulated range.
● Free layout transmission was made
when Format setup is "Individual" or
"Overall".
● "Free layout" is transmitted to Basic
machine.
● The specified item number does not
exist.
● Character other than "+" or "-" is input
to Horizontal sign or Vertical sign.
● Set value of the Coordinate or
Horizontal/Vertical dot count is
invalid.
When the item was moved by Free
layout transmission, the item after move
went to the area other than Free layout
area.
● When the Print content was changed
by Print content transmission, the print
item after move went to the area other
than Free layout area.
● When Character size, Inter-character
spacing, Bold, or Barcode of the item
is changed by Print condition transmission, the print item after move
went to the area other than Free layout
area.
When the Format setup is set to "Free
layout", Print condition transmission of
"Line count/Print format uniformity",
"Line count, Line spacing", "High speed
printing" or "Ink drop charge rule" was
made.
Check
Check the timing of on-line
transmission.
Communication text re-check.
Communication text re-check.
Check the Communication text.
Check the free layout communication
text.
Check the free layout communication
text.
Check the Printings text and Print format
communication text.
Check the Communication text.
5.8 Precautions
5.8.1 Notes on Product speed matching Feature Use
(1) If the product speed matching signal cannot be entered during printing, the printing state
continues to prevail so that communication may not be established (no response can be made).
If such a situation is encountered, perform procedure 1 or 2 below.
1 Enter the standby state and then initiate the communication.
2 Issue the print abort code "DC3". After the IJ printer returns an "ACK" response,
(2) Number of pulses necessary for a rotary encoder from print signal detection until the start of
printing.
Number of pulses necessary = Number of printing preparation pulses ( 1 ) + Print start delay.
1 Number of printing preparation pulses = A / 1 scan time
Use an integer by rounding up the fractional portion.
Nozzle diameter
65μm
1 scan time =
Value of A
5.5
(Vertical dot count + character width setting) X Ink drop use percentage
Excitation frequency (kHz)
(ms)
When “Speed compensation” is enabled, print start is delayed for 30 scans.
5.8.2 Notes on Print Condition Transmission
(1) The number of digits for character height data is 2 by default. However, the preceding IJ printer
models GX and HX use 3 digits by default for print condition transmission (optional function). If the
new model of the IJ printer is used as a replacement for such a predecessor, open the following
screen from the communication environment setup screen and change the number of digits for
character height data to 3.
＜Standard communication＞
overwrite-protected overwrite-enabled
Communication mode
Print message transfer ACK
t=fixed
t=async.
Print spec transfer char height
2 digits
3 digits
Back
Data digts of the character height
● Character height (when the 3-digit data format is chosen)
ESC
Header 30H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Character height (000 to 099)
Note: If the value is within the range from 100 to 999, an error occurs.
●Precautions 5-61
5.9 Communication Buffer
5.9.1 Overview
(1) Print content transmission
● The print contents received through print content transmission will not be reflected in printing
immediately, but will be temporarily held in buffer.
● The print contents are fetched from the buffer one by one for each printing, and reflected in subsequent
printing.
[Example of transmitting print contents constantly during printing]
External device
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
Print content
transmission
Detection of print
start signal
IJ printer
Printing
Printing
[Example of transmitting collective print contents at the beginning]
External device
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
IJ printer
Printing
5-62 ●Communication Buffer
A
B
C
D
5.9.2 Description of Functions
(1) Application procedure
● Prepare the following in advance:
Preliminary Preparation Items
No.
Procedure
1 Specify "overwrite-enabled" for communication mode on the communication environment screen.
In addition, specify "t=fixed" for print message transfer ACK.
2 Set the buffer function on the second page of the communication environment setting screen to
"enable."
3 Confirm the setting values for "Buffer repeat count", "Empty Buffer Fault", "Timing of Fault" and
"Data number at Fault" on the second page of the communication environment setting screen.
Setting items of communication environment setting screen
Setting items
Buffer function
Description
Initial values
Selects enable/disable for buffer function.
Disable
Sets how many times printing is to be executed before switching the
Buffer repeat count
1
printing contents.
Selects whether or not communication buffer errors are to be
Empty Buffer Fault generated. The conditions for occurrence are set by "Timing of
Disable
Fault" and "Data number at Fault".
Selects timing by which communication buffer errors are to be
Timing of Fault
Print Start
generated.
Sets the number of print data items by which a communication
Data number at Fault
0
buffer error is to be generated.
Comm. env. setup
Buffer function
Buffer repeat count
Empty Buffer Fault
[Stop
Disable
]
2015.07.07 12:45
Enable
０００１ (1〜9999)
Disable
Com=0
Enable
Timing of Fault
Print Start
Data Number at Fault
0
M
Manual
Startup
Print. Complete
HOME
(0〜9)
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Back
● The function (application) will be valid only when the printer is online and in the ready status.
Offline will set to standard-mode printing.
● The following shows the application procedure :
Application Procedure
No.
Procedure
1 Switch to online.
Procedure No.1 and 2 can be in random order
2 Set to the ready status.
Transmit print contents accordingly so that print contents sent at least N times remain in the buffer.
3
(N: Data number at Fault)
4 Print.
5 Subsequently repeat steps 3 and 4 above.
●Communication Buffer 5-63
(2) Buffer
● The print content receive buffer has a queue structure (beginning with oldest data, in sequence).
● Print content is fetched from the buffer for each printing.
● Once the Ready status is set, the first print content will be fetched from the buffer.
● The buffer capacity is 100 print items (total 1000 chracters). An alarm will be raised if it exceeded its
capacity.
● The buffer will be cleared when offline is set.
● The buffer is always empty immediately after power is turned on.
● The buffer will not be cleared even if the status is changed to that other than the print enable status.
● When offline is switched to online, the contents in buffer will be cleared, and then the standard-mode print
operation will continue. In this case, print contents of at the time it was changed offline will be printed,
then subsequently same print contents will be printed. However, this option feature will be effective again
by reconfiguring the setting according to the procedure described in the previous page.
● If printing is interrupted because of some fault (print overlap fault, etc.), printing will restart from the
subsequent data in buffer.
(3) Character types available
● Calendar characters and count characters are not available.
● To use user pattern characters, define them in advance using "Create user pattern" function. Undefined
user pattern characters will be printed as spaces.
(4) Examples of operational procedure
(Example 1) Normal operation:
Online
External device
A
B
C
D
E
Print content
transmission
F
IJ printer
Detection of print
start signal
Ready
Printing
A
B
Printing
C
(Example 2) When status is restored to that other than ready during normal operation, and printing
is to restart in ready status:
Online
External device
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
IJ printer
Ready
Printing
5-64 ●Communication Buffer
(Example 3) When offline is restored during normal operation, and printing is subsequently
performed in standard mode:
Online
External device
A
B
C
D
IJ printer
Ready
Printing
B
A
B
B
B
(Example 4) Buffer repeat count is 2.
External device
A
B
C
IJ printer
A
Printing
A
B
B
(Example 5) Timing of Fault : Print completed, Data count when error occurs : 2
External device
A
B
C
D
IJ printer
Printing
A
B
A communication buffer fault occurs because the number of data in the buffer is
2 after B is printed.(C and D in the buffer are not printed)
(Example 6) Timing of Fault : Print started, Data count when error occurs : 0
External device
A
B
Detection of print
start signal
IJ printer
Printing
A
B
A communication buffer fault occurs because the number of data in the buffer
is 0 after B is printed followed by detection of print start signal.
●Communication Buffer 5-65
5.9.3 External Communications
5.9.3-1 Transmitting print contents
(1) Function
● The received print content will not be reflected in printing immediately, but temporarily held in buffer.
External device
ENQ
STX
IJ printer
DLE
Item
No.
Content
ETX
ACK
ACK
● To facilitate operation, first input fixed characters that do not need to be changed, and then transmit
only the print items to be changed.
(2) Restriction
● The maximum number of print items which can be sent at 1 time is 8 print items (maximum 80
characters).
5.9.3-2 Clearing buffer and restarting printing
(1) Function
● When text “clear buffer” is transmitted, the print contents held in buffer will be cleared.
● To restart printing, perform the following procedure after transmitting text "clear buffer".
If this procedure is not followed, the print contents stored before the buffer cleared may be printed.
1 Transmit print contents so that print contents sent at least N times remain in the buffer.
Procedure:
(N: Data number at Fault)
2 Transmit text "restart printing".
3 Printing is possible whenever the print start signal is input.
External device
STX
Header 76h : Clear buffer
Header 77h : Restart printing
ESC2 Header ETX
ACK
IJ printer
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
External device
STX
Header 2Dh : Clear buffer
Header 77h : Restart printing
ESC Header ETX
ACK
IJ printer
[Conceptual diagram of transmission procedure]
Online
External device
1
…
20
Clear
21
…
40
Restart
IJ printer
Ready
Standby
Ready
Print start signal
Printing
1
21
22
(2) Restriction
● Independently transmit text "clear buffer" or "restart printing": These cannot be transmitted with
another text (print content transmission, print data call-up transmission, etc.).
● Transmit text "clear buffer" or "restart printing" only while printing is not in progress.
● Input the print start signal at least 500 ms after ACK is returned to "restart printing".
5.9.3-3 Print data call-up transmission
(1) When calling up print data via communication, always execute the call-up before transmitting
data to the buffer. If call-up is executed in the Ready status, the called up print content will be
printed.
5-66 ●Communication Buffer
5.9.4 Errors
(1) Errors during external communications
Errors during print content transmission and print data call-up
No.
1
2
3
Condition
Type of error
NAK is returned.
Not all received print contents could be held in buffer because
However, this will not cause any
its capacity was exceeded
external communication error.
Number of print items of received contents is more than 9.
External communication error 030
Calendar or count character was included in print data call-up
External communication error 027
transmission
Error when buffer is cleared
No.
Condition
1 Text was transmitted together with another text
Type of error
External communication error 002
(2) Errors during printing
Errors during printing
No.
1
2
Condition
The number of received contents in buffer was less than "Data
number at Fault".
Print start signal was received during print data switching
immediately after ACK was returned to "restart printing"
Type of error
Fault "Communication Buffer
Fault"
Fault
"Invalid Data Change Timing"
● When "communication buffer fault" occurs, the window will be cleared, followed by standby
status.
(3) Error when status is changed
Error when status is changed
No.
1
Condition
Calendar characters or count characters were included to
existing print contents when restored to online.
Type of error
Confirmation message
"Communication buffer error"
●Communication Buffer 5-67
6. CIRCULATION SYSTEM WORK
AND ADJUSTMENT METHOD
WARNING
● Never pour the ink and makeup waste into a sewer, etc.
Have the ink and makeup drainage processed by an industrial waste processor as
special control industrial waste and used wiping papers and the empty container as
industrial waste.
● Do not remove, apply unreasonable force to, or bend the piping tubes unnecessarily.
Since high pressure is applied to parts of the ink and solvent inside the piping tube,
the ink and solvent may spurt out and get into your eyes and mouth or soil your
hands and clothing.
If the ink or solvent gets into your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse it out with warm
water and see a doctor.
● When replenishing the ink and makeup, changing the ink, or performing other work in
which the ink and makeup are handled, be sure not to spill the ink and makeup.
If the ink and makeup is accidentally spilled, quickly wipe it off with wiping paper, etc.
Do not close the maintenance cover until you verify that the wiped parts are
completely dry.
Since the ink and makeup vapor will collect inside the printer especially in the state in
which the ink and makeup was spilled inside the printer and was not wiped off
completely, it will cause ignition and fire.
When wiping is difficult in the energized state, perform shutdown processing with the
maintenance cover remaining open and turn off the power, then perform wiping
again.
● If leaking of the ink and makeup inside the printer was detected during printer
operation or maintenance, quickly wipe it with wiping paper, etc. and perform
shutdown processing with the maintenance cover remaining open and turn off the
power, then repair the leak.
If operation is continued when the ink and makeup is leaking, it will cause trouble
and prevent normal printing will become.
In addition, since the ink and makeup are combustible, they may cause a fire.
● The ink and makeup, their waste solution, used wiping papers and empty containers
are flammable. Waste disposal must comply with appropriate regulations.
Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further information.
● When the ink particles are caught in a beaker during test printing, etc., use a
conductive beaker and securely connect the beaker to a ground.
In addition, be sure that the print head is not inserted into the beaker.
Since the ink particles used in printing are electrically charged, if the beaker is not
connected to a ground, the charge load will gradually increase and cause a fire.
CAUTION
● Pay careful attention to the following items regarding handling of the ink and makeup:
1 Wear gloves and goggles so that the ink and makeup will not directly contact your
skin.
If the ink or makeup gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and warm water.
2 When taking the ink or makeup in and out of the bottle, be sure that the ink or
makeup does not get on the equipment and surroundings. If the ink or makeup gets
on the equipment or surroundings, immediately wipe it off with makeup.
3 Since the vapor pressure of the makeup is generally high, if the ambient
temperature is high such as in the summer, etc., the internal pressure will rise and
makeup could spurt out when the outside cover is removed. Therefore, when
unplugging,
●do not hold the bottle near your face
●place the can on a level surface
●open while covering the opening with a rag, etc.
6-1 ●Circulation System Work and Adjustment Method
6.1 Circulation control screen operation
1
Start from the Maintenance menu.
Perform menu 1 and menu 2 switching using Prev. menu and Next menu .
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Eject ink
(Goes to Standby)
Cleaning stop
No-cleaning stop
HOME
1st menu
Nozzle backwash
Recovery-line
cleaning
Ink replacement
Ink filter
replacement
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Process after
long-term shutdown
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Ink circulation
Cancel
Makeup refill
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
Proc. status:
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
Start/Continue
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink refill
Ink drainage
HOME
2nd menu
Pressure relief
Ink stream
alignment
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Cancel
Parts usage time
management
Circulation system
environment setup
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
2
Select the function you want to perform and press Start/Continue .
3
Different operation guides are displayed depending on the selected function.
● Perform operation in accordance with the operation guide.
● When you want to stop operation, press Abort .
●Circulation control screen operation 6-2
6.2 Circulation control contents
● During generation of an “Main Ink Tank Too Full” fault, input from any of the keys is not accepted. Perform
operation after referring to par. “6.13 Draining ink from the main ink tank” and clearing the fault.
● The receivable states are different depending on the contents of circulation control. Note that operation cannot
be performed from states other than those shown in the table below.
Circulation control name
Contents
Receivable state
Eject ink
(Goes to Standby)
Used for startup at maintenance.
(Ink ejection only. The IJ printer does not enter the Ready
state.)
Stop
Cleaning stop
Normal shutdown processing. The nozzle is automatically
cleaned and the printer is stopped.
Ready or Standby
No-cleaning stop
Shutdown processing used when stopping temporarily.
Automatic nozzle cleaning is not performed.
Ready or Standby
Nozzle backwash
makeup is sucked in from the nozzle and the nozzle is
cleaned. Perform this operation while pouring makeup from
the cleaning bottle onto the nozzle tip (orifice plate surface).
Stop
makeup is sucked in from the gutter and cleaning of the
Gutter cleaning
recovery-line is performed. Perform this operation while
(Recovery-line cleaning) pouring makeup from the cleaning bottle onto the end of the
gutter.
Stop
Ink replacement
Used when replacing the ink inside the IJ printer with new
ink. This operation performs from ink drainage to refilling
consecutively.
Stop
Ink filter replacement
Used when replacing the ink filter. This operation performs
from ink drainage to refilling consecutively.
Stop
Ink circulation
Used when bleeding the air from inside the circulation line
and when making the ink inside the flow lines uniform. This
operation can be performed even while ink is being ejected.
At the end of this operation, the IJ printer enters the Eject ink
(standby) state.
Standby
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Used before printer is shutdown for a long time.
Stop
Process after
long-term shutdown
Used when the printer is restarted after long-term
shutdown.
Stop
Makeup refill
Used to fill the cleaning path with the makeup at the time of
printer installation.
Stop
Ink drainage
Used when draining the ink inside the ink drainage unit.
Stop
Used when refilling the IJ printer with ink. The amount of
ink in the main ink tank is set to the initial level. After refilling, the IJ printer enters the Eject ink (standby) state.
Stop
Depressurizes the inside the entire circulation system.
(Used when performing maintenance work.)
Stop
Used when adjusting the ink stream position. Ejects makeup
from the nozzle.
Stop
Ink refill
Pressure relief
Ink stream adjustment
Parts usage time
management
Used when managing the usage time of the circulation
system parts. Used when checking the amount of ink and
makeup consumption.
All status
Circulation system
environment setup
Used when selecting ink concentration management.
Stop
6-3 ●Circulation control contents
6.3 Replacing the ink
(1) Overview
● This operation is performed when replacing old ink with new ink.
● Consecutively performs from ink drainage to ink replacement to ink refilling.
● Do not perform this operation while ink is being ejected. Perform it after setting the IJ printer to the “Stop”
state.
*If replacement of the filters is matched to replacement of the ink, ink will not be wasted.
*When performing ink drainage or ink refilling separately, proceed by selecting each function at menu
2 of the Circulation control screen.
(2) Operation
1
Display the Circulation control screen and press the Ink replacement →
Start/Continue .
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Eject ink
(Goes to Standby)
Cleaning stop
No-cleaning stop
HOME
Nozzle backwash
Ink replacement
Ink replacement
Recovery-line
cleaning
Ink filter
replacement
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Ink circulation
Cancel
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Process after
long-term shutdown
Makeup refill
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
2
Proc. status:
Start/Continue
Drain ink in accordance with the operation guide on the screen.
● When you want to stop drainage, press Abort .
● When abort processing was performed, repeat operation from step 1 .
(a) Change the direction of the ink filter so that tubes become the bottom, disconnect the
recovery block from the main ink tank and put it in a beaker.
Recovery tube
Ink filter
Ink filter tubes
●Replacing the ink 6-4
● Remove the recovery tube, connect it to the accessory drainage tube and put it into the beaker.
Recovery tube
Drainage tube
Keep the drain tube clean with
makeup after it is used.
Otherwise, the pressure in the
recovery line rises by the clogged
ink, and it may cause a damage of
the circulation pump.
Recovery tube
Drainage tube
Beaker
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up promptly with wiping paper or something similar.
In addition, do not close the maintenance cover until you are sure that the wiped portion has
completely dried.
6-5 ●Replacing the ink
(b) Press the Start/Continue key.
The ink in the printer is drained from the drainage tube.
● To abort the sequence, press the Abort key. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to return the
recovery tube to its original position and press the Start/Continue key .
You are then returned to the "Circulation control" screen.
● When you have aborted the sequence, perform the procedure from 1 again.
* When aborting the operation, be sure to return the recovery tube to its original position.
(c) When the predetermined period of time elapses, follow the operation guidance on the
screen and place the recovery block of the Main ink tank block to original position.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Ink rep.
Process：Ink replacement
Operation guide
Ink refill
Connect a recovery tube to the main ink tank as before.
Press [Start/Continue].
*1 Clean the connection at the end of the recovery tube sufficiently with the makeup ink,
and then connect it as it originally was.
*2 To prevent the recovery tube from becoming crimped, be careful not to let it cross
another tube.
3
Refill the IJ printer with ink.
Circulation control
[Service
Process：Ink replacement
Operation guide
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Ink rep.
Ink refill
Put ink into the ink reservoir.
When ready press [Start/Continue].
(a) Pull out the reservoir.
Ink reservoir
Pull out
●Replacing the ink 6-6
(b) Remove the cap, then drain the ink remaining in the ink reservoir.
* Clean the inside of the reservoir with makeup.
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up
promptly with wiping paper or
something similar.
In addition, do not close the
maintenance cover until you are
sure that the wiped portion has
completely dried.
Ink reservoir
Beaker
Cap
(c) Fill the reservoir with new ink.
* Fill the reservoir at least 2/3 full of the ink. Be careful of overfilling.
CAUTION
Ink reservoir
Cap
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up
promptly with wiping paper or
something similar.
In addition, do not close the
maintenance cover until you are
sure that the wiped portion has
completely dried.
(d) Fasten the cap of the ink reservoir.
● Fasten it securely. Solvent components may evaporate.
(e) Push in the reservoir to return it to the original position.
(f) Place the end of the print head in a beaker.
● Provide against an ink beam bend.
(g) Press the Start/Continue key.
6-7 ●Replacing the ink
(h) Set the ink filter.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Process：Ink replacement
Ink rep.
Operation guide
Ink refill
Confirm the ink filter is set at the right position.
Press [Start/Continue].
Abort
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
● Set the ink filter as follows.(Piping D is on the right.)
Piping(D)
Ink filter
(i) When Start/Continue is pressed, refilling of the lines with ink begins.
● After a while, ink is ejected from the nozzle. Check the position of the ink stream.
● When you want to stop the operation, press Abort .
● When abort processing was performed, select “Ink refill” from the Circulation control screen and
execute.
4
Display the Operation management screen and set the ink operating time to “0”.
●Replacing the ink 6-8
6.4 How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging
WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask).
● If the ink or makeup gets in your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with warm water and consult a
doctor.
● Perform work after confirming that there is no one in the ink ejection direction.
(Perform this work by inserting the print head tip into a beaker, etc.)
6.4.1 Nozzle backwash
● Sucks in makeup from the nozzle and remove clinging foreign matter, etc.
● To prevent thinning of the ink, do not perform this more than 3 consecutive times.
● Do not perform this work while the ink is being ejected. Perform it after setting the IJ printer to the
Stop state.
1
Procure a cleaning bottle filled with makeup and a beaker and remove the print
head cover.
2
Press the Maintenance menu Circulation control → Nozzle backwash .
The nozzle backwash screen is displayed.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Function：Nozzle backwash
Operation guide
Use the cleaning bottle to sprinkle makeup
over the nozzle.
Abort
Abort
Proc. time：Approx. 1 minute.
Proc. status；
3
Suction begins automatically. Sprinkle the nozzle orifice with makeup.
Cleaning bottle
Nozzle orifice
Beaker
6-9 ●How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging
4
Suction ends in about 1 minute and the screen returns to the Circulation
control screen.
● To stop operation, press Abort .
5
Check if ink stream bending or nozzle clogging has been repaired.
● Display the screen after the Circulation control screen.
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink refill
Ink drainage
HOME
Ink stream
Pressure relief
alignment
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Cancel
Parts usage time
Circulation system
management
environment setup
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
6
Proc. status:
With the print head cover removed, press the Ink stream alignment →
Start/Continue to eject the makeup.
● Perform this work with the print head tip inserted into a beaker.
7
Confirm that the stream is in the center of the gutter.
● Confirm the stream position from the horizontal direction and vertical direction of the print head
as shown in the figure.
Stream
Gutter entrance diameter
Center of gutter inlet
Upper direction
Gutter
Side direction
● If the ink stream is not in the center of the gutter, perform nozzle backwash again.
If the stream is not corrected even after the nozzle backwash has been performed 3 times,
perform par. “6.4.2 Nozzle orifice disassembly and cleaning”.
8
At the end of confirmation, press Abort and stop ejection of the makeup.
●How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging 6-10
6.4.2 Nozzle orifice disassembly and cleaning
● This is the processing method when ink stream bending or nozzle clogging is not repaired
even when nozzle backwash was performed.
● Do not perform this work while ink is being ejected. Perform it after setting the IJ printer
to the Stop state.
● Do not touch the ejection port of the nozzle orifice directly with your hand.
(Use the accessory tweezers.)
● If the ejection port of the nozzle orifice is damaged, it may be impossible to
fulfill its function.
Handle the nozzle orifice carefully so that the ejection port is not damaged by the tool.
1
Ejection port of
the nozzle orifice
Remove and clean the nozzle orifice.
(a) Loosen the fixing screw and remove the charge electrode and deflection electrode.
To prevent dropping, do not remove the screw.
Charge electrode
Fixing screw
Deflection electrode(-)
Deflection electrode(+)
(b) Remove the four screws holding the nozzle orifice.
Nozzle orifice
(c) Use the tweezers to remove the nozzle orifice from the nozzle body.
O-ring
Tweezers
Notice
Do not touch the ink ejection
port on nozzle orifice.
Ejection port
The O-ring may detach from the nozzle orifice at this time. If it does, put the O-ring in a
beaker with makeup ink and take care not to lose it.
(d) Place the removed nozzle orifice into a beaker containing makeup and clean the orifice.
6-11 ●How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging
2
Clean the nozzle section.
Using the cleaning bottle, pour the makeup over the nozzle section to clean it, from which the
nozzle orifice has been removed.
Cleaning bottle
Beaker
3
Install the nozzle orifice.
(a) Use the tweezers to hold the O-ring and put it into
the nozzle body.
O-ring
(b) Use the cleaning bottle and splash a few
droplets of makeup on the O-ring.
O ring
Cleaning bottle
(c) Insert the nozzle orifice and use tweezers to
lightly depress the nozzle orifice from the top.
Nozzle orifice
Notice
Do not touch the ink ejection
port on nozzle orifice.
Ejection port
●How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging 6-12
(d) Remove the nozzle orifice once and make sure
that the O-ring has been installed.
O-ring
Attach to the groove
(e) Remove the nozzle orifice, and use the four
screws to secure it.
● Use the four screws to secure the nozzle orifice so that
the characters on it face up.
Charge electrode
Upper
Characters
6A0012
Nozzle orifice
3
Lower
● Tighten the four screws little by little alternately.
(f) Reinstall the charge electrode and deflection
electrode.
4
Press the Ink stream alignment → Start/Continue and confirm that bending of
the stream and clogging of the nozzle have been repaired.
● Perform this operation with the tip of the print head inserted into a beaker.
● When the ink stream is way outside the gutter, cleaning of the nozzle orifice may not be sufficient.
Disassemble and clean the nozzle orifice again.
● When the ink stream position has deviated from the center of the gutter, adjust it in accordance
with par. “6.5 Stream alignment”.
6-13 ●How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging
6.5 Stream alignment
WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask).
● If the ink or makeup gets in your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with warm water and consult a
doctor.
● Perform work after confirming that there is no one in the ink ejection direction.
(Perform this work by inserting the print head tip into a beaker, etc.)
This operation is performed when the nozzle or nozzle orifice has been replaced. Ordinarily, ink stream
alignment is unnecessary.
● Adjust the stream position so that the stream ejected from the nozzle is at the center of the gutter.
● Adjustment in 2 directions, horizontal direction and vertical direction, is necessary.
1
Remove the print head cover in the stop state.
Loosen the screw.
Pull out.
Print head cover
2
At the Circulation control screen, press the Ink stream alignment →
Start/Continue .
● Perform this operation with the print head tip inserted into a beaker.
●Stream alignment 6-14
3
Adjust the horizontal direction and vertical direction positions.
(a) Horizontal direction adjustment procedure
1 Slightly loosen the horizontal direction lock screws (2).
As to the screw loosening, please see the precautions below.
2 Turn the horizontal direction adjustment screw and adjust the position of the makeup.
When you want to move in the minus electrode direction : Turn clockwise
When you want to move in the plus electrode direction
: Turn counterclockwise
Adjust so that the stream is approximately at the center of the gutter.
3 After adjustment, tighten the horizontal direction lock screws (2).
Minus deflection
electrode
Horizontal direction
lock screw
PERCAUTIONS
Horizontal
direction
Horizontal direction lock screw.
Indication of the
loosening
[60 degree to
120 degree]
Stream
Plus deflection
electrode
Horizontal direction
adjustment screw
Gutter
● It will be difficult to make fine
adjustment when the lock
screw is loosed too much
because the resistance from
the base is lost then.
(b) Vertical direction adjustment procedure
1 Slightly loosen the vertical direction lock screw (2).
2 Turn the vertical direction adjustment screw and adjust the position of the stream.
When you want to move to the bottom of the gutter : Turn counterclockwise
When you want to move to the top of the gutter
: Turn clockwise
Adjust so that the stream is approximately at the center of the gutter.
3 After adjustment, tighten the vertical direction lock screw (2).
Vertical direction
adjustment screw
Vertical
direction
Stream
Vertical direction
lock screw
Gutter
4
At the end of adjustment, press Abort .
6-15 ●Stream alignment
6.6 Cleaning the Gutter
● When the ink recovery system becomes dry or clogged, the line from the gutter to the ink main tank can be
cleaned by performing “Gutter cleaning”.
● Do not perform this operation while ink is being ejected. Perform it after setting the IJ printer to the “Stop”
state.
● Have ready a cleaning bottle filled with makeup and a beaker and remove the print head cover.
● If recovery-line cleaning is performed continuously, the ink will become thin and cause printing distortion.
Since ink replacement may become necessary after repair, do not perform cleaning more than 2 consecutive
times.
1
Display the Circulation control screen and press the Gutter cleaning →
Start/Continue .
2
Perform cleaning in accordance with the operation guide.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Function：Gutter cleaning
Proc. time：Approx. 1 minute.
Proc. status:
● Pour makeup onto the gutter.
Gutter
Cleaning bottle
Beaker
● To stop operation, press Abort .
3
Cleaning ends in about 1 minute and the screen returns to the Circulation
control screen.
●Cleaning the Gutter 6-16
6.7 Replacing the ink filter
Perform it in a state in which the ink has been drained. The ink is not wasted if performed
simultaneously with the ink replacement.
1
Display the Circulation control screen and press the Ink filter replacement →
Start/Continue .
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Eject ink
Cleaning stop
(Goes to Standby)
No-cleaning stop
HOME
Recovery-line
cleaning
Nozzle backwash
Ink replacement
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Ink replacement
Ink filter
replacement
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Process after
long-term shutdown
Ink circulation
Cancel
Makeup refill
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
Proc. status:
Start/Continue
2 2Follow the operation guidance on the screen and drain the ink from the ink
filter and ink circulation system.
● Press Abort to cancel ink draining.
● When Abort is selected, go back to setup 1 above and continue.
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up promptly with wiping paper or equivalent.
In addition, do not close the maintenance cover until you are sure that the wiped area
is completely dried.
(a) Change the direction of the ink filter so that tubes become the bottom,
disconnect the recovery block from the main ink tank and put it in a beaker.
Recovery tube
Ink filter
Ink filter tubes
6-17 ●Replacing the ink filter
● Remove the recovery tube, connect it to the accessory drainage tube and put it into the beaker.
Recovery tube
Drainage tube
Keep the drain tube clean with
makeup after it is used.
Otherwise, the pressure in the
recovery line rises by the clogged
ink, and it may cause a damage of
the circulation pump.
Recovery tube
Drainage tube
Beaker
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up promptly with wiping paper or equivalent.
In addition, do not close the maintenance cover until you are sure that the wiped area
is completely dried.
(b) Press the Start/Continue key.
The ink in the printer is drained from the drainage tube.
● To abort the sequence, press the Abort key. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to return the
recovery tube to its original position and press the Start/Continue key .
You are then returned to the "Circulation control" screen.
● When you have aborted the sequence, perform the procedure from 1 again.
* When aborting the operation, be sure to return the recovery tube to its original position.
(c) When the predetermined period of time elapses, follow the operation guidance on the
screen and place the recovery block of the Main ink tank block to original position.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Process：Ink filter replacement
Operation guide
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Filter rep.
Ink refill
Connect a recovery tube to the main ink tank as before.
Press [Start/Continue].
*1 Clean the connection at the end of the recovery tube sufficiently with the makeup,
and then connect it as it originally was.
*2 To prevent the recovery tube from becoming crimped, be careful not to let it cross
another tube.
●Replacing the ink filter 6-18
3
When the operation guide “Replace ink filter -----” is displayed, replace ink
filter with a new one.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Process：Ink filter replacement
Ink rep.
Operation guide
Ink refill
Replace ink filter with a new one.
Put ink into the ink reservoir.
When ready press [Start/Continue].
Abort
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
(a) Disconnect piping joints C and D and connect them to a new ink filter.
［Connect piping joints］
［Disconnect piping joints］
Piping joints C
Piping joints D
C
C
D
C
D
D
C
D
Lock release
New ink filter
Use ink filter
CAUTION
1 The joints cannot be installed if the installation position of the piping is incorrect.
(C is at the center of the ink filter and D is at the outside.)
2 When installing, always lock piping joints C and D by turning them clockwise.
3 A small amount of ink will remain inside the ink filter even after ink drainage.
Be careful that the ink does not spill when handling the used ink filter.
6-19 ●Replacing the ink filter
(b) Set the ink filter as follows. (Piping joints D is on the right.)
Piping joints(D)
Ink filter
(c) Fill the reservoir with new ink.
(d) Insert the tip of the print head into a beaker.
● Prepares for bending of the ink stream.
4
Refill the IJ printer with ink
● When Start/Continue is pressed on the screen shown below, refilling of the lines with ink
begins.
● After a while, ink is ejected from the nozzle. Check the position of the ink stream.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Process：Ink filter replacement
Operation guide
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Filter rep.
Ink refill
Confirm the ink filter is set at the right position.
Press [Start/Continue].
Abort
Start/Continue
● To abort the sequence, press the Abort key, and follow the on-screen instructions.
After aborting, you are returned to the "Circulation control" screen.
● When you have aborted the sequence, select the "Ink refill" from the "Circulation control"
screen and perform it.
● If the following message is output during ink refill, the system will automatically stop.
"Failure was detected in level sensor, pump or solenoid valve.
When ready, press Start/Continue ."
Press Start/Continue key, select "Ink refill" on "Circulation control" screen and execute refill.
If the same message appears again, contact your nearest local distributor.
●Replacing the ink filter 6-20
5
Open the Parts usage time mgmt. screen (menu 2 of the Circulation control
screen), and set the Ink filter time to “0”.
Parts usage time mgmt.
[Stop
]
（hours）
Com=0
（hours）
Ink filter
０００００
Pump
０１０００
Recovery filter
０００００
０１０００
Heating unit
０１０００
Circulation filter
０００００
０１０００
ＭＶ１
０１０００
Makeup filter
０１０００
ＭＶ２
０１０００
Air filter
０１０００
ＭＶ３
０１０００
MGV filter
０１０００
ＭＶ４
０１０００
R. Air filter
０１０００
ＭＶ５
０１０００
ＭＶ６
０１０００
ＭＶ７
０１０００
＜Consumption＞
Ink
００１０００
(ml)
ＭＶ８
０１０００
Makeup
００１０００
(ml)
ＭＶ９
０１０００
Print count
０００００１０００
Update log
2015.07.07 12:45
HOME
2015/03/22 08:15
Back
6-21 ●Replacing the ink filter
6.8 Replacing the recovery filter
● Do not perform this operation while ink is being ejected. Perform it after setting the IJ printer to the “Stop”
state.
1
Pull out the makeup reservoir.
Recovery filter
Makeup reservoir
Pull out
2
Rotate the lock nut of the recovery filter and pull it forward and out.
Lock nut
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up
promptly with wiping paper or
something similar.
In addition, do not close the
maintenance cover until you are
sure that the wiped portion has
completely dried.
3
Remove the O ring and filter with tweezers and mount new ones.
O ring
Filter
4
Filter
O ring
Return it to its original state, and check to see that there is no leak of the ink in
operation.
* Tighten the nut securely by hand.
●Replacing the recovery filter 6-22
5
Open the Part usage time mgmt. screen (menu 2 of the Circulation control
screen) and set the Recovery filter to “0”.
Parts usage time mgmt.
[Stop
]
（hours）
Com=0
（hours）
Ink filter
０００００
０１０００
Pump
０１０００
Recovery filter
０００００
Heating unit
０１０００
Circulation filter
０００００
０１０００
ＭＶ１
０１０００
Makeup filter
０１０００
ＭＶ２
０１０００
Air filter
０１０００
ＭＶ３
０１０００
MGV filter
０１０００
ＭＶ４
０１０００
R. Air filter
０１０００
ＭＶ５
０１０００
ＭＶ６
０１０００
ＭＶ７
０１０００
＜Consumption＞
Ink
００１０００
(ml)
ＭＶ８
０１０００
Makeup
００１０００
(ml)
ＭＶ９
０１０００
Print count
０００００１０００
Update log
2015.07.07 12:45
HOME
2015/03/22 08:15
Back
6-23 ●Replacing the recovery filter
6.9 Replacing the circulation filter
● Perform it a state in which the ink has been drained. The ink is not wasted if performed simultaneously with
the ink replacement.
1
Perform 2 -(a) to 2 -(c) of the procedure in “6.3 Replacing the ink”.
● Perform from ink drainage to place the ink reservoir tube connection block back into position.
● Perform operation in accordance with the operation guide on the screen.
2
Replace the circulation filter. See “6.8 Replacing the recovery filter” for the
replacement procedure.
Circulation filter
3
Perform 3 -(a) to 3 -(i) of the procedure in “6.3 Replacing the ink”.
● Refill the IJ Printer with ink.
4
Open the Part usage time mgmt. screen (menu 2 of the Circulation control
screen) and set the time of the circulation filter to “0”.
Parts usage time mgmt.
[Stop
]
Com=0
（hours）
（hours）
Ink filter
０００００
０１０００
Pump
０１０００
Recovery filter
０００００
０１０００
Heating unit
０１０００
Circulation filter
０００００
ＭＶ１
０１０００
Makeup filter
０１０００
ＭＶ２
０１０００
Air filter
０１０００
ＭＶ３
０１０００
MGV filter
０１０００
ＭＶ４
０１０００
R. Air filter
０１０００
ＭＶ５
０１０００
ＭＶ６
０１０００
ＭＶ７
０１０００
＜Consumption＞
Ink
００１０００
(ml)
ＭＶ８
０１０００
Makeup
００１０００
(ml)
ＭＶ９
０１０００
Print count
０００００１０００
Update log
2015.07.07 12:45
HOME
2015/03/22 08:15
Back
●Replacing the circulation filter 6-24
6.10 Adjusting the pressure
● Check the pressure before printing state check at the start of operation.
● Do not perform this operation in the Stop state. Perform it in the state in which ink is ejected.
1
Open the Operation management screen.
Operation management
[Ready
]
Com=0
Ink operating time
００００
(hours)
Ink alarm time
１２００
(hours; standard value: 1200)
００００００
(hours)
０００００００００
(prints)
Cumulative op. time
Print count
Ink, makeup
JP-K69, TH-TYPE A
Ink viscosity
100 (standard value:100)
Ink pressure
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Shutdown
HOME
0．250 (MPa; standard value: 0．250)
Ambient temperature
Deflection voltage
Excitation V-ref.
Excitation frequency
20 (℃; range: 0〜45)
5. 7 (kV)
11 (0〜19)
68. 9 (kHz)
Back
2
Check the displayed ink pressure value. If there is a difference of 0.010 or more
from the standard value, adjust the pressure to the standard value ±0.002 with
a flat-blade screwdriver.
Pressure-reducing valve
To raise the pressure : rotate clockwise.
To lower the pressure : rotate counterclockwise.
6-25 ●Adjusting the pressure
6.11 Excitation V adjustment
(1) Overview
● The Excitation V set value is 0 to 19. The state of the ink drops is different for each setting.
● The optimum Excitation V set value must be input to maintain good print quality.
● Perform nozzle property test printing, and the center value of the range where printing is good is the optimum
Excitation V set value.
(Example) When printing is good at the Excitation V set value 5 to 15 range at nozzle property test, the
optimum Excitation V set value is the center value 10.
● Memorizes the ambient temperature when the Excitation V set value was updated as the reference ambient
temperature.
If the ambient temperature and the reference ambient temperature difference exceeds a certain value during
use, “Check Excitation V set value” warning will be generated. In that case, readjust the Excitation V setting.
(2) Operation
● For Excitation V setting, select the optimum set value from the result of test printing for each set value and
input the selected value from the operation panel. Perform operation in accordance with the following
procedure:
1
At the Maintenance menu, press Excitation V update (nozzle test) .
● The Excitation V update screen is displayed.
Displays the current set value.
Ambient temperature when the current set value is set
Excitation V update
Excitation V-ref.
[Standby
−
09
Ref. ambient temperature
23
(0〜19)
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Shutdown
(℃)
HOME
Inc.
Automatic update
a
b
＋
]
(1〜9)
Incremental change
1
Print trigger source
Button input
Print data
For test
Sensor
Data to be displayed
Perform nozzle property test and find the optimum excitation
Nozzle test
voltage value.
Back
2
Set a Print trigger source and b Print data of nozzle property test printing.
a Print trigger source
Select the timing at which printing is performed.
Print trigger source
Button input
Sensor
Prints at the print target sensor signal timing.
Prints by pressing Start printings on the operation panel.
●Excitation V adjustment 6-26
b Print data
Select the contents and conditions of the characters to be printed.
Print data
For test
Data to be displayed
Prints using the currently set print
description and print conditions.
Prints using the following test conditions:
・Number of lines
・Character size
・Inter-character space
・Character height
・Character width
・Ink drop use
・Print character description
3
: 1 line
: 12×16 dots
:1
: 99
:5
: 1/3
:■■nn123ABC
(nn: Excitation V set value)
Confirm that the IJ printer is in the Standby state and press Nozzle test .
● The Nozzle property test screen is displayed. The IJ printer enters the Ready to print state.
Nozzle property test
c
d
Excitation V-ref.
[Ready
−
09
Ref. ambient temperature
23
Automatic update
＋
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
(0〜19)
(℃)
Inc.
Incremental change
1
Print trigger source
Button input
Print data
For test
(1〜9)
Sensor
Data to be displayed
Excitation V-ref. is printed on the print target.
［■■ｎｎ・・・・・・］
Abort
Printing starts at the press of [Start printings].
Start
printings
c Excitation V-ref.
Input the set value you want to print. (Set value is 00 to 19.)
Change the setting using − ＋ or input a value by touching the number.
d Automatic update
Select whether or not to automatically switch to the next set value after printing one setting.
Disable : Set value does not change.
Dec.
: Set value is automatically decremented at each printing.
Inc.
: Set value is automatically incremented at each printing.
At “Inc.”, the change width by which the value is automatically switched is set.
6-27 ●Excitation V adjustment
4
Perform nozzle property test printing.
● When “Print trigger source” is
When “Print trigger source” is
, press Start printings .
, input the sensor signal.
Button input
Sensor
CAUTION
● During the nozzle property test, the state of creation of the ink drops may become
poor and an “Ink Drop Charge Too High” or other fault may be generated and the ink
may stop, depending on the Excitation V value.
In this case, after cleaning the print head, eject the ink again. (Refer to par. “3.1.2
When an error occurred at the start of operation” of the instruction manual and
perform the same work.)
The possibility of fault is high when Excitation V is set less than 5. When performing
test printing again, start from setting 10 and test print while decrementing.
5
Check the printed result.
● Check the Excitation V range at which printing is good. The center of that range is the optimum
value.
(Example) Printing good range 5 to 15→Optimum value 10
O: Good ×: Bad Space: Not checked
Ambient
Check date temperature
0
2015.07.07
6
Excitation V value
1
25 C
2
3
4
×
×
×
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
×
×
×
×
optimum
value
10
Update the Excitation V-ref. value.
(a) At the end of test printing, press [Abort] of the “Nozzle property test”
screen and return to the “Excitation V update” screen.
(b) Change “Excitation V-ref.” to the optimum value confirmed at step 5 .
Abort
Abort
Start
Change to optimum value.
Excitation V-ref.
−
10
Ref. ambient temperature
25
＋
printings
(0〜19)
(℃)
Changes to current ambient temperature.
7
When the screen is returned to the “Maintenance menu” by Back
set value change is complete.
Back
,
CAUTION
● Repeat print setting is disabled during the nozzle property test.
Only one printing is performed by one input signal.
● Product speed matching setting is disabled during the nozzle property test.
The character width may be different from the actual character width.
●Excitation V adjustment 6-28
6.12 Ink drop state check method
● The state of the ink drops can be checked by using a magnifying glass.
● Perform this work in the Eject ink state.
WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask).
● If the ink or makeup gets in your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with warm water
and consult a doctor.
● Perform work after confirming that there is no one in the ink ejection direction.
(Perform this work by inserting the print head tip into a beaker, etc.)
1
Confirm that the IJ printer is in the Standby state and then remove the print
head cover.
Loosen the screw.
Pull out.
Print head cover
2
Using a magnifying glass, observe the ink drops in the charging electrode.
Magnifying glass
Deflection electrode
6-29 ●Ink drop state check method
Ink drops creation state confirmation table
Ink drop shape
Judgment
Name
Remarks
A mode
Good
B mode
Perfect
High-speed
small-diameter
mode
Two or fewer
small-diameter
drops
Allowable
Constant-speed
small-diameter
mode
Not
allowed
Low-speed
small-diameter
mode
Not
allowed
When the shape of the ink drops is not allowed, update to the optimum set value at par. “6.10 Excitation
V adjustment” and check again. Or contact your local distributor.
3
After the check, install the print head cover.
●Ink drop state check method 6-30
6.13 Draining ink from the main ink tank
● When the main ink tank full fault is generated, the ink cannot be drained by screen operation. Drain the ink
and refill with new ink as follows:
1
Remove the drain tube of the main ink tank as shown in the figure below and
drain the ink in the tank by approximately 50 ml. When ink is drained, put the
drain tube block to its original position.
Drain tube
Stop plug
Main ink tank
Drain tube
Beaker
Clean the tip of Drain tube by Makeup after
using IJ printer. If the tip of Drain tube was left
without cleaning, Drain tube would be clogged
and it might be difficult to get the ink drained.
2
Return the circulation system to its original state and display the Circulation
control screen and press the Ink refill → Start/Continue .
*Note that if operation is started without refilling the ink, a “Replenishment Time-out”
fault will be generated.
CAUTION
● If the ink is accidentally spilled, quickly wipe if off with wiping paper, etc.
In addition, do not close the maintenance cover until you confirm that the wiped part
is completely dry.
6-31 ●Draining ink from the main ink tank
6.14 Test of solenoid valve/pump
● The operation confirmation of solenoid valve and pump is performed.
1 Supply valve
2 Replenishment valve
(MV1)
(MV2)
Recovery
valve
(MV3)
Agitation
valve
(MV4)
3
4
(MV6)
5 Circulation valve (MV5)
5 Pressure relief valve
7 Makeup valve
(MV7)
(MV8)
6 Cleaning valve
10 Pump
(MV9)
9 Shutoff valve
11 Viscosity meter
(MV10)
●If circulating system can not be operated due to no ink ejection, ink overflow from the gutter and such,
there are possibilities of solenoid valve or pump failure. Please perform operation test under service
personnel's guidance.
●In an operation state, only an operating state is displayed.
Different operations by state
Ink stop state
The operation confirmation of solenoid
valve and pump is performed( Operates
each valves individually ).
1
Except for Ink stop state
Displays operating state only.
Operating test such as open/close valve cannot
be performed.
At the maintenance menu, press Solenoid valve / pump test .
The solenoid valve / pump test screen is displayed.
Solenoid v/p test
[Stop
MV1
Open Close
MV2
Open Close
MV3
Open Close
MV4
Open Close
MV5
Open Close
MV6
Open Close
MV7
Open Close
MV8
Open Close
MV9
Open Close
Pump Oper- Stop
ated
Ink pressure
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Visco- Opermeter ated Stop
０．０００ (MPa; standard value : ０．２５０)
Back
2
Press operation button.
The operating state of the solenoid valve and the pump is displayed.
(Confirm the operation by an operating sound.)
Open
: The solenoid valve is opened.
Close
: The solenoid valve is closed.
Operated : The pump is operated.
Stop
: The pump is stopped.
●Test of solenoid valve/pump 6-32
6.15 Long-term Shutdown
CAUTION
● A special work is required to perform the Long-term Shutdown procedure. It is
recommended to contact your local distributor and ask for the work. Should you
desire to conduct the work by yourself, the cautions must be fully understood
beforehand. It is recommended to contact the local distributor and ask for an advice
even you desire to conduct it by yourself, too.
● Even the Long-term shutdown is conducted, ink fixing may occur in the circulation
system depending on the ink or the storage temperature or the storage period.
It is strongly recommended to contact your local distributor and ask for the work
when you conduct "Startup process after long-term shutdown", especially in case the
storage temperature is high (30 degrees Celsius or more) or the storage period
exceeds 6 months.
● To secure safety, make sure to follow the procedures explained in "6.15.2 Startup process after long-term shutdown.
● When the IJ Printer was left for a period of time without conducting Long-term
shutdown, make sure to follow the procedures explained in "6.15.2 Startup process
after long-term shutdown.
● In "6.15.2 Startup process after long-term shutdown, should the circulation system be
operated continuously when the printer does not operate
normally, the pressure in the recovery line would be increased and it is going to be
dangerous. There is a possibility that the ink is ejected from the nozzle strongly or
the ink is reversely ejected from the gutter strongly. In such cases, stop the printer
operation immediately and contact the local distributor.
6-33 ●Long-term Shutdown
6.15.1 Process prior to long-term shutdown
(1) Overview
● This operation is the storage work performed when the IJ printer is shut down for exceeding the period
indicated in Table 1.
● The storage procedure for long-term shutdown is completed by draining the ink from the ink circulation
system and cleaning it with the makeup.
Table 1 Storage temperature and its period
Storage temperature
Shutdown Period Guideline *1
0 to 35 ℃
3 weeks
35 to 40 ℃
2 weeks
40 to 45 ℃
1 week
*1: Maximum period when the printer can be continuously shutdown without being operated.
● The figures in the table are for MEK-based ink.
● Handling of ink other than the above requires special handling in accordance with the handling
guidance of each ink.
CAUTION
1. Store the printer at a temperature as low as possible.
This operation is not necessary in case that the printer can be operated at least
once during the period indicated in Table 1. Follow Instruction manual "1.5 Cautions
on operating time when printer is in service" and Handling guidance of each ink as
to the operating time.
2. Even the process prior to long-term shutdown is conducted, ink fixing may occur in
the circulation system depending on the ink or the storage temperature or the
storage period.
3. If the printer was shutdown for a period mentioned above without conducting the
long-term shutdown, check the printer status in "6.15.2 Startup process after
long-term shutdown, 1 Operation check". If the problem exists, contact your local
distributor.
(2) Operating procedure
WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask).
● If the ink or makeup gets in your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with warm and
consult a doctor.
● Perform work after confirming that there is no one in the ink ejection direction.
(Perform this work by inserting the print head tip into a beaker, etc.)
●Long-term Shutdown 6-34
1
Open the "Circulation control" screen, and press the
Process prior to long-term shutdown key and the Start/Continue key.
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Eject ink
(Goes to Standby)
Cleaning stop
No-cleaning stop
HOME
Nozzle backwash
Recovery-line
cleaning
Ink replacement
Ink filter
replacement
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Process after
long-term shutdown
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Ink circulation
Cancel
Makeup refill
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
2
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
The following guidance appears. Confirm the message and Press
Start/Continue key.
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
Process : Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Operation guide
Always pay attention to the following before operation.
・Depending on the ink types, storage temperature or storage
term the clogging formed by residual ink the circulation system may occur even if this process is performed.
・For the storing method, it is recommended contact your
local distributor.
2015.07.07 12:45
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
Abort
Start/Continue
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
3
Drain the Ink from the ink filter and ink circulation system.
(1) Perform 2 -(a) to 2 -(c) of the procedure in “6.3 Replacing the ink”.
● Perform from ink drainage to place the ink reservoir tube connection block back into position.
● Perform operation in accordance with the operation guide on the screen.
(2) Return the direction of the ink filter so that connected tubes become the top.
4
Cleaning of the circulation system starts.
● Perform operation in accordance with the operation guide on the screen.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
Process : Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Operation guide
Remove the tube connection block from reservoir
and clean the end of it.
And then place the tube connection block in a beaker charged
with 50ml of makeup.
When ready, press <Start/Continue>.
6-35 ●Long-term Shutdown
2015.07.07 12:45
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
(a) Drain the ink ejected into the beaker, clean the beaker and then put 50ml of the
makeup and a tube connection block into the beaker.
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up
promptly with wiping paper or
equivalent.
In addition, do not close the
maintenance cover until you are
sure that the wiped area is
completely dried.
Beaker
Tube connection block
(b) Press Start/Continue .
● Auto cleaning in the circulation system starts.
(c) When the predetermined period of time elapses, the following operating guidance
appears.
Place the cap and tube connection block as they were, and place the ink reservoir
back in place.
● Be careful not to break the tube when mounting it into the printer.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
Process : Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Operation guide
Place the ink reservoir tube connection block back
into position..
When ready, press <Start/Continue>.
2015.07.07 12:45
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
Proc. time : Approx. 6 minutes
Start/Continue
Proc. status: In progress
5
Repeat steps 3 to 4 once more time.
6
Mount the nozzle rubber seal.
(Perform the ink drainage to clean the circulation system three times in totall.)
● Mount the "nozzle rubber seal" between the charge electrode and the orifice plate.
CAUTION
1. Before installing the nozzle rubber seal, be sure to thoroughly clean it with the
makeup.
2. When installing the nozzle rubber seal, exercise care not to deform the charge
electrode.
The "Process prior to long-term shutdown" is now completed.
The circulation system is now charged with the makeup.
When starting up the printer after a long-term shutdown, be sure to perform the "6.15.2 Startup
process after long-term shutdown."
●Long-term Shutdown 6-36
6.15.2 Startup process after long-term shutdown
[Overview]
● This operation is the work for draining the makeup which cleaned the ink circulation system at "Process prior
to long-term shutdown" and the work for refilling it with the ink.
● To completely drain the makeup from the circulation system, you should charge the circulation system with
the ink, drain the ink, and refill the ink into the system.
● To secure safety, conduct " 1 Operation check" before "Startup after long-term shutdown".
CAUTION
Make sure to conduct " 1 Operation check" before "Startup after long-term shutdown".
If the printer does not operate normally after operation check, a special work is
required for restoration. Contact your local distributor. Should the circulation system
be operated continuously before normal operation is confirmed, the pressure in the
recovery line would be increased it is going to be dangerous. There is a possibility that
the ink is ejected from the nozzle strongly or the ink is reversely ejected from the gutter
strongly. In such case, stop the operation immediately and contact the local distributor.
1
Procedure of the operation check
WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask).
● If the ink or makeup gets in your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with warm and
consult a doctor.
● Perform work after confirming that there is no one in the ink ejection direction.
(Perform this work by inserting the print head tip into a beaker, etc.)
(a) Remove the nozzle rubber seal.
(b) Drain the makeup in the ink reservoir.
(c) Press "Solenoid valve/pump test" on Circulation maintenance screen to confirm
that each valve of MV1 to MV9 operates normally.
Refer to Technical manual "6.14 Test of solenoid valve/pump" for detail.
(It is operating normally if the solenoid valve gives out the operation sound.)
CAUTION
The solenoid valve maybe firmly fixed if the operational sound is not heard.
For restoration, a special work is required. Contact your local distributor.
(d) Execute “Solenoid valve/Pump Test” in Maintenance menu and
confirm if Viscometer works properly.
On the screen of “Solenoid valve/Pump Test”, if Red Indicator is
turned OFF when the button of “Viscometer” Operated is
pressed, and if Red Indicator is turned ON when the button of
“Viscometer” Stop is pressed, Viscometer is working properly.
Refer to the figure on the right for Red Indicator.
Viscometer
Red Indicator
CAUTION
Viscometer maybe clogged if Viscometer is NOT working properly. For restoration,
a special work is required. Contact your Local distributor.
For restoration, a special work is required. Contact your local distributor.
6-37 ●Long-term Shutdown
(e) Open the "Circulation control" screen, and press the Ink stream alignment key and
then the Start/Continue key.
● Check if the ink stream is going into the gutter and it’s in the center of the gutter.
● Check whether the gutter absorbs the liquid.
CAUTION
If the ink is not being ejected, press Ink stream alignment key again. An ink fixing may
be caused if the ink is not ejected after Ink stream alignment is conducted two times.
An ink fixing may be caused if the suction of the liquid.
A special work is required for restoration. Contact your local distributor.
If the "Ink steam bending" occurs, refer to Technical manual "6.4 How to correct ink
stream bending and nozzle clogging" for restoration. If the ink stream bending is not
corrected, a special work is required. Contact your local distributor.
2
Operating procedure- "Process after long-term shutdown"
(a) Open the "Circulation control" screen, and press the
Process after long-term shutdown key then the Start/Continue key.
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Eject ink
(Goes to Standby)
Cleaning stop
No-cleaning stop
HOME
Nozzle backwash
Recovery-line
cleaning
Ink replacement
Ink filter
replacement
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Process after
long-term shutdown
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Ink circulation
Cancel
Makeup refill
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
(b) Follow the on-screen instructions for the operation.
● Repeat twice the same procedure as in "6.3 Replacing the ink".
(c) At the end of operation, screen returns to the Circulation control screen.
CAUTION
Put the end of print head into the beaker then press Ink refill key and Start/Continue
key. The ink will be ejected in a few minutes.
If the ink does not eject after pressing Ink refill key and Start/Continue key or "Ink
pressure low" or "No ink drop charge" is displayed, a special work is required for
restoration. Contact the local distributor near you.
●Long-term Shutdown 6-38
3
Open the "Operation management" screen. Arbitrarily rotate the handle of
Pressure-reducing valve clockwise/counterclockwise and check if the
pressure changes. After confirming the change, adjust the valve and set the
Ink pressure to standard setting with a tolerance of 0.002.
Operation management
[Ready
]
Com=0
Ink operating time
００００
(hours)
Ink alarm time
１２００
(hours; standard value: 1200)
００００００
(hours)
０００００００００
(prints)
Cumulative op. time
Print count
Ink, makeup
JP-K69, TH-TYPE A
Ink viscosity
100 (standard value:100)
Ink pressure
Ambient temperature
Deflection voltage
Excitation V-ref.
Excitation frequency
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Shutdown
HOME
0．250 (MPa; standard value: 0．250)
20 (℃; range: 0〜45)
5. 7 (kV)
11 (0〜19)
68. 9 (kHz)
Back
CAUTION
A special work is required when the Ink pressure does not change by rotating the
handle of Pressure-reducing valve. Contact your local distributor.
The "Startup process after Long-term shutdown" is now completed.
6-39 ●Long-term Shutdown
7. MAINTENANCE SERVICE
● For the IJ printer to operate smoothly, the following maintenance work is necessary.
(1)Replacement of consumables
Replace the following filters according to the “Replacement guideline”.
No.
Consumable
Replacement guideline
Replacement procedure description
1
Ink filter
2,400h
"6.7 Replacing the ink filter"
2
Recovery filter
1,200h
"6.8 Replacing the recovery filter "
3
Circulation filter
2,400h
"6.9 Replacing the circulation filter "
4
Air filter
2,400h
Refer to the description below.
● In the case of standard operation (8 hrs/day, 25 days/month operation), 2400 hours corresponds to
1 year.
● The minimum retention period of IJ printer repair parts, including consumables, is 7 years after
discontinuation of manufacture.
● When ordering consumables, please specify the following order name and part code No.
No.
Consumable
Order name
Part code No.
Remarks
1
Ink filter
Filter capsule parts
451867
2
Recovery filter
Nozzle flat filter 75
451037
3
Circulation filter
PTFE filter 20 pack 2
451487
2 pcs/pack
4
Air filter
Air filter AF3 parts
451963
2 pcs/pack
(2) Other maintenance
a. About once a week, check whether or not the pump makes an abnormal sound (metal sound, etc.).
b. Before performing print state check at the start of operation, check whether or not the pressure is
suitable.
(See par. “6.10 Adjusting the pressure” for a description of the check procedure.)
c. For a description of ink drops and excitation voltage checks, see pars. “6.11 Excitation V adjustment” and “6.12 Ink drops state check method”.
(3) About periodic replacement parts
a. To use the IJ printer stably, clock battery, circulation system parts (pump, solenoid valve, etc) and
heating unit must be periodically replaced. Please consult your nearest local distributor.
●Maintenance service 7-1
Replacing the air filter
1 Trun off the power.
2 Loosen the knobs (thumb screws) and remove the intake fan cover.
Intake fan cover
Knob (thumb Screw)
3 Remove the old filter and set the new filter.
(Please set the new filter with red-mark being invisible.)
Air filter
Red-mark inside
4 Set the intake fan cover. (Turn the knobs until the intake fan cover comes into
contact with the printer.)
Printer
Turn the knob (Thumb screws) until comes into contact.
7-2 ●Maintenance service
5 Open the Part usage time mgmt. screen (menu 2 of the Circulation control
screen) and set the time of the air filter to “0”.
Parts usage time mgmt.
[Stop
]
（hours）
Com=0
（hours）
Ink filter
０００００
０１０００
Pump
０１０００
Recovery filter
０００００
０１０００
Heating unit
０１０００
Circulation filter
０００００
０１０００
ＭＶ１
０１０００
Makeup filter
０１０００
ＭＶ２
０１０００
Air filter
０００００
ＭＶ３
０１０００
MGV filter
０１０００
ＭＶ４
０１０００
R. Air filter
０１０００
ＭＶ５
０１０００
ＭＶ６
０１０００
ＭＶ７
０１０００
＜Consumption＞
Ink
００１０００
(ml)
ＭＶ８
０１０００
Makeup
００１０００
(ml)
ＭＶ９
０１０００
Print count
０００００１０００
Update log
2015.07.07 12:45
HOME
2015/03/22 08:15
Back
●Maintenance service 7-3
About maintenance service
If trouble or damage occurs within 1 year after delivery or accumulated operating time of 2400 hours, whichever
is sooner, repairs will be made free of charge. However, the following cases are outside the warranty even within
the free warranty period:
(1) When trouble was due to handling outside the instruction manual
(2) When materials and parts other than ours, including the ink, were used and damage was caused by them
(3) When repair was performed by other than us or our designated representative and damage was caused by
this
(4) When trouble was due to external causes (abnormal print material, etc.) other than this equipment or by
moving or transportation of the equipment after delivery
(5) When operated in a usage environment outside the specifications of par. “12. Specifications” of the instruction manual.
(6) When damaged by fire, water, or other natural disaster
Loss of production due to down time and physical loss due to trouble or error of delivered equipment
(loss of print material, related facility, etc.) is outside the warranty. If trouble occurs, an engineer shall
be dispatched as quickly as possible and maximum efforts will be made so that the down time is as
short as possible.
If there is no danger of being misread, excessive or insufficient dot configuration shall be considered
allowable.
The IJ printer has an alarm function to prevent major printing faults before they happen, but this function does not inspect the quality of the printed characters.
Consideration shall be given so that the printed character state is visible at some process.
Parts retention period
The retention period of the performance parts for repair of this equipment is 7 years after discontinuation of
manufacture.
“Performance parts for repair” are parts necessary to maintain the functions of the product.
Customer memo:
Please fill in for later use.
Useful when communicating with the service in charge.
Tel:
Your Hitachi sales representative:
Person in charge:
Tel:
Your Hitachi distributor:
Person in charge:
Date of purchase:
7-4 ●Maintenance service
year
month
day
8. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Fig.8-1 Model RX2 IJ printer outside dimensions
8.1 Outside Dimensions
●Outside Dimensions 8-1
8-2 ●Outside Dimensions
Fig.8-2 Print head outside dimensions
Fig.8-3 Model RX2-S Electrical connection diagram
8.2 Electrical Connection Diagram
●Electrical Connection Diagram 8-3
8-4 ●Electrical Connection Diagram
Fig.8-4 Model RX2-B Electrical connection diagram
Fig.8-5 Model RX2 Circulation System diagram
8.3 Circulation System Diagram
●Circulation System Diagram 8-5
9. APPENDIX
Bar code, 2-dimensional code
● See “4.7.5 Print a bar code” and “4.14.3 Set various printing” in the Instruction Manual.
(1) Precautions when using EAN-13 code
● When bar code is “EAN-13” and “EAN-13 Add-On 5" the area for inputting the 2-digit “country code” is
displayed on the print format screen. Be sure to input the country code. The country code can be input at the
beginning of the data on the character input screen. See “4.14.3 Set various printing” in the Instruction
Manual.
● Guard bar, center bar and check code are automatically added.
Left barcode portion
Units
Guard position
bar of Prefix
code
First 5 digits of
the input data
Right barcode portion
Center
bar
Next 5 digits of
the input data
5 digits
5 digits
Check Guard
code
bar
1 digit
● When adding Readable code (number; human readable code), select either 5×5 or 5×7 as the size of the
numbers added.
Example of EAN-13 with
identification numbers
Example of EAN13 Add-On 5
with identification numbers
Conditions whereby Readable code can be added to be printed
No.
1
2
Condition
Made the number of lines of the EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC-A, UPC-E and EAN-13 Add-On 5
printing item 1 line or 2 lines.
Set character size 12×16, 18×24, or 24×32 (1 line only).
(2) Precautions when using EAN Prefix
●Whether to set bar code EAN-13, EAN-8, EAN-13 Add-on 5 country code by character input or print format
is selected.
Number of digits of bar code
Country code
Data
Check digit
Total number of digits
EAN-13
2
10
1
13
EAN-8
2
5
1
8
EAN-13
2
15
1
18
Add-On 5
EAN Prefix
Set value
Character input
Print format
Set by print format without
Country code is input at the head
Handling of country code
including country code in the
of the data.
data.
Print format screen
Country code is not displayed.
Set the country code.
For EAN-13, input 12 digits, for For EAN-13 input 10 digits, for
EAN-8, input 7 digits and for
EAN-8, input 5 digits and for
EAN-13 Add-On 5, input 17
EAN-13 Add-On 5, input 15
Edit message screen
digits, all including the country
digits, without including the
code.
country code.
However, check digit is
However, the check digit is
excluded.
excluded.
●When the country code is changed at the Print format screen, the country code for all the bar code items in
that message is changed to the same value.
9-1 ●Bar code, 2-dimensional code
(3) Precautions when using code 128
● The 2 modes include Code set B (Alphanumeric, numbers, symbols) and Code set C (numbers only).
The mode can be changed by pressing “Code B” or “Code C” on the keyboard.
● In the case of continuous numbers, the bar can be shortened by setting to code set C.
● When printing in 2 lines or more, only one “code 128" can be set for one column.
If you attempt to set more than one “code 128" for the same row, an “illegal bar code 2" error occurs.
●When code set was changed over, return to the original code set.
(Example)
1 Code set B: ABCD<C>0123<B>
2 Code set C: 0123<B>ABCD<C>45<B>EF<C>
↑
<B>, <C>: Code set changeover keys
Return to original
(4) Precautions when using DM code
● Set as shown below for print item to which DM is to be set:
(i) Number of lines : 1 line
(ii) Character size : 5×8, 12×16, 18×24
● Set barcode type on the print format screen.
Data matrix: Type of size and maximum character number
Character size
5×8
12×16
18×24
DM size
8×32 16×16 16×36 16×48 18×18 20×20 22×22 24×24
No. of vertical dots *Note 1
8
16
16
16
18
20
22
24
Numbers only
20
24
64
98
36
44
60
72
Alphabetical
10
12
32
49
18
22
30
36
characters only
Max. number
of characters Combination of
alphabetical
10-19 12-23 32-63 49-97 18-35 22-43 30-59 36-71
characters and
numbers
(The number of characters that can be coded differs according to the numbers/characters string.)
(Note 1) Use the number of vertical dots provided in the table for speed calculation.
[Rules for calculating number of digits]
Alphabetical characters are treated as one digit per character.
Single independent numbers are treated as one digit per number.
In the case of consecutive numbers, two numbers are treated as one digit.
If a single number is left over, it is treated as one digit.
The total is within 12 digits for 16×16 and within 10 digits for 8×32.
(Example 1) Basic calculation rule
A
B
C
3 characters =
3 digits
1
2
1 digit
3
4
5
1 digit
D
6
E
3 characters =
3 digits
Total 9 digits
1 digit
●Bar code, 2-dimensional code 9-2
(Example 2) Example of Character input for DM 16×16
Print contents
Number of characters Digit calculation result
Doable or not
(DM16×16)
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
123456789012345678901234
1 digit ・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・ 1 digit
24 characters
12 digits
23 characters
12 digits
23 characters
13 digits
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
1234567890123456789012A
1 digit ・・・・・・・・
・・・・
・・・・ 1 digit
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
｛
123456789012345678901AB
1 digit ・・
・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・ 1 digit
Doable. Result is less
than or equal to
maximum of 12 digits.
Not doable.
Result exceeds
maximum of 12 digits.
● Input characters within the specified digit number for print item to which barcode has been set.
● When alphabet letters and numerals occur together number of characters which can be coded will vary
depending on character array.
● When “DM8×32” is used, set item “character size 1"on the user environment setup screen to “5×8”.
9-3 ●Bar code, 2-dimensional code
(5) Precautions when using QR Code and Micro QR
● Set as shown below for print item to which QR code or Micro QR is to be set:
(i) Number of lines : 1 line
(ii) Character size : 18×24, 24×32 (for QR code), 12×16 (for Micro QR)
● Set barcode type on the print format screen.
● Set error correction level on the various print setup screen.
For Micro QR, printing will be performed in error correction level M even if level Q selected.
QR code: Type of size and maximum character number
Character size
18×24
24×32
12×16
QR code size/Micro QR size
25×25
29×29
15×15
21×21
No. of vertical dots (for speed calculation)
21
25
29
15
Error correction level
M
Q
M
Q
M
Q
M
Numbers only
34
27
63
48
101
77
18
Capital alphabetical characters,
Max. number
20-29 16-22 38-58 29-43 61-96 47-72 11-15
numbers
of characters
Combination of alphabetical
14-29 11-22 26-58 20-43 42-96 32-72 7-15
characters, numbers and symbols
(The number of characters that can be coded differs according to the character string.)
● Input characters within the specified digit number for print item to which barcode has been set.
● When alphabet letters and numerals occur together number of characters which can be coded will vary
depending on character array.
●"QR code printing" is added on "User environment setup" screen. It makes users possible to select the
direction of QR code / Micro QR code to be printed.
●Please check if QR code / Micro QR code can be read properly by barcode reader before executing this
new function of "QR code printing".
Character
orientation
QR code printing
180-degree rotation
Printing example
Remarks
Rotated by 180 degrees
and printed.
0 or 1
Normal
Printed in normal
direction.
180-degree rotation
Printed in normal
direction.
2 or 3
Normal
Rotated by 180 degrees
and printed.
●Bar code, 2-dimensional code 9-4
(6) Precautions when using GS1 DataBar(Limited, Omnidirectional, Staced)
code
● Thirteen(13) characters can be inputted.
When a GS1 DataBar Limited is set, the heading character shall be 0 or 1 (zero or one).
● When adding Readable code (number; human readable code), select either 5×5 or 5×7 as the size of the
numbers added.
When GS1 DataBar with Human readable code is printed, the printed width will be bigger than that of
“without Human readable code”.
● Application Identifier(01) is automatically added to Human readable code.
● Please pay attention to the fact that there is an output of Application Identifier(01) or no output of
Application Identifier(01), depending on the barcode reader.
Example of GS1 DataBar (Limited)
with identification numbers
Example of GS1 DataBar (Omnidirectional)
with identification numbers
Example of GS1 DataBar (Stacked)
with identification numbers
Conditions whereby Readable code can be added to be printed
No.
Condition
1 Made the number of lines of the GS1 DataBar printing item 1 line or 2 lines.
In case of GS1 DataBar (Limited and Omnidirectional) :
Set either of character size 12×16, 18×24, or 24×32 (1 line only).
2
In case of GS1 DataBar (Stacked) :
Set character size 18×24 (1 line only)
9-5 ●Bar code, 2-dimensional code
Setting high-speed printing (Optional on RX2-S)
(1) Overview
● Three modes of HM, NM or QM can be selected.
By selecting the mode, high quality printing result can be ensured according to the line speed.
HM mode
NM mode
Remarks
HM mode is equivalent to particle use
percentage of 1/1.
In the 2-line print setting, NM mode is
equivalent to ink drop use percentage
of 1/1.5.
If the line speed remains the same,
print width in the NM mode will widen
by 1.5 times with respect to HM mode.
1 Necessary conditions to perform high-speed print
● When all necessary conditions from Nos. 1 to 7 are satisfied, high-speed print HM, NM or QM
mode can be selected.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Item
Conditions
Number of lines of all columns is the same.
Print line
(Refer to Table in “ 2 Type of high-speed print and number of
vertical dots used” for number of print lines available.)
Character size of all print items is the same.
Character size
(Refer to Table in “ 2 Type of high-speed print and number of
vertical dots used” for character sizes available.)
Line spacing of all columns is the same. However, if Line spacing is
Line spacing
set to 3 or more, High-speed printing is NOT available.
Barcode
NOT available.
Character orientation 0 or 1.
Ink drop use rate
1/1
Ink drop charge rule Standard (Single scan or interlaced)
Print specifications
[Stop
Message name [
2nd screen
1st screen
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
]
3rd screen
M
９０ （0〜99）
Character height
０１ （1/1〜1/16）
Ink drop use
High-speed print
HM
NM
Manual
Startup
HOME
QM
Character width ０００２ （0〜3999）
Printing method
1:ＡＢＣ
←
ＡＢＣ
0:ＡＢＣ
→
2:
2（１：Single scan
←
ＡＢＣ
Character
orientation
3:
→
２：Interlaced
High-speed print
Arrow : Printing direction
３：Mixed）
Edit
message
Print
format
Print start
delay
Change unit
Sensor
Print start delay
Print start
００００
（0〜9999）SC
Back
●Setting high-speed print (Optional on RX2-S) 9-6
2 Type of high-speed print and number of vertical dots used
● Number of vertical dots used in high-speed print is shown in Table below.
● When calculating printing preparation time, etc., pay attention to number of vertical dots.
Number of vertical dots used in the nozzle diameter is 65μm.
Ink drop use rate
1-line print
Character size 12×16
Character size 5×5
Character size 5×7
Character size 5×8
Character size 7×10
Character size 5×5
Character size 5×7
Character size 5×8
2-line print
3-line print
1/1
NM
24
15
21
24
30
20
28
32
HM
16
10
14
16
20
15
21
24
QM
25
35
40
1/2
32
20
28
32
40
30
42
48
Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors
When you would like to make changes on the buttons, icons and status colors,
please contact your nearest local distributor.
(1) “Standby/Ready Change Button”
● When the Control Menu Buttons are available on the touch screen, “Standby/Ready Change Button” will be
displayed ([Disable] and [Enable]).
● When this button is used (i.e., Enabled), the number of button pressing can be reduced by one (1).
Standby/Ready Change Button
Standby/Ready Change Button
State
Disable
Enable
Standby
[standby
]
[
Standby
]
Ready
[Ready
]
[
Ready
]
Standby state (with button)
Print description
[
Message name[SAMPLE1
Standby
]
Com=0
] No. 1
2015.07.07 12:45
Current user ID：admin
《
》
M
Manual Shutdown
Ready state (with button)
Print description
Message name[SAMPLE1
《
9-7 ●Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors
[
Ready
] No. 1
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Current user ID：admin
》
M
Manual Shutdown
● “Ready” state → “Standby” state switching
● With the conveyor interlock being activated by “Ready” signal, should this “Ready” signal be turned to
“Standby”, the conveyor will stop.
Ready
1 Press Ready
Then press OK .
and the message “Print Abort Confirmation” appears.
Press Ready.
[
Print description
Message name[SAMPLE1
Ready
]
] No. 1
Com=0
Current user ID：admin
《
》
184
＝＝＝＝＝
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Shutdown
＝＝＝＝＝
Print Abort Confirmation
Printing will be aborted.
Solution Press <OK> to abort.
OK
Cancel
Press OK.
● “Standby” state → “Ready” state switching
1 Press Standby
Then press OK .
Standby
and the message “Print Confirmation” appears.
Press Standby.
Print description
Message name[SAMPLE1
[
Standby
] No. 1
]
Com=0
《
》
＝＝＝＝＝
183
2015.07.07 12:45
Current user ID：admin
Print Confirmation
M
Manual Shutdown
＝＝＝＝＝
The newly created print data will be printed.
Solution Press <OK> to print.
OK
Cancel
Press OK.
●Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors 9-8
(2) Change of Icons
● The icons displayed on touch screen will be changed.
● With this change, the icons displayed on the screen can be seen easily.
● For icon type selection, please contact your local distributor.
● Icons displayed or not is set by “ICON Display” [Enable] or [Disable] on touch screen setup.
Supported Icons
Icon Type
Example
No.
Outline
Description
1
Default
Factory default
2
English
Icon + English language
3
Japanese
Icon + Japanese language
4
No Text
Icon only
Startup
<Example of Icon Type : ‘English’>
9-9 ●Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors
Manual
1 line
(3) Change of Status Color
● The background color of IJP status will be changed.
● With this changes, the background color of “Ready” will be green which is the same color as the status
indicator light.
Background Colors of IJP Status
Status Color
State
Before Change
After Change
Stop
White
[Stop
]
Standby
Green
[Standby
]
Ready
Blue
[Ready
]
Starting
Green
[Starting
]
Light blue [Starting
]
Ink heating
Green
[Ink heating
]
Light blue [Ink heating
]
Stopping
Green
[Stopping
]
Light blue [Stopping
]
Drop adjust
Green
[Drop adjust
]
Light blue [Drop adjust
]
Cover open
Green
[Cover open
]
Light blue [Cover open
]
Service
Green
[Service
]
Light blue [Service
]
[
]
Fault
Red
Fault
White
[Stop
]
Light blue [Standby
Green
Red
[Ready
[
Fault
]
]
]
●Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors 9-10
Icon List
(1) Operation Control Buttons Group
Icon List 1 - Operation Control Buttons Group
No.
Button Name
1
Startup
2
Shutdown
3
Manual
4
Com=0
5
Com=1
6
HOME
7
Apply
Default
Icon
English Japanese No Text
(2) Common Buttons Group
No.
9-11 ●Icon List
Icon List 2 - Common Buttons Group
Icon
Button Name
Default
English Japanese
8
Decrement
9
Increment
10
Enter
11
Previous column
12
Next column
13
Previous item
14
Next item
15
Previous display
16
Next display
17
Back space
18
Delete
19
OK
20
Cancel
21
Back
No Text
(3) Keyboard Buttons Group
Icon List 3 - Keyboard Buttons Group
No.
Button Name
22
Change
23
Change V
24
ABC
25
123/Sign
26
Logo
27
Accent 1
28
Accent 2
29
Greek
30
Russian 1
31
Russian 2
32
Arabic 1
33
Arabic 2
34
Arabic number
35
Dedicated
36
Kana
37
Kana Convert
38
Pinyin Convert
39
Code Convert
Default
Icon
English Japanese
No Text
V
●Icon List 9-12
(4) Mini-Keyboard Buttons Group
Icon List 4 - Mini-Keyboard Buttons Group
No.
Button Name
40
ABC
41
123
42
Logo
43
Special 1
44
Special 2
45
Arabic number
46
Kana
Icon
Default
English
Japanese
No Text
(5) Print Format Screen Buttons Group
Icon List 5 - Print Format Screen Buttons Group
No.
9-13 ●Icon List
Button Name
47
1 line
48
2 lines
49
3 lines
50
4 lines
51
1st line
52
2nd line
53
3rd line
54
4th line
55
To overall
56
Delete column
57
Inset column
58
Add column
Icon
Default
English
Japanese
No Text
INDEX
2-Dimensional code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
A
Air purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
ASCII codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32, 5-38
B
Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-14, 5-17, 5-18, 5-38, 5-46, 5-59, 9-1, 9-2, 9-4, 9-5, 9-6
Beaker with handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
C
Cable clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Cable seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 4-4
Calendar character code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Calendar conditions transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1, 5-23, 5-25
Character size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-14, 5-17, 5-27, 5-32, 5-46
5-47, 5-58, 9-1, 9-2, 9-4, 9-6
Circulation system environment setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Cleaning bottle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 6-3, 6-9, 6-12, 6-16
Cleaning stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Code128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18, 9-2
Count character code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Count conditions transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1, 5-24, 5-26
Create new user ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-9
Current time output transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35, 5-36, 5-53
D
Data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51, 5-52, 5-54, 5-55, 9-2
Date/time setup transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35, 5-36
Delete user ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-9
E
EAN prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13, 5-46, 9-1
EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-46, 5-59, 9-1
Eject ink (Goes to Standby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Exhaust duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
EZJ127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-7, 4-13, 4-14, 4-24
F
Free layout transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1, 5-19, 5-21
G
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1, 4-2, 4-6, 6-1
GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
H
High-speed printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14, 5-16, 5-46, 5-59, 9-1
●Index 9-14
I
Ink circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Ink drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-4, 6-19
Ink filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-17, 6-19, 7-1
Ink filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-17
Ink refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-4, 6-8, 6-20, 6-31
Ink replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 6-3, 6-4, 6-5
Ink stream alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10, 6-13, 6-14
Inter-character space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 5-13, 5-14, 5-17, 5-27, 5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-42, 5-46
Item number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-7, 5-12, 5-46, 5-58
L
Line count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-14, 5-17, 5-46, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54
Line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-14, 5-17, 5-46, 9-6
Login management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-9
M
Magnifying glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 6-22
Makeup filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 6-21, 6-23, 7-1
Makeup refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-17
Message name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, 5-11, 5-46
Mini Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
N
No-cleaning stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Nozzle backwash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-9, 6-10, 6-11
Nozzle property test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26, 6-27, 6-28
Nozzle seal plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Nozzle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
O
On-line/Off-line transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2, 5-33, 5-55
Open collector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-8, 4-9, 4-13, 4-14, 4-18, 4-19, 4-22
Overwrite-enabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-49, 5-53, 5-54, 5-62
Overwrite-protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-37, 5-48, 5-53, 5-54
P
Parts usage time management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Periodic replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Plastic bag with zipper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Pressure relief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-32
Print condition transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-3, 5-12, 5-18, 5-61
Print data recall transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-9, 5-66, 5-67
Print data registration transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-10, 5-11
Print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 4-1, 4-2, 6-7, 6-9, 6-10, 6-13, 6-26, 8-3
Print head cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 2-2
Printings transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-3, 5-7, 5-8, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-62, 5-66, 5-67
Product speed matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13, 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, 4-20, 5-15, 5-16, 5-46, 5-61, 6-28
9-15 ●Index
Q
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51, 5-52, 5-54, 5-55, 9-4
R
Recovery filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 6-22, 6-24, 7-1
Recovery-line cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-16
Remote operation transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2, 5-34
T
t=async. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54
t=fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-63
Terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-5, 4-6
Time control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2, 5-35, 5-36, 5-47
Totem pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-8, 4-13, 4-14
Transmission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37, 5-38
Tweezers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 6-9
U
User conditions setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-3, 3-9
User pattern character transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-26, 5-32
Using environment setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 3-3, 3-9, 3-10
W
Wide mouth bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Wiping paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 6-1, 6-7, 6-17, 6-22, 6-31, 6-36
●Index 9-16
2-L3009-4B

Источник

Contents
Table of Contents
Troubleshooting
Bookmarks

Quick Links

Instruction Manual

INK JET PRINTER FOR INDUSTRIAL MARKING

HITACHI Printer

Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.

This printer employs a noncontact, ink-jet method to print onto a print target.

This instruction manual describes the basic operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and other detailed

handling procedures of the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.

If the printer is improperly handled or maintained, it may not operate smoothly and may become defective or

cause an accident. It is therefore essential that you read this manual to gain a complete understanding of the

printer and use it correctly.

After thoroughly reading the manual, properly store it for future reference.

IF you changed the language of the screen by mistake, see Chapter 7.8 «Selecting Languages».

Model RX2

Summary of Contents for Hitachi IJ RX2-SD160